Citation
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS from 1973 to 1995 : a successful program for arts in general education "there's more than one way to make an A"

Material Information

Title:
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS from 1973 to 1995 : a successful program for arts in general education "there's more than one way to make an A"
Creator:
Adams, Elizabeth
Publication Date:
Language:
English
Physical Description:
v, 103 leaves : ; 29 cm.

Subjects

Subjects / Keywords:
Art education ( jstor )
Art teachers ( jstor )
Arts ( jstor )
Classrooms ( jstor )
Counties ( jstor )
Music education ( jstor )
Music teachers ( jstor )
Schools ( jstor )
Teachers ( jstor )
Visual arts ( jstor )
Arts -- Study and teaching -- Maryland -- Montgomery County ( lcsh )
Dissertations, Academic -- Music -- UF ( lcsh )
Music thesis, Ph.D ( lcsh )
Genre:
bibliography ( marcgt )
theses ( marcgt )
non-fiction ( marcgt )

Notes

Thesis:
Thesis (Ph. D.)--University of Florida, 2002.
Bibliography:
Includes bibliographical references.
Additional Physical Form:
Also available online.
General Note:
Printout.
General Note:
Vita.
Statement of Responsibility:
by Elizabeth Adams.

Record Information

Source Institution:
University of Florida
Rights Management:
All applicable rights reserved by the source institution and holding location.
Resource Identifier:
0029636309 ( ALEPH )
51947026 ( OCLC )

Downloads

This item has the following downloads:


Full Text












PROJECT ARTS/INTERRELATED ARTS FROM 1973 TO 1995:
A SUCCESSFUL PROGRAM FOR ARTS IN GENERAL EDUCATION
"THERE'S MORE THAN ONE WAY TO MAKE AN A"














By

ELIZABETH ADAMS












A DISSERTATION PRESENTED TO THE GRADUATE SCHOOL OF THE UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT
OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA 2002

































To Dr. Phyllis E. Dorman,
Mentor and Friend















ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Many individuals have assisted in this research. First, I owe a great deal to my sister, Dr. Catherine Adams. I thank her for her editing skills, for retyping seemingly endless versions of this document, and for her patience. I deeply appreciate the patience and skill of librarians Robena Cornwell and Michele Wilbank-Fox. I thank them for helping me find everything I needed.

I am extremely grateful for the guidance of the chairman of my Graduate

Committee, Dr. Charles Hoffer. I benefitted from his expertise and encouragement and also from that of my other committee members in the School of Music, Dr. Timothy Brophy, Dr. David Kushner, and Dr. Camille Smith. To my outside committee member, Dr. Linda Lamme, I offer particular thanks for her encouragement and direction. I consider it a great honor to have worked with these truly exceptional educators.

Several of my former colleagues in Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS were

particularly helpful in providing detailed information about how the program worked. These include Dr. Ann Richardson, former coordinator of the program, Betty Weincek, dance specialist, and Janis Jones, music specialist.

Finally, I am extremely grateful for the support and encouragement of my husband, Dr. David Young.















TABLE OF CONTENTS
VAze

ACKNOW LEDGM ENTS ................................................ iii

A B STR A C T .......................................................... vi

CHAPTER

I IN TRODU CTION ................................................. I

Purpose .......................................................... I
Research Q uestions ................................................ 1
R ationale ........................................................ 2
Theoretical Fram ew ork .............................................. 3
C ontext ................ ............... .......... ................. 4
L im itations ....................................................... 8
D efinitions of Term s ............................................... 9

2 REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE ................................... 10

Historical Trends of Arts in Schools .................................. 10
Program Development and Evaluation ................................ 20
Effectiveness of Arts in General Education ............................. 25

3 M ETHODOLOGY ................................................ 31

D esign of the Study ............................................... 31
Procedures/Instrumentation ......................................... 33

4 PROGRAM HISTORY ............................................ 39

Project ARTS: The Beginning ....................................... 39
Interrelated A RTS ................................................ 49

5 FIN D IN G S ...................................................... 60

Recommendations for Program Implementation ......................... 61
L ongevity ....................................................... 61
Q uality ......................................................... 64
Feasibility ....................................................... 66

iv









6 CON CLU SION S ................................................. 69

Sum m ary ....................................................... 69
Im plications ..................................................... 70
Recommendations for Further Study .................................. 72

APPENDIX

A ESEA TITLE III PROJECT ARTS FUNDING .......................... 75

B LESSON PLAN .................................................. 79

C CURRICULUM RESOURCE PACKAGE ............................. 81

D DARTS LESSON ................................................ 92

REFEREN CES ........................................................ 95

BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH ............................................. 103





























v















Abstract of Dissertation Presented to the Graduate School
of the University of Florida in Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy

PROJECT ARTS/INTERRELATED ARTS FROM 1973 TO 1995:
A SUCCESSFUL PROGRAM FOR ARTS IN GENERAL EDUCATION
"THERE'S MORE THAN ONE WAY TO MAKE AN A"

By

Elizabeth Adams

December 2002

Chair: Dr. Charles Hoffer
Major Department: Music

This study reviews the implementation and progress of a project integrating the

four art forms (music, dance, visual art, and drama) into general education curricula. The program, known as Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS, existed from 1973 to 1995 in the Montgomery County, Maryland school system. The study uses inter-views, personal recollections, and existing documents to determine why this program lasted so much longer than most arts-in-general-education programs. Its description is offered as a potential guideline for those wishing to replicate, approximate, and/or support similar programs.

Interview data, formal reports, reflective observations, and photographs are

presented to describe and evaluate the program. Conclusions review factors related to its quality, feasibility, and longevity. Finally, implications for replicating such a program and for further study are presented.


vi















CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION

During the early 1 970s there was a swell of interest in introducing art in general education programs. The Education Amendments of 1974 provided $750,000 for funds designed to assist state and local education agencies in integrating the arts into general education (Rogers 1977). In January 1978, the Music Educators Journal devoted an entire issue to some of these programs, many of which are described later in this study. The average length of these programs was from 2 to 5 years. The Project ARTS! Interrelated ARTS program in the Montgomery County, Maryland schools existed for over 20 years. This study presents an arts-in-general-education program from inception to demise.

Purpose

The purpose of this study is to examine a program (Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS) that existed for more than 20 years and to analyze the factors that contributed to its longevity. It is hoped that such an examination will provide guidelines for educators who wish to replicate, approximate, or support similar programs.

Research Questions

Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was a remarkable program that introduced the arts into general education in Montgomery County, Maryland, from 1973 to 1995. The program, which endured for 23 years, warrants investigation to determine how and why it was successful.


1







2

The overall question this research proposes to answer, then, is what are the attributes of a successful interrelated arts program ? More specifically, because this program lasted for more than 20 years, what major factors led to the longevity of this program? Another important question is, "How did this program achieve the quality that led to its longevity?" A final question is, "How was this program able to maintain the funding necessary for it to operate for such a long period of time?" This study addressed these primary research questions.

Rationale

Although there seems to be an increase in the body of literature concerning the

value of interrelating arts and academic skills, little attention has been paid to the manner in which this interrelation may be best accomplished. Support and training in the arts for classroom teachers is, at best, a random commodity in most school systems. Curricula come and go at an alarming rate, and arts-in-general-education programs are no exception. Information on factors that contributed to the longevity of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS may assist other curriculum designers in planning arts-ingeneral-education programs. Theories as to the and longevity of the program are examined in light of data collected from documents, interviews, and personal recollections.

Schools are often burdened with increasingly greater expectations; yet at the same time they are criticized for producing graduates who are not able to read, write, or calculate on a sufficiently high level to hold jobs or become productive community citizens. Periodically, school districts try to "fix" the problem of lower test scores with a "back to basics" movement. This movement is usually defined as reducing "frills" (including art and music). Remer (1996) claims that for the arts to be considered a basic







3

part of the core curriculum, educators must find ways to improve the public's perception of the educational importance of the arts. To accomplish this, it is apparent that teachers and administrators of public schools will need to continually confront the problem of how they relate to the community as represented by school boards, local political groups, state legislators, and the voting public.

Because proficiency in the basic skills is a priority for school systems, one

frequently encounters the belief that any.school activity that takes time away from the study of reading, writing, and mathematics will interfere with the ability of students to reach acceptable achievement levels. It seems, however, that more of the same kind of instruction in these skills fails to produce improvement. Despite the problems of arts gartiering less importance in schools, there appears to be a movement led by teachers who have discovered the power of integrating the arts into their teaching either in partnership with arts specialists or (by necessity) on their own (Shepherd 1999). These teachers need help answering the questions "Why teach the arts?" and "Precisely what should be taught?" and perhaps most important of all, "How should this be done?" (Cornett 1999)..

Theoretical Framework

Change theory provides a logical framework for this study. Change CAN occur in many ways When change occurs within a system, such as a school system, it is a process; not an event. A change will cause a ripple effect throughout the system (Persichette 1999). This may be categorized as a diffusion, or a process by which innovation is communicated through various channels over a period of time (Rogers 1995). A change framework may be summarized as follows. A change agent wishes to communicate an innovation to an intended adopter. This is accomplished by using a







4

change process that establishes a channel through the change environment (Ellsworth 2000). In the case of Project ARTS, the group called Concerned Citizens for the Arts may be viewed as the change agent, and the adopter was Montgomery County School System, which acquired the funds to implement the program. A program to implement such a change needs administrative support, a curricular design that includes some flexibility, and teacher commitment (Ruccius 1994).These factors were all included in Project ARTS/Inteffelated ARTS.

Context

Hallinger and Murphy (1986) state that schools can be understood only in context. Ideas, people and events cannot be understood if isolated from their contexts. Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was a program that was conceived and implemented in Montgomery County, Maryland. Therefore, a brief history of the political, economic and educational development of the county is offered to provide a contextual background for the program.

The Montgomery County Public School system is in an area known as a bedroom community for the federal government. Following the lead of federal agencies, a number of corporations (mostly in the areas of research and development and high technology) moved into the county. This led to the growth of a prosperous area where community residents had high incomes, academic training, and economic opportunity. Because continuous funding for Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was a major reason for its longevity, it is important to note that this program existed in an economically stable environment.







5

Growth of MontRome1y Coggy

Montgomery County, Maryland was largely a farming county until after the Civil War when the farmland character of the county slowly changed to suburban. The first countywide educational system was established in 1860. By 1920, 80% of the county was still used for dairy farming. As the nation's capital grew, so did the surrounding community, and with this growth came the need for planning and control. Soon, federal employees and professionals were seeking residences outside of Washington DC, but within easy commuting distance.

The period between the two world wars brought dramatic increases in population as federal government agencies expanded into the county. These agencies included the Naval Medical Center, Taylor Naval Research and Development Center, the National Institutes of Health, and Walter Reed Hospital. By the beginning of 1941, there were 167, 063 white students and 2,044 black students in the Montgomery County Public School System. In the next 5 0 years the population expanded to 10 times this number. By the end of the twentieth century, approximately 850,000 people lived in Montgomery County. The county became a prosperous suburb of the District of Columbia, and also the home of many high technological and biotechnological. industries as well as expanded Federal agencies such as the Department of Energy and the National Bureau of Standards (Sween 1984).

By the early 1950s, the annual budget of Montgomery County Public Schools (MCPS) had passed $20 million, with some 40,000 students attending schools there. Throughout the 1950s, the school population grew by about 5,000 students a year, and the county built 50 new elementary schools and rebuilt or enlarged several others. During the same period, MCPS opened eight large high schools and a dozen junior highs.







6

In 1970 there was a lower-than-expected enrollment in the elementary schools, which resulted in the closing of some of the smaller schools. Due to the rapid growth of industry, much of the farmland in the eastern part of the county had by this time disappeared.

Racial segregation ended officially in 1954, and along with the issues of school closings came problems of racially unbalanced schools. This situation was partially solved by redrawing school boundaries and by pairing mainly white and mainly black schools, with one building and staff handling lower grades of both populations and another handling the upper grades. Another problem was the increasing number of children from homes where English was not the primary language. The establishment of English for Speakers of Other Languages (ESOL) helped more than 7,500 students, most of whom were Asian or Hispanic.

By 1990, public school enrollment in MCPS was over 100,000 and climbing steadily. Most of the population growth took place in the northern part of the county, largely due to the enlargement and improvement of Interstate 270. Between 1985 and 1999, MCPS built 38 new schools, modernized another 50, and was using more than 250 portable classrooms to relieve overcrowding at a number of schools. At this point, the total included 23 high schools, 32 middle schools, and 123 elementary schools. The system was hiring 1,000 new teachers each year, and the annual cost of public education passed the one billion dollar level, or about 45% of the total county budget (Sween and Offutt 1999).

Background of the Project ARTS Anterrelated ARTS Program

In Montgomery County, in 1973, a group of citizens (Concerned Citizens for the Arts in the Public Schools) met with the County Board of Education to discuss the







7

limitations of the county's existing arts programs. As a result of this meeting, the School Board appointed a Task Force on the arts to study the existing arts program. At this time most elementary schools had fall or part time teachers in both music and visual art, but students were receiving 40 minutes a week (or less) of instruction in these subjects. The major recommendation was to begin an intensive staff development effort in the arts to assist classroom teachers in implementing arts, arts-related curriculum, and integrated arts experiences in their classrooms. The Task Force also recommended making dance and drama (previously excluded) an integral part of the arts program at the elementary school level.

The group submitted a proposal for classroom-teacher training in the arts to

Elementary and Secondary Education Act (ESEA) Title III that was approved for Federal Government funding in 1974. Both Montgomery County Public Schools and ESEA Title III funds supported the project that was first known as Projects ARTS (Arts Resource Teams in the School). Additional grants were received from the United States Office of Education through the Alliance for Arts Education and the National Committee, Arts for the Handicapped (Office of Education 1977).

Initially, Project ARTS was a 3-year pilot program intended to be fully

incorporated into the local school system. It was not designed to take the place of specific art and music specialists. The program serviced 18 pilot schools, and in compliance with federal guidelines, also served two parochial schools and two schools in St. Mary's County. The project was designed to provide assistance, training, and support to classroom teachers in an interrelated arts approach to learning, Throughout its existence, the program witnessed many changes. Some of these changes reflected current trends in education at the time they were instituted (such as working with special







8

populations, establishing a program for gifted and talented students, and moving the focus to middle schools). Others were the result of diminishing funding for arts-related programs as computers became more visible in the schools.

A variety of service courses may be taken in Montgomery County for

recertification or for master's equivalency. Consequently, the arts teams taught an service course for teachers, principals, and specialists. The course was then designated as required for a teacher to receive full service from the arts team. Full service consisted of the teacher working one-on-one with one of each of the four arts specialists for a total of four semesters.

Limitations

The original program was designed for a particular time and geographic location. Although the findings of the present study are therefore relevant to a specific time and place, many aspects of the program (such as teacher in-service or procuring of funds) may be adapted by other populations. The validity and reliability of qualitative data do not need to meet the rigor of precision associated with quantitative data (Phelps, Ferrara, and Goolsby 1993). Methods of data collection in this study include observation, interview, and record review. These methods involve subjective analysis. Therefore, findings are subject to the limitations common to all qualitative data.

Delimitations, built in to the design of this study include the fact that it is specific to one program that existed in one school system during one time period. An additional delimitation is the fact that no evaluations were made that concerned student achievement, although evaluations of student achievement in other programs are reported.







9

Definitions of Terms

The following terms are intended to convey the meanings defined below:

0 The Arts: Music, drama, visual art, and dance.

0 ARTS: An acronym for Arts Resource Teams in Schools

0 Arts Education: A program that includes all four art forms

0 Department of Aesthetic Education: In Montgomery County Schools,
education in and through the arts including visual art; general,
instrumental, and choral music; dance; and drama

& Gifted and Talented: Students identified as gifted and talented in one or
more art form by teacher-designed testing instruments.

0 Interrelated Arts (no acronym): In the context of Montgomery County
Schools, one or more art forms used as a strategy to teach academic skills 9 Interrelated ARTS (acronym): The name of the arts in general-education
program in Montgomery County, Maryland

0 Project ARTS: The name of the arts-in-general-education program for the
first three years of its existence.

0 Special Needs Students: Students requiring either a special classroom
situation or their own schools to help with various needs such as
developmental, orthopedic, sensory, etc















CHAPTER 2
REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

A review of the literature related to the history of the arts in the school classroom throughout the United States follows. I describe programs developed during the last decades of the last century, noting how such programs became relevant to the use of arts in classroom teaching. Finally, I present empirical studies relevant to the topic of integrating arts into general curricula.

Historical Trends of Arts in Schools

Aesthetic education began to gain some presence in the schools in the 1960s when Karel (1966) noted a definite need for an arts curriculum in teacher education. Nevertheless, although United States competitiveness stressed the values of problem solving, higher order thinking skills, risk taking, team work, and creativity, society in general seemed to remain oblivious to the fact that arts are more than a "frill" or source of entertainment (Hanna 1992).

In 1962 President Kennedy appointed Francis Keppel as Commissioner of

Education. He also appointed Kathryn Bloom as Director of Cultural Affairs. By 1965 these appointments led to the development of the Arts and Humanities Program. Keppel was an eloquent advocate of the arts in education. The year 1965 became significant for arts education when the passing of The Elementary and Secondary Education Act (ESEA) further legitimized arts and humanities education. The National Endowment of the Arts and the National Endowment for the Humanities were also founded in 1965. By


10







11

1966, an estimated $ 100 million (mostly under ESEA titles) dealt in some way with arts education. Money from the Arts and Humanities Program backed many programs to introduce theater and dance to school curricula and did much to strengthen all the arts in general education (Murphy and Jones 1976).

Even so, little concern was given to the concept of classroom teachers providing arts programs or relating arts to academic curriculum before the 1970s. Some schools employed music specialists, but they were usually responsible for so many students that ongoing programs were difficult to maintain. Reynolds (1966), for example, described teaching a 30-minute lesson each week to 40 classes. She also complained of no carryover or reinforcement, of all classes using the same text, and of classroom teachers remaining in their rooms rather than participating in the lessons. New Directions

There was a great expansion of support for the arts in the 1970s. This expansion was indicated by greatly augmented levels of both private and public spending in the arts (Blau 1989). In the mid 1970s there was some impact on teacher training programs that could be attributed to increasing awareness of the value of integrating arts and academics.

By that time, arts educators recognized a need for a balanced curriculum in

elementary education that developed all the sensory and cognitive capacities of children and that used all of the modes of expression possible to human beings (Eisner 1978). Broudy (1978) told educators that the case for arts education depends on what art can do to clarify and enrich experience that other subjects in the curriculum cannot. He indicated that arts are basic, that the aesthetic response is indispensable to all experience, and that instruction in the aesthetic response is basic and necessary (Broudy 1978).







12

An early constructive step to bring the arts into the mainstream of American education was the Central Midwestern Regional Educational Laboratory (CEMREL). Working with school systems, colleges, universities, and arts organization in the country, CEMREL developed eight Aesthetic Education Learning Centers. These centers were designed to provide curricular support to cooperating school systems, to bring together agencies and their resources, and to provide aesthetic education programs for local schools and communities. The centers were also planned to provide teacher education, develop aesthetic education curricula suited to each cooperating system, and be applicable to other systems nationwide (Rockefeller 1977).

In January 1978, the Music Educators Journal published a special issue dedicated to arts in general education. In the opening article Wenner (1978, p 28) said, "Arts in general education is a comprehensive approach to reducing the isolation that the arts have suffered from for far too many years." Fowler (197 8) suggested filtering arts through the entire curriculum as a way to put arts to obvious educational use. Fowler (1978) also noted that when the arts function to enhance general education, they promote a strong argument for their educational usefulness.

Since much of the burden for implementation of arts education falls to the

classroom teacher, it is necessary to provide service education for both administrators and teachers to help them understand the arts processes and their application (Fowler 1978). In addition to dedication and assistance from educators, such programs also require financial support. The National Alliance for Arts Education in Washington DC, founded in 1973, proved to be a great help in assisting state and local education agencies in integrating arts into general education. The goals of the alliance were threefold:







13

To facilitate a network for communication and cooperation among arts and
education groups and agencies

To provide at the Kennedy Center and elsewhere arts education programs that can
be showcased and transported as models for both the arts and education
communities

To provide technical assistance (Rogers 1978, p 40).

Support of arts in general education continued in the 1970s. The Arts in General Education Program (AIE) of the Rockefeller Foundation, with support from the Junior League,, supported five pilot schools that developed in-service courses in the arts. "The arts as processes are vital to education because mental growth is dependent on developing the perceptual skills within each of us. AIE switches emphasis from products to process" (Fowler 1979, pp 8-9).

The decade between 1967 and 1977 also saw a rise in the public's desire for more emphasis on basic education. Troubled by statistics that indicated a deterioration in the school population's ability to read and write, the public lined up behind a "back to basics" movement (Goodlad 1980). Another concern was that scheduling left little time for specialists to plan with classroom teachers to relate the arts to subjects being taught. Many specialists were suspicious of relating arts to other subjects and feared that the arts would be diluted. Furthermore, it was thought best that teachers not teach outside their discipline; and if the arts were used only to illustrate other subject areas, the value of correlation would be open to question (Wenner 1976). Changes in the 1980s

By 1980, Federal and State support of the arts had grown from 18 million to 145 million dollars (Blau 1989), but Federal programs in arts education were seriously undermined and perhaps effectively eliminated by the Education Consolidation Act of







14

198 1. Without encouragement of the arts at the Federal level, many states (particularly those with budget deficits) withdrew their support of arts programs. A Back to Basics movement in the late 1970s resulted, in the opinion of Efland (1978), in the teaching of fragmented bits and pieces of knowledge, and was thought to result in a general dumbing down of schooling. Critics of education suggested that the frills, defined differently by different people according to their biases, should be sacrificed so that greater time, money, and effort could be applied to the basics (i.e., reading, writing, and mathematics) (Turner 1984). Efland (1990) later suggested that educational behaviorists at this time did not return to the past, but instead imposed a set of technocratic controls on classroom practices that bored many students and limited the options of teachers, who then had to primarily teach material covered on standardized tests. Between 1977 and 1987, an increasing emphasis on tests such as the Standard Achievement Test was believed to have pushed the arts back to the educational periphery (Fowler 1988). By the end of the 1970s, many of the special programs and projects in the arts, including CEMRAL and the Arts in Education Program of the JDR YdFund had ceased to exist.

In 1982, the Illinois Alliance for Arts Education and that state's Board of

Education produced a document on arts education that was meant to be part of Illinois' 5-year comprehensive arts plan. Along with articles on the importance of arts education published by Eisner (1978), Broudy (1978), Fowler (1979), and others, Bealmer (1982) presented descriptions of six arts forms with examples of model programs.

One agency formed in 1982 was the Getty Center for Education in the Arts. Its main activity was to develop discipline-based visual arts programs in schools. Whether or not one subscribes to the specific outlines of the discipline-based model, this organization had a significant effect on the entire field of the arts (Fowler 1988).







15

In the late 1970s and early 1980s, a professor at the Harvard Graduate School of Education developed a theory of cognitive development. Culminating in the 1993 publication of Frames ofMind, Howard Gardner's theories of multiple intelligences provided a significant impact on arts education. Gardner's (1993) theory is based on a radically different view of the mind that yields a different view of school. It is a pluralistic view that recognizes many different and discrete facets of cognition and acknowledges that people have different cognitive strengths and styles. Gardner's theory suggests some obvious linkage with the arts. A focus on the first two areas (verbal/sequential and quantitative/ mathematical) comprises the greatest part of the school day. However the five other intelligences (musical, visual/spatial, physical/kinesthetic, knowledge about self and knowledge about others) may be directly related to arts instruction. The Galef Institute, a nonprofit organization founded in 1989 by business leader Andrew G. Galef and his wife, draws extensively on Gardner's theories. The Galef Institute focuses on an interdisciplinary curriculum taught by Galeftrained arts specialists and is used in many socially and economically challenged school districts throughout the country.

Despite these differing ways of viewing intelligence, a decline in the Scholastic Aptitude Test scores of high school students in the 1980s resulted in highly publicized reports concerning weaknesses in American education. The best known of these, A Nation at Risk (National Commission on Excellence in Education 1983), declared that the lack of academic rigor in schools should be corrected by more demanding academic requirements. In response, many states increased the number of courses required for high school graduation and, in turn, reduced the number of electives offered. The arts were considered at the bottom of a list of desirable subjects and were linked with







16

vocational education (Hoffer 1993). Elementary school teachers saw themselves as responsible for covering a year's work with a class, and their education programs tended to reinforce this view. Goodlad (1980) suggested that if (as is frequently the case) the malfunctioning culture of school begs attention, the same culture rarely encourages and supports what is needed to change.

Concern with "back to basics" of the 1980s continued to be a difficult problem for arts educators and their supporters to ignore. The prescription of the philosophy consisted of more math, science, and homework, fewer frill courses, and increased discipline (Klimpton 1985).

Fowler (1988) was concerned with rescuing the arts for America's children.

The near universal lack of sufficient arts in the preparation of classroom teachers
is historic practice bordering on scandal.... Given the pressures for achievement
in reading, mathematics, and other subjects in the compulsory curriculum,
classroom teachers simply do not value the arts sufficiently enough to give them
priority attention. Too many education administrators and school boards seem
quite content to look the other way. They dump the fall responsibility for art
instruction on classroom teachers in spite of their inadequacies, and they quite
consistently fail to understand the indispensable role of the arts specialists in
assuring that this responsibility is realized (Fowler 1988, p 154).

In an address given on September 16,1988 at the Montgomery County Board of Education retreat, Ann Richardson said that much of what is presently described in curricula for schools falls into narrow academic guidelines. Very little in teaching is concerned with interpretation, transformation, synthesis or new ideas (Richardson 1988). Chanain2 Trends

Toward the end of the 1980s, immense acceleration in the growth of knowledge and significant advances in technology prompted a growing recognition that education must be more than the mere acquisition of facts. No one denied that verbal and mathematical skills are basic. No one argued that children must be taught to read and to







17

add, but many believed that the teaching of these skills had limited effectiveness. "Americans want quality education in their schools. Quality education means total education, and total education means using every possible means to teach: not just reading and writing and calculating, but also feeling, moving, dancing, improvising, and creating" (Kiester 1985, p 27).

Barry (1988) noted that with budget cuts giving classroom teachers sole

responsibility for arts education, it would be necessary to provide proactive advocacy for full-time arts educators and comprehensive and in-depth instruction in the arts. He also suggested that attention be given to educating classroom teachers, preparing them to serve as arts instructors and also as advocates for arts education (Barry 1998). Instead of school arts programs being confined to "essential" vocational training, there appeared to be a need to promote curriculum building that is more rooted in culture. An interdisciplinary arts program is not believed to be a substitute for discrete learning of the various arts. However, applying a study of arts as a process for investigation and sharing worlds of leaning can serve to pull students into subject matter and give them ownership of it. In this way, as Fowler (1996) noted, learning becomes more inwardly directed and gives students more excitement and personal involvement.

Gradually the concerns of advocates for arts education began to be given more credence. In an article concerning music education in the United States, Fowler (1988) noted that:

Music is a natural adjunct to the study of history and peoples. Its very nature dictates that it have a place in these studies. It is difficult to understand how
social studies can be taught effectively without incorporating the arts, because
these symbolic systems can invoke periods and peoples in a way that words alone
cannot (Fowler 1988, p 154).







18

Integrating music within other subject areas is advantageous from a broad educational perspective. Using a subject such as music that evokes many positive feelings as a means of educating in other areas could well result in a much higher degree of understanding in those areas.

From a music teaching perspective, I believe there would be much to be gained by integrating music with other "core" subjects. Such integration would not be
difficult and might well solve many of the attitudinal problems teachers encounter
when they try to teach music (Baker 1990, pp I I 18).

Many have also written eloquently of the beneficial effects of interrelating all of the arts within the general curriculw-n. It has been noted that when a subject is related to other aspects of life, student interest and comprehension are enhanced (Lindsay 1978). Geoghegan (1994) suggested that educators have the capacity and responsibility to work toward a cross disciplinary approach that will help every child in every school to feel the "tingle of truthful engagement" that a holistic approach to education can bring. Geoghegan (1994) also noted that this approach applies whether through drama, dance, music, or visual art. Goldberg (190) also suggested that the arts serve as a strategy for learning, and that using the arts in this way expands traditional teaching methods into an imaginative forum for exploration of subject matter. Simply teaching about the arts, then, can be transformed into opportunities for students to apply their ideas in creative ways (Goldberg 1997).

Still, difficulties remained. Eisner (1992) noted that prevailing conceptions of the arts are based on a massive misunderstanding of the role of arts in human development and in education. There is no more telling indicator of that importance than the time that is allocated to them. Arts get approximately two hours a week in elementary schools and are not required at all at the secondary level (Eisner 1992).







19

Nevertheless, arts advocacy progressed. By 1994 the Music Educator's

National. Conference (MENC) as the contracting agency published a description and standards of the school music program that defined quality music programs as providing daily instruction to each student in kindergarten through sixth grade. The recommendation was that this instruction was best provided by music specialists, but should be assisted by the classroom teacher who would continue to use music activities between visits from the specialist. MENC farther recommended that each child from kindergarten through third grade have music experiences in school for a total of no less than 100 minutes a week and that children in grades four through six have no less thanl50 minutes of music per week. A quality program would provide 150 minutes of music per week in kindergarten through third grade and 200 minutes in grades four through six (National standards for arts education 1994). The obvious implication was that classroom teachers, as well as specialists, needed to be effective in providing music experiences in the elementary grades.

These were the first of a set of national voluntary curriculum standards for what children should know and be able to do in dance, music, theater, and visual art, and the standards were presented to the Secretary of Education. They were passed by Congress and signed by President William J. Clinton in March 1994. These standards are significant in that they not only expect students to create and perform in the arts, but to understand the entire body of work that comprises our intellectual and cultural heritage (Williams 1995). Since these standards, both national and state, represent a professionwide consensus, they have a greater impact on school administrators, school board members, and other interested persons (Hoffer 1994). Still, it remains doubtful how







20

many school pupils are actually receiving the kind of consistent and sequential exposure to the arts that can produce real results.

By 1996, the Kennedy Center had launched a national drive to push the benefits of the arts in the schools. According to the Chairman of the center Roger L. Stevens, the purpose of the initiative is to integrate the arts and arts education into the lives of every American student (Trescott 1996).

Program Development and Evaluation

Throughout all of this time, a variety of arts education programs were in existence at various locations in the United States, but with little commonality in the basic structure. Each curricular design was geared to the interests and needs of an individual school or school district. In a survey of 27 programs, Lee (1985) found that arts education programs occurred both within and outside the school setting. They usually received outside financial'assistance, lasted one to five years, and became more internal only when their funding was included as part of the school budget. Prop-rain Descriptions

Goodlad (1977) surveyed extant programs in arts instruction in the United States and made observations in 200 classrooms, 67 schools, and 13 major population centers. It was noted that arts instruction was included in kindergarten but fell off rapidly after that. Classroom teachers (who were thought to have a limited interest in the arts and to be inadequately trained to teach them) taught 90% of elementary school arts (Goodlad 1977).

Several representative examples of arts in education programs that began in the 1970s are identified here as more or less typical. Some were rigorously evaluated. When that is the case, empirical evidence is cited. Funding sources are reported where relevant.







21

The Arts in Basic Curriculum (ABC) in Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools in North Carolina involved five voluntary pilot schools with the understanding that the faculty of each school would develop its own arts program. Subjective observations by the reporters include the following: The impact of the program was that: the climate of the school changed, a humanistic concept of education took root, and principals, teachers, and administrators worked more as a team. In addition, teachers became more involved in the planning process, the arts took a rightful and meaningful place in the total curriculum, and children exhibited the joy of leaning (Carter and Adams 1978).

The Open City Project in East Harlem was a project in which students in an early childhood center participated in cultural and in non-arts theme events that were teacherevaluated. Additional evaluations included information tests, attitudinal scales for parents and teachers, content analysis of curriculum materials, and video tapes of student behavior, as well as pre- and post-test administration of the Stanford Early School Achievement Test. Children in the project showed considerable growth in the first seven months of the program, with rates that were significantly higher than those of the control group. Children who participated in the Open City Program raised their total reading scores to the national average (Baker 1978).

Project SEARCH in New York State was a program aimed toward reorienting teachers' attitudes towards the arts. The state department of education encouraged school districts in rural, suburban and urban communities to develop comprehensive arts programs. Five school districts were chosen, and more than 20,000 teachers from both parochial and public schools were involved in the project. Data from a comprehensive evaluation clearly demonstrated a significant difference in attitudes toward learning between students in the arts in education classrooms and students in control classrooms.







22

The attitude data were gathered through video-tape interaction analysis, semantic differentials, and Likert scales. Neither the teacher training nor in-service components were described (Trupia 1978).

A program that seemed most similar to Montgomery County Project ARTS was the Arts in Education Program in Jefferson County, Colorado (JEFFCO). Beginning in 197 1, JEFFCO was a three-year program created for grades kindergarten through 12 with objectives to enhance instruction in basic studies with interdisciplinary arts-related activities. The program included an innovative staff development program charged with developing strategies for incorporating the arts into basic curriculum using an interdisciplinary approach. The JEFFCO Program was designed to:ftmction as an inservice training project. Principals, teachers, and curriculum coordinators participated in workshops and individual study to learn arts skills and methods of applying them in classrooms. Classroom teachers and arts specialists attended workshops after school hours and on weekends. Teachers were given released time, graduate level college credit, and credit for advancement on the salary scale. The workshops covered all of the subject areas at all grade levels. Funding was provided by the J.D. Rockefeller Yd Foundation, The Alliance for Arts Education, The National Committee of Arts for the Handicapped, and CEMREL's Aesthetic Education Learning Center Program, along with joint funding by the John F. Kennedy Center of Performing Arts and the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare (Allison 1978).

A program, begun in 1979 and existing for three years in the District of Columbia public school system, was located at the Region C Education Center at Bunker Hill in Washington DC. Although no outside sources provided funding in the first year, funding through Title IV began in the 1980-81 school year. The program was modeled on the







23

Interrelated ARTS program in Montgomery County. The DC program began with a parttime project director and five arts team members, two in drama, and one each in the other art-forms. The teachers who participated in the program took an in-service course and received demonstration lessons in their classrooms. Those who completed the in-service course received either college or recertification credit. An evaluation model implemented by the Division of Quality Assurance of the DC Public Schools, (1982) required Arts team members to administer tests to a sample of 271 students. Significant t scores suggested that students performed better following the program (Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, National Institute of Education 1982)

Another program, developed in New York City, Leaming Through an Expanded Arts Program (LEAP), was developed by a non-profit educational organization and served over 400,000 students. In this program, 85 consultants and many professional artists and musicians worked with classroom teachers from kindergarten to grade eight, teaching language arts, math skills, and other academic subjects through a variety of modalities. Standard evaluations of LEAP in a typical district showed that the program was quite successful. Of the students participating in the basic program, 93.4% developed a better understanding of the subject matter, and 97% of the teachers said that they would repeat the arts programs that were developed by the professional artists and musicians (Dean and Gross 1992).

Aaron (1994) described music teachers' use of production, perception, and

reflection activities in a program suggested by educational psychologist Jean Piaget. Arts PROPEL, a high school arts program, was designed and implemented by Harvard Project Zero, the Educational Testing Service, and the Pittsburgh Public School System. It includes production (PRO), perception (PE) and reflection. The focus was on two







24

elements. The first was called domain projects and included a series of exercises, activities, and productions in the visual arts, music, and creative writing. The second was processfolios, an ongoing collection of students' artistic productions such as drawings, paintings, musical compositions, and creative writings (Armstrong 1994). The program was based on the premise that the greatest learning takes place when students are active constructors of their own knowledge. In addition to the production- perceptionreflection model used in general music class, the format allowed interdisciplinary learning experiences that extend to learning in the core subjects such as geography and science. Parents were encouraged to become involved in their children's learning through the use of interview forms and questionnaires (Aaron 1994). Program Differences

Although these programs were designed and implemented to infuse arts into the academic curriculum, there were many differences among them. Some of these differences were the numbers and ages of students who were involved and the amount of in-service training for classroom teachers. The concern for and methods employed to evaluate each program also varied widely. Some differentiating characteristics are summarized below.

The ABC Program was concerned with the development of student potential,
stressed different art forms in different schools, and confined documentation to
the observations of the participants.

The Open City Project focused on using both arts and non-arts related cultural
events, and the major objective of the program was to develop language skills in
early childhood classes. Evaluations included information tests, attitude scales for
parents and teachers, classroom observations, and pre-and-post-test standardized
scores.

Project SEARCH was developed to improve teacher attitudes toward the arts and
used evaluation methods appropriate to the measurement of attitudinal change.







25

JEFFCO had a substantial in-service training component and was aimed at enhancing instruction in basic skill through the arts in grades kindergarten through 12. No evaluations on the outcomes of the program were located.

The program in the District of Columbia was also active in providing in-service
training. This program used an evaluation model that was developed by the
Division of Quality Assurance of the school system and that showed statistically
significant growth in student test scores.

LEAP is one program that not only is still in existence but it has expanded to

include 450 schools in the northeast U.S. and brings experts in not only arts but
also all curriculum areas to work with classroom teachers. There are 64
subheadings in the arts that are currently listed in the LEAP web page.
(LEAPNY.org)

PROPEL was concerned with expanding the teaching of music specialists to
include interdisciplinary learning in other curriculum areas. Subjective evaluation was accomplished through student reflection as each student described the extent
of his/her participation in a project.

It is clear that most of these programs were successful on a short term basis, but none, with the exception of LEAP, is still in existence. The life span of most was from three to five years. Some were designed for early childhood, some for secondary schools, and some for elementary schools. Some were funded through organizations such as the John D. Rockefeller 3' foundation, (JEFFCO and ABC) and some through the local school districts (Open City and the DC Program). All included in-service training for classroom teachers. In-service training seemed to be the only vehicle for continuation of using the arts in general education.

Effectiveness of Arts in General Education

Since the presence of arts in school curricula affects both those who receive

instruction, and those who provide it, program effectiveness may be viewed from both those points of view. Several studies have documented these effects.







26

Teacher Effects

Boyle and Thompson (1976) conducted a study at Pennsylvania State University that changed teachers' self-perceptions of their ability to be effective teachers in the arts. The premise was that self-confidence is essential for successful teaching and that teachers can gain this confidence through successful creative experience. The study provided nine sessions in Arts Encounter Workshops over a three-year period for a total of 22 undergraduate elementary education majors. Participants self-rated, on five point scales, their perception of how well prepared they felt to teach arts in their classrooms prior to and at the conclusion of the Arts Encounter Workshops. The McNemar Test for Significance of Changes indicated that the workshops resulted in significant development of self-confidence to teach the arts. These findings suggest that such workshop sessions can bring changes in perception.

Barry (1998) evaluated an arts program in the state of Alabama that developed and implemented an in-service program for elementary teachers with the hope of providing recommendations for future programs. In 1998, only 295 arts teachers, mostly in music, served Alabama's 406,000 students. To provide arts instruction to every student would have required over 1500 additional teachers. This program, therefore, sought to acquaint elementary classroom teachers with theories of arts education and specify examples of arts activities that could be validly integrated with other subjects. An arts education conference was held in Auburn, Alabama, and teachers who attended (N= 28) were tested and found to be most interested in arts activities that they could integrate into their academic curriculum. Several teachers mentioned the value of having met arts and arts education professionals. Because of the small respondent pool, the data were not statistically analyzed (Barry 1998).







27

Student Effects

A project to infuse academic studies with arts in Duluth, Minnesota examined the pre-and post-tests of over 300 children in grades one through five. Significant gains were demonstrated in test scores for students who had received arts instruction over those who had not (Benson and Doane 1982).

A comprehensive arts education program developed by the Getty Institute moved arts from the academic "fringes" into the core curriculum in Shady Brook Elementary School in Bedford, Texas. Over the course of 5 years, scores on the Texas Assessment of Academic Skills improved among the participating students as follows: reading scores 12.3%, writing scores 14%, and math scores 61%. In addition, anecdotal evidence indicated an enhancement of students' abilities to understand concepts and to express themselves articulately (Chapman 1998).

Originally developed in New York City as a program for students who had not learned to read by traditional methods, the Leaning to Read Trough the Arts (LTRTA) was an integrated approach to elementary curriculum in which arts were used as the main stimulus for all learning. This approach used specialists and classroom teachers. Music instruction was evaluated for its effect on both attitude and total achievement with substantial gains in both for several years (Collett 1991).

Ambler and Strong (198 1) found that when arts were used to enhance the learning activities in arithmetic, phonetics, and reading comprehension, attendance improved, motivation was heightened, and test scores ranked above average. Additional research in the Albuquerque, New Mexico elementary schools showed that students who participated in band or orchestra had higher marks on comprehensive skills tests. Furthermore, the longer they performed, the higher were their scores (Carlson 1985).







28

Other researchers are continuing to find that children, especially those in at-risk categories, attain numerous tangible and intangible benefits from extensive sequential music study. As a group, students who study music and the other arts do better on standardized tests, and scores improve in students whose studies occur over a longer period of time (Costa-Giomi, Price, Raucher, Schmidt, Shackford, Sims, et al (1999

A study in long-term memory by Berliner (19 8 5) claimed that a multi-sensory

approach, such as visual imagery, movement, and touch, created more enduring learning than did a single sensory approach. Larson (1995) claims that integrating aural, vocal, visual, intellectual, digital, kinesthetic and emotional understanding contributes much to the learning process.

Since 1990

During the last decade of the 20th century there has been a renewed interest in using the arts as a means to humanize and energize curricula in the public schools (Cornett 1999). A review of the literature concerning arts in general education shows little substantive evidence to prove or disprove a connection between arts and student performance. There do seem to be, however, strong connections between arts-focused schools and excellence in education. When we examine school development through the arts in a broad context it becomes apparent that arts-in-general-education programs can help schools accomplish broad educational objectives (Remer 1996). In 1991, research into the records of students in several Texas schools indicated that a curriculum that devotes 25% or more of the school day to the arts produces youngsters with superior academic abilities (Oddleifson 1991). Integrated techniques that employ the arts within other course work, such as social studies or English, help to convey the objectives of that work. It would seem, then, that arts should not be treated solely as methodologies for







29

teaching the basics. The importance of leading in both arts and academics needs to be emphasized (Barrett, McCoy, and Veblen 1997). In a symposium on the integration of the arts in the curriculum, Bresler (1995) describes four different models of integration. These include 1) subservient, where the arts are used to lend interest or to "spice up" other subjects, 2) social integration, where the arts serve as the social functioning of a school, 3) affective, where the arts emphasize attitudes and feelings, and 4) co-equal, which integrates the curriculum with arts-specific contents, skills, expressions, and modes of thinking. A model program will identify relationships among subjects and involve both classroom and arts teachers to plan curricula and collaborate on its delivery (Fowler, McMullan, and McLaughlin 1991). There is a paucity of information, though, on how this goal may best be accomplished. It is not clear how to build an understanding of the arts at a time when public media indicates that school system budgets are shrinking, and much attention seems to be given to the acquisition and testing of the "essential" skills of reading, writing, and mathematics. A study summary published by The National Endowment for the Arts (199 1) includes several guidelines for implementing an arts education model. Among these are:

Both the arts and other disciplines must have strength and integrity.
The model must be whole-school oriented.
Teachers must be active participants in learning about and developing the model
and the role of the arts (Fowler and McMullan 1991).

For teachers to fully integrate the arts into a classroom environment, a specific plan needs to be in place to enable them to acquire not only the knowledge but also the confidence necessary to implement it. Such a plan will differ from district to district, but it should include answers to the following questions:

What teaching and learning experiences are necessary to assist classroom teachers
in the use of arts in the classroom?







30

How may a classroom teacher best acquire a basic understanding and knowledge
of using arts in the classroom?

What follow up services need to be provided to increase teacher knowledge and
confidence? (Cornett 1999).

The history of an exemplary program that lasted for over 20 years, Project

ARTS/Interrelated ARTS, will point to answers for the questions posited above and make it possible for other programs in the arts to emulate this program in order to become a more integral part of the school curriculum. By pursuing the path of arts integration, schools will not only be better equipped to meet the challenges of the future, but provide pleasing experiences for all participants along the way (Kaagan 1998).















CHAPTER 3
METHODOLOGY

Sherman and Webb (1990) note that all research arises from one's actual or qualitative life. Research is not abstract; it exists in a context. The context is the environment in which humans are directly involved (Sherman and Webb 1990). It has become increasingly accepted in the research community that the investigator's subjectivity operates during a research project (Fink 2000), Qualitative research takes place in natural, as opposed to abstract or theoretical, settings and is studied as a whole rather than in isolation from the past or present (Edson 1990). It implies a direct concern with experience as it is lived, felt, or undergone (Sherman and Webb 1990). Historical inquiry seeks to explain the significance of past experiences, but because historians must interact with the evidence they gather, interpretation is inescapable (Edson 1990).

Design of the Study

Often the selection of a topic is based on the researcher's current or past concerns. Within qualitative research is a tradition whereby the principal research instrument is the researcher (Phelps, Ferrara, and Goolsby 1993). Included among the characteristics of qualitative research are the observations that it is holistic, in that it relates to a bounded system, and it is empirical, with an emphasis on what can be observed (Bresler and Stake 1992).

We need history, not to tell us what happened, or to explain the past, but to make the past alive so that it can explain and make a future possible (Bloom 1987). One of the


31







32

values in historical research is providing historical information from one specific situation for possible generalization to other areas (Madsen and Madsen 1970).

As a historical study this inquiry may be described as qualitative, an

encompassing term that attempts to define the meaning of what has occurred in the social world. Some of the characteristics of qualitative research that apply to this study are listed below.

0 It is holistic, seeking to understand its case as well as to understand how it is
different from other cases.

0 Its emphasis is observable, including observation by informants. There is a
preference for natural language description, and the researcher is the key
instrwnent.

0 It is descriptive. Data takes the form of words rather than numbers.

0 It is interpretive.

0 Observations and interpretations are validated through checking data against
multiple sources (Bresler and Stake 1992).

Ely, Vinz, Downing, and Anzul (1997) offer some views and suggestions about some understandings in the writing of qualitative research. Their observations appear meaningful and relevant to the present study.

0 There are many ways to come to know something, and such knowing is partial.

a There are numerous ways for us to report.

0 All of our messages have agendas.

0 Our language creates reality.

0 Research is both context and culture bound. Furthermore, the researcher is
deeply concerned with what and who is being studied.

0 Affect and cognition are inextricably united

0 What we understand as social reality is multifaceted, sometimes clashing, and
often in flux.







33

This list is relevant to the present study in several ways, particularly items one, three, and five. The Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS program may be viewed from many more perspectives than are presented here.

Procedures/Instrumentation

A decision must be made about how best to collect data for a valid historical review. The following are important ways for gathering data in a qualitative study:

Interview data produced. by a variety of schedules, such as informal and semi
structured.

Historical accounts, including logs, journals, official documents, life histories and
anecdotal reflections. (Miller and Fredericks 1994)

The purpose of this study is to present the history of a program that trained

classroom teachers to use arts strategies in teaching basic skills and to explore some of the likely reasons for its longevity. To accomplish this purpose, and to remain true to the principles of qualitative research outlined above, data were collected from several sources. The primary sources include the following: Recollections and Records of the Researcher

The investigator was a team member of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS from 1976 to 1993. A good research study requires a knowledge base, as well as theoretical and methodological competence (Flinders 1993). Ely et al(l 997) states that the researcher belongs in the study, not only as a consciousness that filters the experience, but as an actor as well.

Interviews

The best evidence in a historical study comes from primary sources; that is,

sources who provide eyewitness testimony of part of the past under consideration(Heller and Wilson 1992).







34

Interviews were conducted with ARTS team members, classroom teachers, administrators, and subject area specialists who were involved with the program. Interviewing began with locating those who were either involved with a specific aspect of the program such as TAPESTRY, or ARTS team members who had been with the program for many years. This required several trips to Maryland in order to conduct interviews in person. When it wasn't possible to conduct an interview in person it was conducted by e-mail or telephone. The in-person interviews were tape recorded and later transcribed. The subjects interviewed included: a The first coordinator of Project ARTS, who later became County Coordinator of
the Department of Aesthetic Education, Richard Pioli.

0 The author of the original grant, who was coordinator of Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS for five years, Janet Pitt Brome.

a The two subsequent coordinators, the second of whom was with the program until
it ended, Eoline Kukuk Cary and Dr. Ann Richardson.

0 The coordinator of the Gifted and Talented Program in Montgomery County
Schools, Dr. Waveline Starnes.

Former science teacher who worked with Interrelated ARTS at the Connecticut
Park Center School and is now Science Coordinator in Montgomery County
Public Schools, William MacDonald

Five ARTS team members whose total experience in the program adds up to 75
years. These include: Jane Schisgall Papishdrama; Ruth Straus Gainer, visual art;
Janis Jones, music; Nancy Harris and Merle Weincek, dance.

Two classroom teachers who had received service from Interrelated ARTS for
two years each, Marie Sipple and Carole Blackwell.

These people were selected for several reasons. The first coordinator and

subsequent coordinators had the most comprehensive knowledge of the inner workings of the program. Two (Dr. Starnes and Mr. MacDonald) were directly involved in the implementation of programs developed as part of Interrelated ARTS. These were







35

TAPESTRY, a program for student s who were identified as gifted and talented in the arts, and The Connecticut Park Center School. The ARTS team members were selected as those who had been in the program for the longest time. Original team members were Ms.Papish, Ms Gainer, and Ms. Jones, while Ms. Harris joined the program in 1976 and Ms.Weincek in 1986.

It was difficult to find classroom teachers to interview, largely because of the vast turnover in the location of teachers in the schools. Both teachers who were interviewed had taken the in-service course and had received two years of classroom service by ARTS team members. Four other classroom teachers were contacted by posting a paragraph in the Superintendent's Bulletin, a weekly paper distributed to all personnel in the Montgomery County School System, asking for an e-mail response. Of these four, two (Ellie Shutak and Carolyn Potto) reported that they were still using lessons and teaching strategies that they had learned through working with Interrelated ARTS teachers.

Because the perspectives of all the subjects interviewed were so different, the

questions had to be broad enough to include as much of their individual recollections as possible. The following questions were asked:

Describe your personal involvement in Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.
What was your role?
What changes occurred in the program while you were a part of it?
What do you recall was the rationale for the change?
0 What in your opinion were the most important factors leading to the longevity of
the program?

Following their completion, the researcher sent chapters 5 and 6 to the former

coordinator, Dr. Richardson, and to two form eir team members, Merle Weincek and Janis Jones, to confirm the validity of the reported history.







36

Formal Reports

Two formal reports were submitted to the Montgomery County School Board following the completion of the federally funded program. (Kukuk 1977; Brome and Kukuk 1977) These included both an Evaluation and a Final Report. These documents, invaluable in providing a record of how and why the program began and was operated, were prepared in 1977 by the coordinator, curriculum writer, and all of the ARTS team members. The Evaluation report contains results of a telephone survey, structured interviews, principals' evaluations, and administrative workshop evaluations. The Final Report contains descriptions and evaluations of project ARTS as well as copies of brochures, agendas for workshops and several groups of lessons that were prepared by ARTS team members. These volumes, however useful in recording the beginnings of the program, were the only comprehensive written data available. To obtain the history of the remaining years it was necessary to rely on the memory of the researcher and those who were interviewed. Fortunately, many of the lesson plans had been kept both by the researcher and other ARTS team members.

In addition to the documents mentioned above, there are four books of lesson plans written by team members. Additional documents were those prepared by ARTS team members for Making Connections During the Middle Learning Years, (Maryland Alliance for Arts Education 1990), lessons, materials from curriculum support packages, and written records from the DARTS program described in Chapter 4.

Organizing evidence in a historical investigation is primarily concerned with the passage of time. Historians must explain events as they unfold. Sequence is fundamental to history (Heller 1985). In order to clarify the sequence of events, Table 1 is presented to assist in understanding simultaneous events that occurred in the life of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.







37

Photograph

A Montgomery County Public School photographer originally made the pictures that have been included in this study for a slide-tape presentation entitled, "There's More Than One way to Make an A." They were taken by Bill Mills, one of the Montgomery County Public School photographers, who graciously gave his consent for use in this study. Since the slide presentation was widely used within the county, permission to use photographs of the students was obtained from parents. Due to the time that has elapsed since the slides were made, this documentation no longer exists. The camera is able to record details and subtleties that otherwise might be forgotten or overlooked. Furthermore, a photograph can be an instant record of what has taken place that will not only enhance recollection, but make a strong statement about an event (Ball and Smith 1992).

Presenting Dat

Data are presented in approximate chronological order (Table 1). Table 1 A brief overview of the program's history

Project ARTS: 1974-1977 Interrelated ARTS: 1977-1993
Demonstration lessons(including Demonstration lessons (including Special special education), workshops, in- Education), workshops and in-service service training training for K-6 plus:
1974/5 one team of four teachers- Connecticut Park Center School 1982grades K-3 1993, Interdisciplinary lessons with
1975/6 two teams-grades K-6 science and computer specialists.
1976/7 three tearns-grades K-6 DARTS 1983-1993: Title I specialists in Center School. Arts lessons with trade books at second grade level.
TAPESTRY: 1984-1990: Pull-out
program in dance and drama for
students identified as gifted and
talented in the arts.
Middle School: 1991-1995 workshops, demonstration lessons in grades 6-8







38

The study reviews the history of arts education in public schools in the United States, specifically arts-in-general-education programs. Interview data, formal reports, reflective observations, and photographs are used to describe the history of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS and to determine the reasons for the longevity of this program. In qualitative inquiry the researcher is an important instrument in providing insights to experience as it is lived or felt. In beginning this study it was imperative to determine whether sufficient data that either agreed with or differed from the biases and assumptions of the researcher could be obtained. The process of gathering the data for a valid historical review included many aspects. Because qualitative research is context specific the researcher found it necessary to include a brief history of Montgomery County, Maryland including the growth of the public school system in the county. Two volumes were found in the Montgomery County Historical House located in Rockville, Maryland that were invaluable in providing this information. To remain true to the principles inherent in qualitative research, it is necessary to present data in a coherent and systematic fashion, and to do so in a somewhat consecutive order. A narrative fortri is used to accomplish this purpose.

Interviews and documents/reports are described in detail in the

Instruments/Procedure section. These were carefully examined in order to most effectively describe the unfolding of the program. Questions I and 2 addressed the subjects' involvement in the program as teachers, administrators or specialists in subject areas Questions 3 and 4 helped to place the interviewees in the various aspects of the program as it changed. Question 5 addressed the research question (i.e., Why did this program exist for so many years). Themes which related to longevity (changes in focus and work with teachers), quality, and feasibility(budget and visibility) emerged and are presented in Chapters 4 and 5.















CHAPTER 4
PROGRAM HISTORY

This chapter provides a historical analysis as well as an over-view of the program and its various components. It is important to recognize that, while presented sequentially, many of these events occurred concurrently.

Project ARTS: The Beginning

In 1973 the elementary art and music programs were the joint responsibility of

special art and music specialists and of classroom teachers. However, not all children (in fact not even all schools) were being served by special teachers in the arts. Following discussions between the citizens group and Board of Education members, the board appointed a Task Force on the Arts to study the arts program.

One of the recommendations of the Task Force was that an intensive staff

development effort in the arts be instituted to assist classroom teachers in implementing arts, arts-related, and integrated arts experiences in their classrooms. It was further recommended that dance and drama become an integral part of the arts program in the elementary school.

Even though Montgomery County was one of the richer counties in the nation, the assistant director of Curriculum and Instruction decided to submit a plan to ESEA, Title III asking for funds to help implement a plan to improve arts education. The assistant director asked Janet Brome, who was at that time a Teacher Specialist for Media Studies in the same department, to write a grant proposal requesting funding from the


39







40

federal government. The proposal was approved for funding in 1974 and was supported jointly by Montgomery County Public Schools. Additional grants were received from the United States Office of Education through the Alliance for Arts Education and The National Committee-Arts for the Handicapped. Specific funding for the first three years is described in Appendix A.

Project ARTS began with a director, Richard Pioli, who was hired from the local public television station for the position, and a curriculum writer-evaluator, Janet Brome. A secretary and a clerk typist also were hired. The first year of the project consisted of two teams, each comprised of a drama, dance/movement, visual art, and music teacher. Each team member had a background in both some area of the arts and in teaching. In addition, each pilot school was supplied with an arts aide who assisted the classroom teachers in initiating and developing arts activities on a continuing basis.

Pilot schools were chosen for the first year on the basis of principals' requests and to represent each of the six administrative areas.

At the time we began, we contacted the school principals that we knew best and
we felt that we would go with the principals that had a leaning toward arts
education, and there were a few of them. We did workshops for their teachers. It
was through these workshops that we got to tell people what we were doing.
(Richard Pioli, first coordinator of Project ARTS)

Only kindergarten through third grade (K-3) teachers in these schools were served in the first year, and the services included monthly workshops and demonstration lessons in the classroom for teachers followed by individual. teacher conferences to plan followup activities. In compliance with federal guidelines, the project also served two parochial schools in Montgomery County and extended some services to St. Mary's County Public Schools.







41

Work in the Schools

The individual ARTS team members worked in the schools on a one-on-one basis with classroom teachers. Each classroom teacher in the program would first meet with his/her assigned team member and discuss aspects of the curriculum that were planned for the semester. Since copies of curriculum objectives in all subjects and grade levels were available to ARTS team members, it was possible to design arts lessons to meet these objectives. The ARTS team member would then, with the help of the classroom teacher, plan arts lessons designed to meet academic curriculum objectives. Each classroom teacher received a written lesson plan for each lesson taught by the ARTS team teacher (An example of a lesson may be found in Appendix B). In this way, not only would the classroom teacher have written lessons (approximately 28) in all four art forms, but also he or she would have seen each lesson as it was taught. Each classroom teacher in the program received a total of four semesters of service in his or her classroom, one semester in each of the art forms.

7






J"'









Figure 1. Interrelated ARTS music specialist working with students while classroom
teacher observes







42

A three-credit one-semester course was designed to give classroom teachers a basic understanding of the four art forms and, through active participation, increase the teachers' confidence in the arts. The course was taught by four ARTS team members during both fall and spring semesters after the school day and for six weeks in the summer. Teachers could apply the credit for re-certification and/or masters equivalency. After the first year of Project ARTS, regular service to a school was offered if at least five teachers from one school had completed the course. Program Workspace

The program was originally housed in two vacant classrooms of Wheaton Woods Elementary School in Rockville. In 1974-75, monthly one-half day workshops were conducted at Wheaton Woods during the first week of every month of the school year. The K-3 teachers, principals, arts specialists, PTA cultural arts chairmen from the 12 pilot schools, K-3 teachers from St. John the Evangelist School, and teachers and supervisors from St. Mary's County Public Schools attended.

In its second year, the program moved to Ashburton Elementary School in

Bethesda, where an entire floor of the school was available. A third team was added, and new pilot schools joined the project. The monthly workshops were replaced by an inservice course that met weekly for one semester and was taught by the interrelated ARTS teachers in the all-purpose room after school hours.

Workspace was extremely important for ARTS team members for several

reasons. Team members traveled to many schools throughout the county, so it was useful to be in a fairly centralized location. Because all materials for demonstration lessons as well as workshops were provided by the program, it was necessary to have space for a great many art supplies (paper, paints, brushes, scissors, crayons, pastels, clay etc.) as







43

well as rhythm and Orff instruments. Team members also needed meeting space for planning and record keeping, telephone access for contacting schools, and storage space for curriculum resource packages.

In the third year 19 schools in grades K-6 were receiving service on a regular basis, and the staff was expanded to include a community resource coordinator, Marthalie Furber, whose job was to promote the value of the arts in education within the entire school community. Additional funding was received for the 1976-77 school year from the Office of Education/Arts Education Program under Section 409, Title IV, Public Law 93-380, Elementary and Secondary Education in the Arts Programs, and from the National Committee, Arts for the Handicapped. The Project ARTS staff conducted workshops for elementary school principals in each administrative area, teacher specialists in language arts and reading, and interested parents. This was the third and final year for the program to receive funds from Title III. The goal of designing and implementing a self-renewing system to initiate and support an arts program in grades K-6 had been both refined and expanded during this period. The two major activities stated in the grant proposal that would assist the program in becoming supported mainly by Montgomery County were administrative workshops and curriculum resource package development

Workshops

Workshops were planned and conducted by the Project ARTS teams, the coordinators of the Division of Aesthetic Education, and well-known arts education consultants. In October 1976, a half- day workshop was presented for 25 high level administrators of Montgomery County Public Schools. Murray Sidlin, resident







44

conductor of the National Symphony Orchestra, and Martin Engle, Advisor for the Arts and Humanities, National Institute for Education, addressed the group.

In November of 1976, a 2 1/2 day retreat was held at the Donaldson Brown Center in Port Deposit, Maryland. Twenty-five administrators, supervisors, and principals were present. The goal of the retreat was to develop individual group plans for the implementation of quality arts programs, including the identification of responsibilities. Both the Maryland State Alliance for Arts Education Chairman, Harold Lott, and his associate from the State Department of Education, Victor Kotulak, were in attendance. Participants were provided with hands-on experiences in each of the four art forms by observing and participating in lessons taught by arts team members. There was discussion of the learning process and its relation to the arts and the role of administrators in providing arts programs. The speaker for the event was Elliot Eisner, who addressed the group with the topics: "ere Are We Going in Arts Education? and The Art of Teaching

That was a wonderful retreat and the epitome of the influence of the Project
ARTS program to be able to attract such people. We invited Elliot Eisner to come
see what we were doing and to share some of his ideas with the staff members. I
was delighted with the team that put that together. (Richard Pioli, first Project
ARTS coordinator)

A series of three administrative workshops were held in January of 1977. Primary consultant for these was Dr. Harry S. Broudy who presented his address, "How Basic is Aesthetic Education? or Rts the Fourth R" to approximately 600 administrators and supervisors. Dr. Broudy also conducted seminars and discussions with smaller groups attended by teachers, school board members, the superintendent, principals, Project ARTS staff, and supervisors and administrators associated with the project.







45

A summary of both internal and external evaluators concluded that the value of the arts was effectively communicated through the series of workshops. The participants stated that the consultants had effectively shared their philosophical positions relevant to aesthetic education and that the workshops had developed support for a comprehensive arts program in Montgomery County Public Schools The workshops helped to build a solid base of support and understanding of aesthetic education (as defined in Chapter 1) and the role that Project ARTS played in its development. As a result of administrative, school board, teacher, and parental support, the entire finding of Project ARTS was assumed by the Montgomery County Public Schools in 1977. Association with the Kennedy Center

The Education Department of the John F. Kennedy for the Performing Arts conducted teacher workshops, some of which were led by ARTS Team members. In addition the Center published several booklets of lesson plans that were available for national distribution. Most of the lessons were designed and written by ARTS team members. These include The Aftikan Experience, The Australian Experience-and Creativity (which was sponsored by Mobil Oil.) These activities brought both local and national recognition to Interrelated ARTS Curriculum Resource Development

In addition to working in the classrooms and presenting workshops, ARTS team members began developing curriculum resource packages that combined arts lessons with reading, social studies, and science. These packages contained lesson plans, books, pictures, manipulative materials, and resource lists for additional books and films. Each package contained at least one lesson in each of the four art forms. Some of these were piloted in elementary classrooms in the spring of 1977, and a form was provided for







46

teachers to evaluate the lessons in the package. As Montgomery County received more immigrants from Central America, Southeast Asia, and Asia the ARTS teams developed curriculum resource packages that stressed the arts of these cultures. The teams also developed a package on arts of the Harlem renaissance. An example of a curriculum resource package(Greece) may be found in Appendix C.

According to Bolin (1978), building an arts resource center can be a tremendous asset to any school or district. The space itself affirms the existence of arts activity and provides a space in which thoughts are shared, ideas evolved, and information disseminated. In January of 1977, an Arts Resource Center, known as the ARC, was opened to all county teachers, specialists, and other personnel. In addition to the curriculum packages, the center contained children's books, adult books about the arts, and art materials (including CEMRAL packages that pertained to the arts), all of which could be borrowed by teachers or administrators. By 1985 the Resource List for the ARC consisted of 98 pages and included books, kits, filmstrips, phonograph records, cassette tapes, and video tapes in all four art forms as well as materials for programs for gifted and talented.

Special Education

In 1974 Jean Kennedy Smith founded the National Committee, Arts for the

Handicapped. The purpose of this committee, which was housed at the John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts, was to provide opportunities for children with emotional, physical, and mental disabilities to learn in, about, and through the arts. Because part of the finding for Project ARTS was provided by the National Committee, Arts for the Handicapped, ARTS team members also worked with students and teachers in special education classrooms within the schools receiving service from the program. This







47

included classrooms for learning disabled, orthopedically impaired, mildly emotionally disturbed, and visually and auditorily challenged students. Figures 2 and 3 show an ARTS team drama teacher working with orthopedically challenged students and an ARTS team music teacher working with mildly retarded high-school students. In 1977 Jean Kennedy Smith addressed the Montgomery County Board of Education concerning the work that was done by the ARTS teams.



4





PM

#






Figure 3. Drama teacher in the classroom









JVA






Figure 4. Music teacher in the classroom







48

In 1976 ARTS team members began serving teachers in three learning centers for students who needed more help than they could receive in a special classroom. Montgomery County has three such elementary schools, one middle school, and one high school. None of these schools had music or art specialists, so the instruction that students had received in the arts had been minimal. Working in these schools presented a new challenge because only one of the 12 team members had received any training or experience in special education. It was not required for classroom teachers in these schools to take the in-service course taught by ARTS team members, so both classroom teachers and ARTS team members were often in "uncharted territory." ARTS team members quickly realized that to plan and teach lessons in these schools required a closer working relationship with the classroom teachers. Such relationships were successfully formed among many classroom teachers and ARTS team members. The State of Maryland began requiring three credit hours in Special Education for certification, so within three years all of the ARTS team members had received some course work in this field. Most, but not all of the work in special learning centers, was successful. One learning center, Mark Twain Junior High School, was for emotionally disturbed adolescents. In 1979 a branch of this school was created and was known as Samuel Clemens. This part of Mark Twain School was designated for students who had been identified as both emotionally disturbed and academically gifted. The coordinator of the ARTS teams and the principal of Clemens decided that the ARTS program should work in this school on a weekly basis. This decision was made without input from either classroom teachers in the school or ARTS team members. Probably because the classroom teachers had not been consulted, many seemed to be opposed to the idea. Samuel Clemens' students were not used to anyone other than their classroom teachers







49

being in their classrooms, and work there proved to be a difficult experience for almost all concerned.

Our going to special education centers had to do with laws passed at the time,
The special ed. centers had no music and art teachers at all. Mark Twain proved
to be very difficult. The kids were difficult, not used to anyone coming in. The
teachers were not consulted and in some instances were hostile. We only had one
team member who had qualifications and experience with special ed. Yet we all
were expected to do it. (Jane Papish, drama teacher).

In 1979 investigators from the Arts in Education for Handicapped Project visited Montgomery County Public Schools programs including the Interrelated ARTS program. In the final report of this project, Appell (1979), indicated that since Montgomery County has so many innovative programs such as Interrelated ARTS, interest in the Arts Education for the Handicapped Project was not very high.

Inter-related ARTS

Now that project ARTS was no longer receiving Federal funding, the coordinator of the program and the head of the Department of Aesthetic Education thought that it would be appropriate to change its name. At the beginning of the school year in 1977, Project ARTS became known as Interrelated ARTS. The program lost funding for the curriculum coordinator, the community resource coordinator, and the classroom aides who assisted teachers in participating schools. Losing the aides made it much more difficult for ARTS team members to confer with classroom teachers during the school day, so the conferences had to take place after school or by telephone in the evenings.

The Interrelated ARTS teacher in-service program continued to be offered one evening a week, and because the program was now financially supported by the school system, the ARTS team members who taught the course received a stipend. Prior to this







50

time teaching the course had been considered part of the job, and the teachers received no extra remuneration for conducting it.

By 1978 the program had outgrown the space provided for it at Ashburton

Elementary School, and so two weeks before the opening of school in 1978, the program moved to Larchmont School in Bethesda, Maryland. This was an elementary school that had closed due to lack of enrollment. Ample space was therefore available for workshops and for each team member to have a separate office. It also had an empty library with plenty of room for the rapidly expanding resource center. Another advantage was that Larchmont was only a few blocks from the Washington Beltway and Interstate Route 270. Team members were thus able to reach the schools more efficiently. Levels of Service

The program was increasingly popular, with many more principals calling to

request having their schools included. In order to more clearly define the services offered to teachers, levels of service were established

Through a I -hour orientation session, the staff demonstrated the integrated arts approach and described the project services available. Teachers who were interested in receiving regular services of the ARTS team entered Level 2.

A three-credit semester in-service course gave teachers a basic understanding of the four art forms, and through active participation, increased the teachers' confidence in the arts. If at least five teachers from one school completed the course, the ARTS teams provided regular in-school follow-up services. Teachers who took the course learned strategies in teaching through the arts.






51

Next the ARTS teams visited participating teachers in their schools approximately twice monthly to do demonstration teaching, conferencing, and planning with teachers. Each teacher received up to four semesters of follow-up service, concentrating one semester on each art form. A teacher attaining the objectives for level 3 moved to level 4.

Finally the ARTS teams were available as consultants to teachers on an on-call

basis (Evaluation Report 1977) In order to explain the program to prospective teachers, a photographer from Montgomery County School System helped the teams put together a slide tape show. This explained all of the levels of service and allowed the viewers to see pictures of the teams in action. Figure 4 illustrates a visual art teacher giving follow-up service in the classroom.




















Figure 4. Art Teacher in the Classroom

At the end of the 1979 school year, the school system sold the Larchmont school building, and the program was forced to move again. This time it was to Connecticut Park School in Silver Spring. The building was a school that had been closed due to lack







52

of sufficient enrollment, and it had considerably more space. Interrelated ARTS now shared a building with the Montgomery County Adult Education Program and a daycare center. Each team member had a separate office, there was ample space for musical instruments and art materials, and there was a large library to hold the ever-growing accumulation of books and curriculum support packages. There were also five or six unused classrooms that could be used for after-school workshops, and a large multipurpose room. Typically, the ARTS teams would spend one day each week (usually Monday) in the office in order to prepare materials and lessons for the coming week. Each team would visit approximately eight or nine schools in a two-week period, working with each assigned classroom teacher every other week for a total of seven visits. This teaching schedule was in addition to preparing and presenting workshops and teaching the in-service course. A notebook was kept in the main office of each school served. This was used as a sign-in and sign-out place as well as a place for the ARTS team member to write a brief summary of the lessons being taught.

Although members of the Interrelated ARTS staff felt that Connecticut Park was ideally suited for their needs, another move was soon to come. The building of North Chevy Chase Elementary school was not owned by the school system, and as part of the leasing agreement, the building had to be occupied by a school program or it could be leased or sold privately. In order to keep the property in the hands of the school system while the building was being renovated, Interrelated ARTS, along with another smaller program, was asked to occupy the building for one year. The other occupants were two elementary science and computer specialists who were charged with writing curricula for their subjects and to teach lessons that they designed. The students they taught were brought by bus to the school. It seemed an ideal opportunity to the coordinators of both







53

programs for science and arts teachers to get together to design interrelated lessons including both subjects. This was to develop into an important adjunct program for Interrelated ARTS, the Connecticut Park Center School.

The center was originally at North Chevy Chase School. The town owned the
property but the lease said it belonged to the school system as long as it was used
as a school, so Interrelated ARTS was moved in to hold it (during renovation).
The math and science specialists were put there as well. Then teachers (math and science and ARTS team members) started to work together to make connections.
As computers improved in quality there was more to do with visual arts. ARTS
Team members did preparation lessons with teachers and kids in the schools
before they came to the center. For science and math, teachers would come in
after school. (Bill Mac Donald, Science specialist) Connecticut Park Center School

When the year of occupying North Chevy Chase was over, both Interrelated

ARTS and the science program moved back to Connecticut Park, and the Connecticut Park Center School became an important part of the Interrelated ARTS program. This program offered a unique opportunity for students to acquire specific skills in content areas and to participate in interdisciplinary studies usually not offered in their home schools.

The classes offered were described in a catalog that was sent to all of the

elementary schools in the county, and classes were brought by school buses to the center. Some of the offerings could accommodate two or more classes, while for others it was more feasible to have one class at a time. Prior to their students coming to the center, teachers attended after-school workshops given by the ARTS and science teacher who would be teaching their classes. This allowed the classroom teacher to prepare the class for the experience as well as to provide follow up.

An example of one of the most popular offerings was archeology. An entire

classroom was set up as a simulated archeological dig. This was achieved by building a







54

wooden pen approximately 8 feet square and 8 feet high. This pen was then filled to the top with dirt, sectioned off into quadrants and seeded with objects such as bones (from a science supply catalog), broken crockery, feathers, etc. An Interrelated ARTS visual art teacher taught a lesson on arts and artifacts of various primitive cultures. The students were then given instruction on the correct way to search for and record their findings. They were provided with disposable paper gowns so that they could enter the dig without soiling their clothes. After time spent in the dig, the students made speculations concerning the culture of the people who might have used the artifacts they discovered. They also made sketches of the things that they had found.

Another interrelated lesson was entitled, Good Vibrations. In this lesson, various musical instruments were used to show how sounds were produced. The students also conducted experiments in the production of sound energy. Students could feel the energy waves by placing their hands next to a large gong as it was struck. They could observe the power of sound energy by striking tuning forks and putting them in shallow pans of water.

One very popular offering for fifth grade classes was called Ellis Island This was a drama simulation where students were cast in the role of immigrants coming to this country. A drama teacher from Interrelated ARTS visited the participating classrooms a day before the students came to the center to explain the history of Ellis Island immigration and to assign to the children the roles that they would assume on the following days. Teachers, aides, and frequently members of the community were cast as the immigration officials and the rooms were set up to resemble the actual setting as nearly as possible, At the close of the two day session a ceremony was held where students were "admitted to the country."







55

The science specialists and ARTS team members met during regularly scheduled staff meeting times to develop the lessons. Each Interrelated ARTS team member was responsible for teaching several Center School offerings each month as well as following the regular classroom teaching schedule.

Developing Arts and Reading. Teaching Strategies (DARTS)

This was a program that was conceived by two ARTS team members in 1982.

One was a visual art specialist and the other a specialist in music. These teachers went to New York City for several days and observed seven different elementary schools in order to observe and learn about the Learning to Read Through the Arts program that had been developed by Bernadette O'Brian. On their return, they met with the Montgomery County Title I staff to develop a model. Since there was sufficient funding from the Connecticut Park Center School to provide bus transportation for students, one entire second grade from each selected Title I School was brought to the center for one school day. The students met in the multi purpose room in the morning for arts lessons developed around a second grade level book. Frequently there were two or more art forms used for these lessons. After lunch the students worked with the Title I teacher on writing, vocabulary, and other language arts skills that related to the same book. The classroom teachers were there as well so they could follow up on what their students had done. The ARTS team members soon developed and taught many lessons on various books in all of the art forms. DARTS classes were held approximately twice a month and were very popular with both students and teachers. Several of these lessons may be found in Appendix D.

When Ruth and I got back (from New York), we got together with the Title I staff
and developed a model where we would choose a book on a second grade level,
present arts lessons on the book, and the Title I teacher in the area would have the







56

kids in the same afternoon to work on writing, vocabulary, etc. that related to the
same book. We were able to get money for busses to bring a grade level from a
Title I school for an entire day at Connecticut Park. Of course the classroom
teachers were there too so they were able to follow up on what the kids had done.
We developed a lot of lessons on books in various art forms, and pretty soon all
of the ARTS team members were designing and teaching lessons for DARTS. We did this approximately twice a month, and it was really popular with both the kids
and the teachers. (Jan Jones, music specialist)

Time for Artistic and Performing Experiences for Talented and Ready Youngsters
TAPESTRYD

In the early 1980s, Montgomery County Schools began to put a great deal of time and money into programs for students who had been labeled as academically gifted and talented. This was largely at the instigation of parents who had been expressing a desire for programs of this sort. The schools used standardized test scores and teacher observation to identify which students should be placed into accelerated learning situations. In the spring of 1984, the coordinator of the Gifted and Talented Department met with the coordinator for Interrelated ARTS to plan a program for those students who were identified as gifted in one or more art forin. The Office of Program Development provided funds for summer employment so that arts teachers and coordinators could write the criteria and testing items for identification of gifted youngsters. The teachers and coordinators relied on Renzulli's (1982) conception of giftedness (ability, task commitment, and creativity) as a guideline for preparing the test items.

In the fall of 1984, six schools were selected to pilot the program. The music and arts specialists in the selected schools administered the tests for these arts forms, and dance and drama teachers from Interrelated ARTS administered the tests for their art forms. The students who were identified as gifted were taken out of their classes for special instruction for a one-hour period each week. If a student showed talent in more than one art form, he or she had to choose one in which to receive special instruction.







57

The music and art teachers in the school provided instruction in these subjects, while dance and drama instruction was provided by the Interrelated ARTS specialists. Salaries for the Interrelated ARTS teachers who taught in the TAPESTRY Program were funded by the Gifted and Talented Program. As the TAPESTRY program grew it became necessary for Interrelated ARTS to hire two more drama and two more dance teachers to replace those working on TAPESTRY.

Parents of students who were selected to participate in the program were for the most part extremely supportive. Several parents testified at school board budget hearings, and this helped in receiving continuing funding for the program.

The coordinator of the Gifted and Talented Program, Dr. Starnes, remembers that there was a good representation of minority students in the program and that the teaching was largely focused on skill developments rather than performance.

It was a nice mix of kids. I liked that there were skills being taught, and although there were some performance aspects, it was more process than product oriented.
(Waveline Starnes, Coordinator of Gifted and Talented Program).

In 1990 the financial support for gifted programs ended, and the drama and dance teachers were funded back into Interrelated ARTS Middle School

In the late 1980s and early 1990s Montgomery County Schools began to focus on several major changes. One was to provide more ESOL instructors to meet the needs of the large number of immigrant from Hispanic, Southeast Asian and Asian countries. Another was to restructure the junior high schools into middle schools. Middle schools would contain grades 6, 7, and 8, while high school would be for grades 9, 10, 11, and 12. The coordinator of Interrelated ARTS, Dr. Ann Richardson, realized that much of the work of the ARTS teams could be expanded to assist middle school students and







58

teachers. Some ARTS team members led workshops for middle school teachers showing how the arts could be used in this curriculum. In addition, ARTS team members wrote a book of lessons for middle school entitled Making Connectionsfor the Middle Learning Years (1990) Teachers in middle schools who received service from Interrelated ARTS were not required to take an in-service course, nor did they require a whole-school commitment.

Middle school people weren't as interested (as elementary teachers), but teachers
had a lot of pressure on them. When junior high changed to middle schools, we
didn't want the sixth graders who previously had this experience to lose out on it,
but we had only elementary experience. The principals and some teachers at
middle schools were not as enthusiastic. (Jan Jones, music specialist)

This attitude gradually changed as ARTS teams met with academic teams at

middle schools and began working in classrooms to help these teachers find new ways of delivering their academic curriculum. Multicultural curriculum resource packages mentioned on pages 47,8 were particularly well received by Middle School teachers.

By 1994 the program consisted of only four arts teachers and a part-time coordinator. The program lost the Connecticut Park space to an expanding Adult Education Program and moved to a smaller space.

In the late 1980s and early 1990s the population of Montgomery County Schools was becoming increasingly diverse as Hispanic, Southeast Asian and Asian families were moving in to the county. This diversity required greater numbers of ESOL (English for Speakers of Other Languages) to meet the needs of these students.

The program (Interrelated ARTS)was cut to meet staffing needs required by the
increased diverse population. (ESOL) and the demands to maintain high test
scores, particularly in science and mathematics. (Ann Richardson, Coordinator of
Interrelated ARTS)







59

The coordinator became coordinator of Visual Art for Montgomery County Public Schools, and the remaining ARTS team members returned to elementary classroom teaching.














CHAPTER 5
FINDINGS

In the 1970s many arts-in-general-education programs were funded both by the Federal Government and by local governments. Most of these programs lasted between 3 and 5 years. Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS in Montgomery County, Maryland was a program that was funded by both the federal government and the county government and lasted for 22 years.

In reviewing data, in Chapter 4 the major themes that emerged were factors

related to the longevity, the quality and feasibility of the program This chapter examines answers to the questions posed in Chapter 1. These are conceptualized as questions regarding longevity, quality, and feasibility. While in practice, such factors are woven parts of a whole, each of these is discussed separately and explored vis a vis the model program described. Table 2 describes that model by use of a chart. Implicit in this are recommendations for implementing such a program. Table 2. Model for Implementation

Longevity Quality Feasibility

Meet needs of various Address academic Continuation of funding
populations curriculum

Meet needs ov classroom Arts and academic Visibility to parents,
teachers curriculum receive equal school board members,
emphasis others





60







61

Recommendations for Program Implementation

The data suggest the following factors as crucial to successful program

replication. It is understood that specific communities should focus more or less energy on a variety of factors related to these major topics Lonizev

Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS began mainly as a teacher-training program for elementary school teachers and grew over the years as different educational needs developed. As an entity Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS functioned for 22 years, from 1973 to 1995.

Changes in Focus of Program/Flexibili1y

The program changed its foci as different emphases were placed on the curricula in Montgomery County Public Schools. The first change was for ARTS teachers to work in Special Education Centers. Other emphases included science programs and programs for the gifted and talented. Since reading had always been a priority in the school system, The DARTS program was developed. When space and resources became available to couple the arts with science, mathematics, and computer learning, the Connecticut Park Center School was begun. TAPESTRY was a logical outgrowth of the push for special programs for the gifted and talented. In addition to these changes the program retained its original character and continued with the regular work in elementary classrooms. Of the 13 people interviewed, nine considered the changing foci as a major reason for the program's longevity. The following interview excerpts illustrate this opinion:

Over the years we met different political and educational needs. Our program
went along with national trends and changes and also changed to meet the needs
of Montgomery County Schools. (Jane Papish, Drama specialist)







62

At Chevy Chase the opportunity presented itself to set up a center school. Math,
science, and CRI (computer related instruction) had been looking for an
opportunity to do this.... We needed to be exemplary and integrate arts and
science. (Bill MacDonald, science specialist)

If you look back closely you can see how things that were politically important
became implemented, for instance handicapped kids when special education was
being stressed, and gifted and talented kids, and of course middle school.
(Waveline Starns, Coordinator for Gifted and Talented Programs)

When Ann (Richardson) realized that we were in danger of being cut because of
computers, she was very smart to go to another grade and that what we had to
offer could be expanded for secondary education. (Betty Weincek, dance
specialist)

Work with Classroom Teachers

Another major correlate to longevity appears to have been the program's attention to the classroom teacher. It would seem that classroom teachers who want to integrate (or interrelate) appropriately need the resources and support of arts specialists. They also need extensive training (Wykell 1996). Figure 5 illustrates a classroom teacher receiving instructions in painting from an ARTS team member.


















Figure 5. Teaching Visual Art







63

Two classroom teachers who are still teaching in Montgomery County made the following comments when they responded to the e-mail request:

Having the ARTS staff come to my K classroom was extremely supportive I
began to create lessons following the same format, and the arts became an
Integral part of my daily program. (Ellie Shutak, classroom teacher)

I still use the arts all the time with my students. I used them as a kindergarten teacher and with second and third graders. I liked the program because it gave
children the chance to express themselves in other ways. I have since developed
my own use of the arts and I am grateful that I had a chance to be a part of that
program. (Carolyn Potto, classroom teacher)

Results from a telephone survey of classroom teachers who received services from the ARTS teams inl 977 showed that, 84% reported an increase in their skill and knowledge of the arts, and 80% reported integrating the arts more into their curriculum than they previously did (N = 75). A teacher evaluation of the in-service classes at the end of three years showed that of 25 teachers interviewed, 19 considered the course to be highly successful in meeting objectives, discovering individual potential, and encouraging divergent thinking (Kukuk 1977). Since all classroom teachers were required to take the in-service course offered by the ARTS teams before (or at the same time), they received service in their schools, they were better able to work with the ARTS team members in planning lessons. Classroom teachers served as an important part of the planning process during conferences, both before and after the ARTS team teacher's work in the classroom. A classroom teacher would often feel confident enough to coteach the lesson. In addition, the lesson plans included follow-up activities for future use. These points are reflected in comments from principals in pilot schools in the program in the following quotes:

I see the strengths of this project as the commitment, enthusiasm, and skill of the teams.... They accept teachers where they are. I feel that they are helping me do







64

what I want done in the school.... Teachers are excited about the possibilities
and feel more confident about participating in the arts. (Evaluation Report 1977) I still remember the lessons that team members taught in my class. I still use a lot
of them. (Carole Blackwell, classroom teacher) Quali

According to four of the interviewees, a major factor in the success of the program was the quality of the curriculum-integration it was conceived to achieve.

I think the most important reason the program lasted so long is because we taught
the actual curriculum. Having been a classroom teacher and from talking with
teachers with whom we worked, I know that was the kind of assistance they
wanted. After all, they HAD to teach the required curriculum and there was never enough time in which to do so. Most of the lessons we left for them fit right in to
what they were working on. (Nancy Harris, dance specialist)

The Council of Arts Accrediting Association (1994) claimed that there are two major problems with integrated programs. One is the lack of focus and absence of structures of knowledge (structuring learning to meet curriculum needs). The other is the territorial claims of specialists in knowledge areas. In order to avoid these problems, carefully conceived design features are needed in interdisciplinary programs.

Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS fits into the co-equal model that was described by Bresler (1995). Almost all of the ARTS team members had training and experience both in classroom teaching and in a specific art form. All of the lessons that were designed and taught by ARTS team members followed a similar format. Each lesson plan included objectives from both the art form and from the basic curriculum. Montgomery County Public Schools provided guides containing curriculum content and objectives for each subject and grade level so that lesson plans could be specifically geared toward curriculum objectives. Integrated techniques that use the arts within other course work need to convey the objectives of that course work. The importance of learning in both







65

areas was emphasized. The arts were not put in the service of leading in other subjects, but taught with equivalent emphasis so that learning could take place in both areas. Figure

6 illustrates a dance movement teacher working with first graders on the meanings of prepositions.




4,







ov







Figure 6. Learning through dance

In addition to curriculum objectives, the lessons included specific objectives from the art form, Objectives in Music and Visual Art were found in the courses of study for those subjects. ARTS team members in Dance and Drama were required to do more research to find suitable objectives in their art forms. One of the advantages of being able to refer to curriculum guides is that each grade level has its own specific content area. In third grade social studies, for example, students study the geography and cultures of Ghana, Mexico, and Japan. The classroom teacher may decide in what order they axe presented, but by the end of third grade all classes will have covered this material. ARTS team members were able to compose lesson plans that with minor revisions could be used in different schools. Since all classroom teachers were required to teach specific







66

curriculum, most were delighted to learn new strategies to help them meet the curriculum objectives. As well as objectives, each lesson plan included a list of materials required to teach the lesson, background information if necessary, and an ordered list of procedures. Evaluation and extensions or follow-up suggestions for the classroom teacher followed these procedures.

Feasibili

Regardless of the intrinsic value of the program, it would not be feasible to

replicate without sufficient funding to meet its considerable costs. Feasibility depends on funding, which in turn can rely on visibility. Budget Plannin2

The funding for the first three years of Project ARTS came from an ESEA Title III grant, grants through the United States Office of Education through the Alliance for Arts Education, the National Committee Arts for the Handicapped, and by Montgomery County Public Schools. One of the major objectives stated in the final report was that there were to be several aspects of the program specifically designed to enhance program self-renewal (Kukuk and Brome 1977).

In supporting this program the budget for Project ARTS/Interrelated

ARTS required salaries for ARTS team members (12 by the 3rd year), including extra funds for those team members teaching the in-service course, salaries for the program coordinator, a full-time secretary, and a part-time librarian for the arts resource center. Funding was also required for materials (such as visual arts supplies, rhythm instruments, and trade books), mileage accrued by ARTS team members as they traveled to the various schools, and of course the building that housed the program. Later in the







67

program, funding was also required for buses to transport students to Connecticut Park Center school for both science programs and DARTS.

In Montgomery County the elected school board presents a yearly budget to the County Council. The operating budget is broken down into costs for various programs, salaries, etc. The County Council then decides which of the School Board items will be either partially or completely funded. Both the County Council and the School Board hold three hearing sessions in which parents, teachers, administrators, or other concerned citizens may speak for a prescribed time (usually 3 minutes) in support of various issues. VisibiUly

Obviously it is important for a program to have a great deal of support in order to remain in the budget year after year. One of the ways that Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS maintained this support was to invite both School Board and County Council members into classrooms to observe the program in action. In order to be as visible as possible there was always a principal, teacher, and/or concerned parent to speak in support of the program at these budget hearings. In addition, each ARTS team member attended all of the hearings in a group and wore identifying badges which were also given to others in attendance.

Administrative workshops and curriculum support packages also helped to keep the program in the forefront of educational news. The objectives of the administrative workshops were to demonstrate the value of integrating the arts into the daily curriculum and to have administrators identify necessary support both in their schools and in the school system. A series of five administrative workshops were provided through Federal Government grants. The final report (Kukuk 1977) noted that "Greater awareness and knowledge resulting from the administrative workshops has changed attitudes about







68

Project ARTS at the same time the demands have increased for the program." At the end of the three years of funding through grants, a core group of administrators met regularly with the Division of Aesthetic Education to plan the development of a comprehensive arts program for Montgomery County Public Schools.














CHAPTER 6
CONCLUSIONS

Summ

This study is about a particular program, Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS, that integrated music, dance, visual art, and drama into the academic curriculum. The program, which took place in Montgomery County, Maryland existed from 1973 until 1995. The study uses interviews, personal recollections and existing documents to determine which factors were most important in its success. The major factors that emerged were those concerning the program's longevity, quality, and feasibility.

The program achieved longevity by identifying and meeting the needs of various populations such as gifted and talented students and physically handicapped students. In addition the program met the needs of elementary classroom teachers by designing lessons that addressed both the academic curriculum and the arts, by demonstrating these lessons in teachers' classrooms and by teaching arts related skills in an in-service course.

Quality was achieved by ARTS team members being thoroughly acquainted with the elementary curriculum so that demonstration lessons directly addressed the content area taught in the classroom. To achieve integrity between disciplines, the arts and academic aspects of each lesson received equal emphasis whenever possible. It is unfortunate that no instrument was established to measure student gains The provision for this would be helpful in assessing the quality of an arts-in-general-education programs in the future.


69







70

In order to exist, Project ARTS/ Interrelated ARTS required yearly continuation of funding. The first three years of funding was provided by a grant from the Federal Government and matching funds from the Montgomery County Board of Education. At the end of three years the program was entirely funded by Montgomery County and continued to be so until the end of the program.

For the program to continue to receive funding it was necessary for it to be as visible as possible. Parents, School Board members, County Council members, administrators, and any others who were interested were invited to come into classrooms to watch ARTS team members work. In addition visitors were invited to the special classes at the Connecticut Park Center. Montgomery County School photographer, Bill Mills, was frequently asked to photograph scenes of the ARTS teams in action and these pictures appeared in The Superintendent's Bulletin, a weekly publication that went to all Montgomery County School Board employees. To attain greater visibility ARTS team members attended budget hearings as a group and wore identifying badges.

Implications

A major conclusion of this study is that for arts-in-general education programs to be initiated into public school systems there needs to be a model that combines some, if not all of the factors that contributed to the success of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS. These factors include

An awareness of current educational trends and emphases combined with the ability to meet the needs and requirements of a system in mutually supportive
ways (Longevity)

An awareness of teacher needs and plans to most effectively meet those needs
(Longevity)







71

The enlistment of both principals and teachers as enthusiastic supporters in
planning for an arts program including comprehensive in-service instruction for
teachers (Quality)

The participation of teachers and principals who maintain a high degree of
visibility, particularly to those in charge of school funding. This includes inviting
board of education members and other responsible for funding into the
classrooms, to workshops and to meetings where support for arts programs may
be expressed (Feasibility)

Reimer (1980) says that to design an effective arts program a clearly articulated underlying philosophy is needed. In addition there must be teams of interdisciplinary arts specialists to identify and develop arts resource materials, offer workshops for teachers and administrators, coordinate resources and assist classroom teachers. All of these factors may be found in Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.

To initiate an arts-in-general education program it is first necessary to determine and clearly articulate the need for such a program. In the case of Project ARTS a small but vocal group of citizens felt that elementary school students were receiving insufficient arts instruction time by the specialists assigned to the schools. In addition there was no instruction provided in dance or drama. The citizens group expressed these concerns to the Board of Education. To assist in meeting the costs necessary to implement an arts program, the Board asked a teacher specialist to write a grant proposal.. This resulted in Montgomery County Public Schools receiving a Federal government grant for the program which the school system jointly supported.

The ARTS team members were teachers who had background and experience in classroom teaching as well as in a specific art form. These teachers were familiar with the elementary curriculum and were able to assist classroom teachers in using arts lesson that related to it.







72

To maintain funding an arts program must continue to meet the needs of the system that is supporting it. In the case of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS this was accomplished by changing direction as the need to do so appeared. In addition the program maintained a high degree of visibility by inviting school board members, parents, and administrators to observe and participate in lessons and workshops.

Recommendations for Further Study

One recommendation is that research be done to indicate whether communication among community, parents, and teachers would affect arts programs. Interrelated ARTS began with a community group called Concerned Citizens for the Arts. Many programs reviewed in this study suggested that the inclusion of involved community members was important to the success of the program. It would also be useful to examine parental support of standards that include the arts.

In the past two decades here has been extensive research on the effects of music on the human brain. Relating some of these studies such as those mentioned in Chapter 2, to arts programs in schools would surely yield support for including such programs in public schools

An additional recommendation is that control group research to correlate student academic growth with arts experiences be undertaken. This may be accomplished through the use of pre-and post-test scores within schools that plan an arts-in-generaleducation program This study is focused on the reasons for a particular program's longevity. Unfortunately no information that concerned student academic gains for Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was available. For arts-in-general-education programs to gain acceptance, studies of student gains correlated with test scores among programs with and without arts experiences could be helpful.







73

There are many school systems throughout this country with varying resources, both financial and cultural. A study of where support for arts programs may be found (fiscal, cultural, etc.) could be of assistance to those interested in beginning such a program.

Now that we have National Standards for Arts Education (1994), an arts-ingeneral education program should be guided by these standards. The standards should apply to lessons both for demonstration teaching and for classroom teacher use.. In fact, the design of any program should include arts standards. A plan for evaluation with clearly defined objectives based on national standards should be included in the planning of arts programs.

Schools also have varying needs according to their geographical locations. Big city school systems have many cultural advantages but may be lacking in community support. A study of the resources needed in various geographical areas to support both arts and other academic should be included in the development of a comprehensive program. .

The gathering of many informed critical evaluations of a program may be more effective in determining its true value To ensure this, a plan for evaluation with clearly defined objectives should be included in the design for future projects.














APPENDIX A
ESEA TITLE III PROJECT ARTS FUNDING









Table A-1. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1975


Funds % of Positions
($) Total and Services Provided Results
ESEA 2 arts teams trained
12 pilot schools served (105 teachers 88,437 44 1 Project Director trained)
I Curriculum Writer/Evaluator 2,992 students involved in
.5 Secretary demonstration classes twice
4.5 FTE Teacher Assistants monthly
P/T Research Field Team First formal instruction in danceConsultants drama, K-3
Instructional Summer in-service course, EL- 16,
Supplies/Equipment taught by arts teams (32 teachers)
Administrative Travel 3 countrywide workshops presented to
Fixed Charges art, music, and PE specialists

MCPS Funds Designed staff development program
Collected arts activities for bank 123,913 56 8 Arts Team Members 96,557 Teacher assistants trained
1,000 Monthly workshops held centrally for Inst. Travel 600 all participating teachers
Office Supplies 800
Telephone 14,966
Fixed Charges 113,923


202,360 Fiscal Year 1975 Total

























75







76

Table A-2. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1976

Funds % of
($) Total Positions and Services Provided Results
ESEA Funds 3 arts teams trained
18 pilot schools served (139 teachers 123,913 36 1 Project Director trained)
I Curriculum Writer/Evaluator 3,475 students involved in
I Full-Time Secretary demonstration classes twice
2.25 FTE Teacher Assistants monthly
P/T Research Field Team Interrelated arts summer school
Consultants taught by arts team
Office Supplies Developed videotapes of arts
Substitute Time processes for in-service use and for
Instructional Supplies/ dissemination
Equipment Fall in-service course, EL-20, taught
Administrative Travel by arts teams (43 teachers)
Instructional Travel Teacher assistants trained
Fixed Charges Conducted nonpilot school

MCPS Funds meetings/workshops

223,574 64 12 Arts Team 150,681
Members 11,264
Summer Per Diem
4.5 FTE Teacher 31,212
Assistants 3,300
Teacher Travel 1,000
Telephone 26,117
Fixed Charges 223,574

347,487 Fiscal Year 1976 Total







77

Table A-3. ESBA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1977


Funds % of
M$ Total Positions and Services Provided Results

ESEA Funds Continued arts team training
18 pilot schools served (Level III-IV 120,000 31 1 Project Director service) (165 teachers trained)
1 Curriculum Writer/Evaluator I pilot school for handicapped
1 Full-Time Secretary (second semester)-training 12
1 Clerk Typist teachers
I Community Coordinator 3 satellite schools served-14 teachers
Consultants trained
Substitutes 4,956 students involved in
Instructional Supplies demonstration classes
Office Supplies Developed and implemented a fourAdministrative Travel level staff development program
Instructional Travel for Operated arts resource center
Dissemination Refined and tested arts activity bank
Fixed Charges prior to publishing

MCPS Funds Conducted 3 countrywide
____________________________________ administrative arts workshops
247,309 64 12 Arts Team 154,615 Eduthiion o etei
Summer PerEdcto Diem 7,584 Conducted fall in-service course, EL6.75 FTE Teacher 20 (47 teachers)
Assistants 49,705 Will conduct EL-20 (spring
Teacher Travel 6,216 semester)-art, music, PE, and
Telephone 1,500 classroom teachers (et
Fixed Charges 2769 accepted)l
247,309 Will conduct EL- 16 summer inservice
Other Funds Developed community support and
awareness for the arts through 8,000* 5 community school visits and
13,523**special workshops
21,523 conducted 56 nonpilot school
workshops through February
1977
Will conduct summer workshop for special ed teachers
Develop 3 arts support packages to be integrated into other curriculum areas

1 16 teacher applicants turned down 388,832 Fiscal Year 1977 Total
*Alliance for Arts Education
**Handicapped







78

Table A-4. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1978

Funds % of
M Total Positions and Services Provided Results
ESEA Funds 30 pilot schools (Level 11, 111, IV
service) (420 teachers)
0 10,500 students to be involved in
demonstration teaching
MCPS Funds Expanded pilot schools for
handicapped
259,992 77 12 Arts Team 162,015 Will be on call for services for all
Summer Per MCPS schools I week per month
Diem 8,000 Will conduct additional sections of
6.75 FTE Teacher in-service course EL-20
Assistants 51,732 throughout county
Teacher Travel 7,770 Will conduct summer in-service
Telephone 1,500 course EL- 16
Fixed Charges 7_ Will conduct community workshops
259,992 Will operate Arts Resource Center Will produce materials for
Other Funds dissemination
Will develop community resources 79,000*** 23 for use in schools


338,992
approx. Fiscal Year 1978 Total














APPENDIX B
LESSON PLAN

Title: One Wide River to Cross

Grade level: pre-K or K

Materials: bookOne Wide River to Cross adapted by Barbara Emberley. Illustrated by Ed Emberley

Music objectives:
to experience singing an adaptation of a traditional African American spiritual. to become aware of the stanza-refrain form of the lyrics and music of the song. to listen for and be able to identify the rhythm pattern accompanying the words, "One Wide River to Cross"

Math objectives:
to use the correct number of fingers to correlate with the numbers in the song. to explore different combinations of numbers which may be used in simple addition. to demonstrate the commutative property of addition by reversing the order in which the addends are shown.

Procedure:
1. Clap and say the title of the book in the rhythm of the words. Explain to the
students that they will clap and sing this rhythm whenever it occurs in the
book/song.
2. Read/sing the story making sure that the students can see the illustrations on each
page. Encourage the student to participate on the words, "One wide river to cross"
and on the chorus section.
3. Go back to the beginning of the book. Explain that this time every time a number
is mentioned in the song the students will show that number on their fingers using
a different hand each time a number is sung. At the sixth stanza, demonstrate what you want the students to do and ask them to describe what you did( the
teacher will display five fingers on one hand and one finger on the other to show
4;six," then reverse so that the opposite hands show each number)

4. Continue through the verses demonstrating the numbers on your fingers and
having the student mirror you.



79







80

6+1 then 1+6 7+1 then 1+7
8+1 then 1+8 (some students may be able to figure out that 4+4 also works here)
9+1 then 1+9 (5+5 also works here)

5. Sing the story again and add this "new way" to count.

Elaboration:
The following chant is over 100 years old. American slave children would say this as a hand clapping game.

Old ark she reeled, old ark she rocked Old ark she sitting' on the mountain top














APPENDIX C:
CURRICULUM RESOURCE PACKAGE Introduction

The lessons in this guide have been designed for use with the sixth grade social studies unit on Greece. The teacher will also find that some lessons will also serve to meet such reading/language arts objectives as developing the ability to read narration for a purpose, developing the ability to interpret creatively, and developing an understanding that myths reflect the culture that engenders them.

It is intended that this guide will not only provide students with an opportunity to learn about ancient Greece but to explore some of the ways in which ancient Greece has contributed to our modem civilization.

Contributors to this guide are: Elizabeth Adams, Marian DiJulio, Lillian Hasko, Janis Jones, Nancy Kirsch, Ruth Kline, Nancy Kessler, Esther Lakner, Jane Lynn, Diane Pokras, and Elizabeth Segal. Provided by the Interrelated ARTS Program; Eoline Kukuk, Coordinator.

Sample Lessons

Lesson I

Title: Ancient Greek Animal Dances (dance/movement)

Objectives: To identify cultural characteristics evidenced in the life of the ancient
Greeks (Social Studies Objective C606.02)

To study the animal dances of ancient Greece



81







82

To develop movement sequences which illustrate solemn or humorous
animal dances

To create a mask which depicts an animal

Grade level: 6

Time required: Two 45-minute periods

Materials: Rhythm instruments drum, cymbals, tambourines, etc.

The Dance in Ancient Greece, by Lillian B. Lawler, Wesleyan
University Press, Middletown, CT., 1964 (in package)

Materials for making masks paper plates, yam, markers, crayons, hole
punch

Background: The actual dances of the ancient Greeks can only be imagined and
pieced together from their writings and their art. We do know that they
developed many different kinds of dances and that one very important
type was the animal dances.

Many ancient people, including the Greeks, noticed that some animals seem to actually dance. Apes, elephants, cat animals, dolphins, birds,
bees, and bears are some of the animals which have been observed
doing dancelike movements when they are in the wild state. Depending
on the animal, these movements occur as a solo, a pair, or a group.

In addition, early people were very aware of the importance of animals and how vital they were to survival. Therefore, the characteristics and
movements of animals were often expressed in the dances created by
people.

Very early animal dances were usually performed in a serious and often
ritualistic manner. However, after many centuries, the animal dances changed into the form of entertainment called mummery. The animal mummery of the ancient Greeks was pantomimed by performers who
often wore masks of the animals they were imitating.

Procedure: Share the background information about the ancient Greek animal
dances.

Discuss and record the students' speculations about the importance of
animals to ancient people. For example:

Animals famished people with food and clothing. Animals could be dangerous to people.







83

Some animals could be domesticated.
Some animals could furnish pleasure to people.
" Some animals were thought to be sacred and were worshiped and
protected.
" Some animals were used as sacrifices to the gods.

Share the following list of animals for which there is evidence that they were depicted in ancient Greek animal dances:

bull and cow bear
snake lion
fish wolf
birds deer
rooster, owl, swallow, fox stork, nightingale, goat
raven, eagle, hawk horse
griffin donkey
lizard ram
pig or boar panther

Discuss and list with the students the various movements, which each animal makes. Ask how these movements could be exaggerated. Example: Bird swooping, flapping, strutting, turning, cocking head, jumping

Have the students take their "self space" and try several of the movement words for the different animals. Use a rhythm instrument and provide a definite number of counts for each movement. For example:
"Try swooping up and down in any direction while I play the
tambourine for ten counts.. End on count ten in a bird shape. Try
it again, but make your movements twice as large. Now try it in
slow motion."

After exploring many of the animals' movements with the class, have the students select the animals, which they would like to describe in mask and movement. Small groups will most likely evolve. Subgroups of serious or funny animal mummery could be formed.

Provide time for students to decide and practice:
which movements they will do,
how many counts they will need for their movements,
" which rhythm instruments to use for accompaniment. (the dancers
could use an instrument themselves or they could have another
student provide the sounds)
" whether they will move as a small group or as individuals.







84

what their pathway will be. For example: a curving line, a square, a circle?

Encourage the students to exaggerate their movements, to change levels,
directions, and speed.

Have the students make a simple mask using the following directions:

Place a paper plate over the face to determine the location of eyes.
Mark lightly with a pencil where the eyes are to be cut. Cut holes for
eyes that are large enough to permit clear vision.

Draw the animal face on the paper plate using large or exaggerated
features. Color with markers or crayons.

Punch holes in sides of the mask and attach yam. Try on mask and
make any necessary adjustments in eyehole openings.

Ask the students to practice performing their movement sequences while
wearing their masks.

Have a sharing time for the individual and group animal dances using
the masks and rhythm instruments.

Allow time for discussing and evaluating the student performances. As
part of the discussion, ask the students to identify movements, which
depicted the corresponding animal movements.

Adaptation for
special needs: More gifted students may enjoy reading a translation of The Birds by
Aristophanes and speculating where animal movements might have been
used by the characters in the play.

Lesson 2

Title: Ancient Greek Olympics (dance/movement)

Objectives: To identify cultural characteristics evidenced in the life of the ancient
Greeks (Social Studies Objective C606.02)

To identify characteristics of ancient Mediterranean civilizations that are
reflected in Western civilizations. (Social Studies Objective C607.00)

To use movement to learn about the origins of the Greek Olympic
games.







85

To create body shapes in the style of ancient Greek sculpture and
artifacts.

Grade level: 6

Time required: One hour

Materials: Books:
The Art of Ancient Greece by Shirley Glubok, Atheneum, NewYork,
1966 (in package)
Greek Athletic Games by Nancy Cole, Metropolitan Museum of Art (for
professional use only) (in package)

Chalkboard and chalk
Drum
Tape: "March of the Olympians", U.S. Marine Band, RCA 78.13 (in
package)

Background: The games of ancient Greece occurred in Olympia, Greece, and were
dedicated to the god Zeus. Zeus lived on Mt. Olympus. Only men
played in the games. All events took place outside in a dirt ring or track.
See Greek Athletic Games introduction for further information.

Procedure: Share the background information with the students. Show pictures of
ancient Greek sculpture representing sporting events such as the discus thrower, charioteer, boxer, archer, broad jumper, etc. (found in books
listed above in the "Materials" section)

Ask the students to bring each pose to life for eight counts and then
freeze in their starting position.

Ask the students to form groups of two or three. Each group will select a sport from those listed on the board. Ask each group to create an eight
count sequence depicting the selected sport. Encourage the students to use their bodies as objects (i.e., vaulting pole, discus, etc.) and to give their compositions more interest by varying the amounts of energy, the
levels, and the directions faced.

Share the movement sequences created by bringing the Greek games to
life. Have the groups perform in a classroom "arena" (as they would
have been performed in ancient Greece).

The tape "March of the Olympians" may be used to provide background
music for the movements. Ask the students to freeze in a starting
position as the introduction part of the music is played. They will begin
their movement sequences when the march begins.







86

Next, ask each group to select a favorite sport which is part of the
modem Olympic games. Ask the groups to create a new eight count
movement sequence to perform for the class.

Ask the students to compare and contrast the games of today with those
in ancient Greece. Have students identify the sports that were used in
ancient Greece and that are found in modem Olympic games.

Extension The record.Give it All You've Got by Frank Mangione was recorded to
honor the 1980 Olympics. Play the music for the students. Suggest a modem day sporting event. Have the students identify three different
movements, which interpret the sport. Play the music and have the
students perform the movements. Stop the music, and students "freeze".
Repeat the activity with other modem sports.

Have the students develop a list of abilities which one must have to be
good in athletics as well as in dance: discipline, eye-hand/foot
coordination, rhythm, strength, agility, projection, ability to share and
work effectively with a groups, and concentration.

Lesson 3

Title: Know Your Roots (dance/movement)

Objectives: To identify evidence of cultural characteristics from Greece in the
United States today (Social Studies Objective C607.01)

To individually execute movement(s) which represent a specific word
with a Greek or Latin root

Grade level: 6

Time required: 50 minutes (The lesson may be repeated working with different words).

Materials: A set of cards listing roots, prefixes, and suffixes (excerpted from the
Social Studies Instructional Guide, Grade 6, p. 112).
A chalkboard or chart paper.
A stopwatch if a clock with a second hand is not available.

Background: The students should have been introduced to the topic of Greek and
Latin roots and the importance that they have in the English language.

Procedure: Hold up one of the root cards. Ask the students for a word in which this
root is contained, and then write one of the responses on the board or
chart. Do this for as many of the roots as there are students in the class.
(Make sure that there is an equal number of roots, prefixes, or suffixes







87

that have the letter "a" at the top comer as have the letter "b" at the
top). Refer to page 8 for one possible response to each one.

Divide the class in half and give one group the cards with the letter "a"
on them and the other half with the letter "b" on them. The class is to be
in two teams. Allow a sufficient amount of time for everyone to think
of movements, which represent their word.

One at a time, have the students portray movements that represent their
particular word. The rest of the team must identify the words. The
teacher should clock the correct response time. The clock should stop as soon as the word is said and the amount of time taken should be written
on the board. The team has up to 30 seconds to determine the word.
After the clock is stopped, the person from the team who said the word
must be able to give the root and its meaning. If that cannot be done, 30
seconds is written on the board for that team. The object is to have the
lowest number of seconds by the end of the game.

At the conclusion of the lesson, ask the students the following questions:

What effect do words have on the culture of a country? How does the importance of the root word in our country compare with the architectural, governmental, and scientific advancements evident in our society today?
Describe what each of the areas (government, medicine, theatre, etc.) might be like without the accomplishments made by the Greeks. Would they possibly have been contributed by another culture?

Adaptation
Special needs: For gifted and talented students:
Create a story that uses at least ten words that have Greek or Latin roots, prefixes or suffices and that has a beginning, middle, or an ending. The
number of words can vary according to the level of ability of the
students.

Using a variety of locomotor and nonlocomotor movements, levels, and
force, have the students interpret the story into a movement sequence.







88

List of Greek/Latin Roots and Their Meanings

Root Meaning Root Meaning
super supernatural urbs urban
post post-hypnotic itis bronchitis
anti antisocial satis satisfy
pre predawn vice vice principal
inter intercollegiate bios biosattelite
ambi ambidextrous facio, factus manufacture
port portable ex, e exhume
logos meteorology dexter dextral
tele telephotography navis navigate
pro pro-American manos monologue
duco, ducts aqueduct aster asterisk
photos photoreceptor pathos pathetic
in inaccurate sub submarine
demos demography graphe graphite
matures maturity bi bisect
brevis brief case ped pedal
micros microwave trans transcontinental
lithos lithology re refreeze
bronchosq bronchitis contra contradict
scriptum scriptwriter credo creditable
circle circular liber librarian

Lesson 4

Title: Movement in Sevens (dance/movement)

Objectives: To identify the cultural characteristics evidenced in the life of the ancient
Greeks (Social Studies Objective C606.02)

To create movements in the 7/8 time signature which is characteristic of
Greek music and dance

Grade level: 6

Time required: 45 minutes

Materials: Large laminated chart with a composite of the specific rhythms in 7/8
time (in package)
Nine laminated cards with the specific rhythm and movement guidelines
on each (in package; also see p. 11).
A large open space such as the all-purpose room or gymnasium







89

Background: Teachers should read the background from the book, The Dance in
Ancient Greece (see pp. 12-13) and paraphrase or select those sections
which seem applicable to the specific classes' level of ability.

Students should be acquainted with locomotor and non-locomotor
movements (see p. 14).

Procedure: Explain that one of the time signatures used in Greek music is 7/8. Also
explain that the movements which will be done are not supposed to
represent Greek folk dances. The lesson involves putting movements to a
designated rhythm in 7/8 time.

Using the rhythm chart (in the package), have the class as a group clap
out all of the nine rhythms.

Review locomotor and nonlocomotor movements with the class by listing
them on the board as follows:

Locomotor walk, run, hop, jump, leap, skip, gallop, slide
Nonlocomotor bend, stretch, push, pull, bounce, shake, twist, swing

Divide the class into nine equal groups and give each group a card with
its specific rhythm and movement guidelines.
Provide the following directions for the groups: Clap out the rhythm that is on your card Create movements that correspond to your group's card (except for the group with a sound, no sounds should be made). Begin and end the 7 count sequence in the same place and in the
same body position.
Practice the movements a few times so that students will have no difficulty performing it individually as well as part of a group. Perform the created movements three times without stopping.

Have each group share its 7/8 movement pattern.

Next, have the members of group # I position themselves randomly in
the open space. Do the same for each of the other eight groups (An
example of the way the students might be positioned may be found on p.
11). Explain that everyone will be moving at the same time and that the 7 count sequence will be done three times. Count out loud for sequence
of seven to establish the beat.

Have all of the students practice the movements to the 7 beat rhythm.

Have the students perform their 7 count movement sequence repeating it
eight times.







90

4/4 time is a time signature commonly used in music and dance in the
United States. How did moving in 7/8 time affect your movements? In what ways were your movements different, the same? Use adjective's to
describe some of your movements. For example: smooth arms, light
steps, etc.

Extension: Video tape the students executing the movements in their own separate
groups and then in the one large group. What differences are evident?
(It should appear that the students are doing completely different
movements. The interesting aspect of observing the group as a whole is
to observe how the movements relate to one another).

Adaptation for
Special Needs: When students are divided into groups, place the nonambulatory students
in the group with only arm movements, or the group doing nonlocomotor
movements.

Movements

1 Some type of locomotor movement or a combination of locomotor movements,
traveling any direction (including turns).
2. Movements of the entire upper body, staying in one place.

3. Any nonlocomotor movement pattern (at least two different types of movements).

4. Movements using only the legs and staying in one place (any level may be chosen
to move in).

5. Movements using only the arms and staying in one place (any level may be
chosen to move in).

6. Locomtor movements and a sound for 1,2, or 3 of those counts; remember the
accent.

7. Any pattern of movements that is stationary, i.e., changing levels, ann/leg
movements.

8. Any change of level(s) other movements may be included.

9. Movements of the arms and locomotor movements

Background for the Dance of Ancient Greece

(All of the following material is paraphrased or quoted from the book, The Dance in Ancient Greece by Lillian Lawler. Chapter I An Introduction to the Greek Dance, pp. 11-27)







91

"No people ever appreciated the dance more than did the ancient Greeks" (p 11). The importance of it is witnessed.by the many times it is mentioned in the literature, with reference given to dancing and dances. Dance held an important place in their religion, their education, and their lives. Pictures in the book show both men and women dancing.

Dance took on a slightly different meaning than it is as we understand it today. The term "orchestra" meant rhythmical movements of many sorts: movements with the feet, the hands, the eyes, as well as the whole body. Many movement areas were considered under the large umbrella of dance. Some of these were: a march or procession, a child's rhythmic game, a ball game, an exhibition of juggling, tumbling or tight rope walking; also, the rhythmical movements of animals, fish, birds, trees, and flowers. The Greeks did not think of dance by itself. They always associated it with music and poetry or verse. Their word "mouslike" included music, poetry, and dance. It was all considered the same art.

We know something about the dance in ancient Greece, but we will never be able to know exactly what the dances were. Some things tell us something about them. The objects found by archaeologists often have dances or things associated with dance on them. What has to be remembered is that what is found on the objects are representations of the ideal of beauty and not necessarily as it really is. Not much is known about the actual steps. What is usually written is written in descriptive terms such as "the itch", "knocking at the door", etc. (p 22). It is very hard to say that some of the folk dances done by the Greeks today have their beginnings in ancient Greece because there is no recording of that. Since exact translations are not possible, it is hard to make inferences from different words used with dance. "... for we shall never, in all probability, be able to reproduce any ancient dance in its entirety." (p 27).

Some of the words associated with dance and their approximate meanings are as follows:

Schema denoting form, shape, appearance, figure, manner. A way of doing something (p 25)

Phora "carriage"; may be the feet, hands, or whole body. It may be a combination of our word step and movement. It would include such movements as walking, running, leaping, twisting, or bending (p 26).

Deixis to show or portray; to portray mythical characters (p 26).

Cheironomia "gesture" (p 27).















APPENDIX D
DARTS LESSON

Title: El Pajaro Cu (the Cu Bird)

Objectives:
Social studies:
0 To recognize similarities between him/herself and others

Language arts:
to develop understanding of word meanings
to develop ability to interpret creatively
to develop the ability to listen for a purpose
to develop understanding of characters
to develop understanding of conflict and resolution
to develop ability to make predictions.

Drama:
to develop improvisational and pantomime skills
to present ideas in a dramatic form
to develop self-confidence and a positive image

Grade Level: 2-3, ESOL

Materials: Book El Pajaro Cu by Marjorie E. Herrman. National Textbook Company
Lincolnwood, Ill, 1983. The book contains both the Spanish and English
version of the tale.

Background: Every culture has its own folktales that are special because they belong to
the people. Some are written down while others are merely told.
Sometimes folktales are so old that no one can remember who first told them. The story of the Cu bird belongs to the Mexican-American people
of Texas and was first told a long time ago in northern Mexico.

Procedure: 1 Invite students to brainstorm the various kinds of birds. Write them on
the board. Encourage students to make up a distinctive sound and
movement for each of the birds. (count to three then say the name of
each of the birds while students make their"calls") Discuss the unique
sounds of each bird and ask:
"What might the birds be saying?" "How would their call be different if they were in danger?"

92







93

"What other ways might the birds communicate?"
2. Introduce the story to the class by reading up to page 13
3. Introduce the visual art component of the lesson.

Objective: The students will create their own "Cu bird" by assembling and gluing
articles on a flat surface. (collage)

Materials: A large bird cut from tagboard. Size should be aprox.20 feet.These are
prepared by the teacher(s) before the lesson. Each group of three students
will be given one cutout model of the Cu bird.

Scissors, glue, markers, college materials (feathers, glitter, magazines to
cut upcolored construction paper.

Procedure: I Demonstrate how to use colored construction paper to fold and cut
into three-dimensional forms.(fringe, pleat, curl, twist etc.)

2. Using the model bird demonstrate how some of these forms might aid
them in creating feathers for the Cu bird.

3. Divide the class into groups of three. Distribute scissors, glue and
collage materials to each group. Give each group its own tagboard Cu
bird model

4. Allow groups enough time to create the plumage on their own Cu bird
models.

5. After cleaning up, display each group's finished product for
discussion.

6. Continue to read the story to the end of the book. Discuss the
definition of the words vain, eleRant, dishonor, and traitor citing
examples that reinforce the meaning.

7. Introduce the music/dance component.

Objectives: MUSIC Students will create a song with original lyrics.
DANCE Student will learn dance steps to accompany their song
Materials: Piano or taped music of song melody, chart of dance steps, blank chart
paper

Procedure: 1. Review list of names of birds (on board)

2. Teach by rote the sample stanza of the song: Oh the (cardinal), oh the (cardinal) Oh the (cardinal) is a mighty fine bird. (With his feathers so red and his beak so fat)







94

Oh the (cardinal) is a mighty fine bird.

3. Have the students together with the teacher compose more stanzas of
the song using different bird names and characteristics. Record on
chart paper.

4. Teach the dance steps that accompany the song:
Part A ( performed with the first two lines) Knee bends on the beat Part B (performed with third line)
Step, step, step, kick(to the right) Step, step, step, kick(to the left) Part C (performed with last line)
Step, turn step,(to the right) knee bend Step, turn, step,(to the left) knee bend
5. Perform the completed song and dance together.

Elaboration: As a group pick three or four words from the story to learn in Spanish.
Read Leo Lioni's Tico and the Golden Wings. Compare and contrast the
two books.




Full Text
19
Nevertheless, arts advocacy progressed. By 1994 the Music Educators
National.Conference (MENC) as the contracting agency published a description and
standards of the school music program that defined quality music programs as providing
daily instruction to each student in kindergarten through sixth grade. The
recommendation was that this instruction was best provided by music specialists, but
should be assisted by the classroom teacher who would continue to use music activities
between visits from the specialist. MENC further recommended that each child from
kindergarten through third grade have music experiences in school for a total of no less
than 100 minutes a week and that children in grades four through six have no less
thanl 50 minutes of music per week. A quality program would provide 150 minutes of
music per week in kindergarten through third grade and 200 minutes in grades four
through six (National standards for arts education 1994). The obvious implication was
that classroom teachers, as well as specialists, needed to be effective in providing music
experiences in the elementary grades.
These were the first of a set of national voluntary curriculum standards for what
children should know and be able to do in dance, music, theater, and visual art, and the
standards were presented to the Secretary of Education. They were passed by Congress
and signed by President William J. Clinton in March 1994. These standards are
significant in that they not only expect students to create and perform in the arts, but to
understand the entire body of work that comprises our intellectual and cultural heritage
(Williams 1995). Since these standards, both national and state, represent a profession
wide consensus, they have a greater impact on school administrators, school board
members, and other interested persons (Hoffer 1994). Still, it remains doubtful how


Table A-l. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1975
Funds % of Positions
($) Total and Services Provided Results
ESEA
88,437
44 1
Project Director
1
Curriculum Writer/Evaluator
.5
Secretary
4.5
FTE Teacher Assistants
P/T Research Field Team
Consultants
Instructional
Supplies/Equipment
Administrative Travel
Fixed Charges
MCPS Funds
123,913 56 8 Arts Team Members
Inst. Travel
Office Supplies
Telephone
Fixed Charges
96,557
1,000
600
800
14.966
113,923
2 arts teams trained
12 pilot schools served (105 teachers
trained)
2,992 students involved in
demonstration classes twice
monthly
First formal instruction in dance-
drama, K-3
Summer in-service course, EL-16,
taught by arts teams (32 teachers)
3 countrywide workshops presented to
art, music, and PE specialists
Designed staff development program
Collected arts activities for bank
Teacher assistants trained
Monthly workshops held centrally for
all participating teachers
202,360 Fiscal Year 1975 Total
75


APPENDIX C:
CURRICULUM RESOURCE PACKAGE
Introduction
The lessons in this guide have been designed for use with the sixth grade social
studies unit on Greece. The teacher will also find that some lessons will also serve to
meet such reading/language arts objectives as developing the ability to read narration for
a purpose, developing the ability to interpret creatively, and developing an understanding
that myths reflect the culture that engenders them.
It is intended that this guide will not only provide students with an opportunity to
learn about ancient Greece but to explore some of the ways in which ancient Greece has
contributed to our modem civilization.
Contributors to this guide are: Elizabeth Adams, Marian DiJulio, Lillian Hasko,
Janis Jones, Nancy Kirsch, Ruth Kline, Nancy Kessler, Esther Lakner, Jane Lynn, Diane
Pokras, and Elizabeth Segal. Provided by the Interrelated ARTS Program; Eoline
Kukuk, Coordinator.
Sample Lessons
Lesson 1
Title: Ancient Greek Animal Dances (dance/movement)
Objectives: To identify cultural characteristics evidenced in the life of the ancient
Greeks (Social Studies Objective C606.02)
To study the animal dances of ancient Greece
81


90
4/4 time is a time signature commonly used in music and dance in the
United States. How did moving in 7/8 time affect your movements? In
what ways were your movements different, the same? Use adjectives to
describe some of your movements. For example: smooth arms, light
steps, etc.
Extension: Video tape the students executing the movements in their own separate
groups and then in the one large group. What differences are evident?
(It should appear that the students are doing completely different
movements. The interesting aspect of observing the group as a whole is
to observe how the movements relate to one another).
Adaptation for
Special Needs: When students are divided into groups, place the nonambulatory students
in the group with only arm movements, or the group doing nonlocomotor
movements.
Movements
1. Some type of locomotor movement or a combination of locomotor movements,
traveling any direction (including turns).
2. Movements of the entire upper body, staying in one place.
3. Any nonlocomotor movement pattern (at least two different types of movements).
4. Movements using only the legs and staying in one place (any level may be chosen
to move in).
5. Movements using only the arms and staying in one place (any level may be
chosen to move in).
6. Locomtor movements and a sound for 1,2, or 3 of those counts; remember the
accent.
7. Any pattern of movements that is stationary, i.e., changing levels, arm/leg
movements.
8. Any change of level(s) other movements may be included.
9. Movements of the arms and locomotor movements
Background for the Dance of Ancient Greece
(All of the following material is paraphrased or quoted from the book, The Dance in
Ancient Greece by Lillian Lawler. Chapter I An Introduction to the Greek Dance, pp.
11-27)


97
Cornett, C. E. (1999). The arts as meaning makers. Columbus, OH: Merrill Prentice-
Hall.
Costa-Giomi, E., Price, H. E., Raucher, F. H., Schmidt, J., Shackford, M., Sims, W., and
Wilcox, E. (1999). Straight talk about music and research. Teaching Music, 7(3)
29-34.
Council of Arts Accrediting Associations. (1944, March, 1). Briefing paper.
Dean, J., and Gross, I. (1992). Teaching basic skills through art and music. Phi Delta
Kappan, 73(4), 613-618.
Edson, C. H. (1990). Our past and present: Historical inquiry in education. In R. Sherman
and B. Odman (Eds.), Qualitative research in education: Focus and methods.
London: Falmer Press.
Eisner, E. (1978). The impoverished mind. Educational Leadership, 35(8), 591-95.
Eisner, E. W. (1992). The misunderstood role of the arts in human development. Phi
Delta Kappan, 73(8), 591-595.
Efland, A. (1990). A history of art education: Intellectual and social currents in teaching
the visual arts. New York: Teachers College Press.
Ellsworth, J. B. (2000) Surviving change: A survey of educational change models.
Syracuse, N.Y: ERIC Clearinghouse on Information and Technology (ED number
pending, IR030063).
Ely, M., Vinz, R., Downing, M., and Anzul, M. (1997). On writing qualitative research:
Living by words. London: Falmer Press.
Fink, Dean. (2000). Good schools real schools. New York: Teachers College Press.
Fleming, J. (1953). The determination of musical experiences designed to develop the
musical competencies required of elementary schools in Maryland. Journal of
Research in Music Education, 7(1), 59-66.
Flinders, D. J. (1993). From theory and concepts to educational connoisseurship. In D. J.
Flinders and G. E. Mills (Eds.), Theory and concepts in qualitative research:
Perspectives from the field. New York: Teachers College Press.
Fowler, C. (1979). On education. High Fidelity and Music of America, 29(12), 8-9.
Fowler, C. (1988). Toward a democratic art: A reconstructivist view of music education.
In T. Gates (Ed.), Music Education in the United States: Contemporary Issues.
Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press.


83
Some animals could be domesticated.
Some animals could furnish pleasure to people.
Some animals were thought to be sacred and were worshiped and
protected.
Some animals were used as sacrifices to the gods.
Share the following list of animals for which there is evidence that they
were depicted in ancient Greek animal dances:
bull and cow bear
snake lion
fish wolf
birds deer
rooster, owl, swallow, fox
stork, nightingale, goat
raven, eagle, hawk horse
griffin donkey
lizard ram
pig or boar panther
Discuss and list with the students the various movements, which each
animal makes. Ask how these movements could be exaggerated.
Example: Bird swooping, flapping, strutting, turning, cocking head,
jumping
Have the students take their self space and try several of the
movement words for the different animals. Use a rhythm instrument
and provide a definite number of counts for each movement. For
example:
Try swooping up and down in any direction while I play the
tambourine for ten counts. End on count ten in a bird shape. Try
it again, but make your movements twice as large. Now try it in
slow motion.
After exploring many of the animals movements with the class, have
the students select the animals, which they would like to describe in
mask and movement. Small groups will most likely evolve. Subgroups
of serious or funny animal mummery could be formed.
Provide time for students to decide and practice:
which movements they will do,
how many counts they will need for their movements,
which rhythm instruments to use for accompaniment, (the dancers
could use an instrument themselves or they could have another
student provide the sounds)
whether they will move as a small group or as individuals.


22
The attitude data were gathered through video-tape interaction analysis, semantic
differentials, and Likert scales. Neither the teacher training nor in-service components
were described (Trupia 1978).
A program that seemed most similar to Montgomery County Project ARTS was
the Arts in Education Program in Jefferson County, Colorado (JEFFCO). Beginning in
1971, JEFFCO was a three-year program created for grades kindergarten through 12 with
objectives to enhance instruction in basic studies with interdisciplinary arts-related
activities. The program included an innovative staff development program charged with
developing strategies for incorporating the arts into basic curriculum using an
interdisciplinary approach. The JEFFCO Program was designed to function as an in-
service training project. Principals, teachers, and curriculum coordinators participated in
workshops and individual study to learn arts skills and methods of applying them in
classrooms. Classroom teachers and arts specialists attended workshops after school
hours and on weekends. Teachers were given released time, graduate level college credit,
and credit for advancement on the salary scale. The workshops covered all of the subject
areas at all grade levels. Funding was provided by the J.D. Rockefeller 3rd Foundation,
The Alliance for Arts Education, The National Committee of Arts for the Handicapped,
and CEMRELs Aesthetic Education Learning Center Program, along with joint funding
by the John F. Kennedy Center of Performing Arts and the Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare (Allison 1978).
A program, begun in 1979 and existing for three years in the District of Columbia
public school system, was located at the Region C Education Center at Bunker Hill in
Washington DC. Although no outside sources provided funding in the first year, funding
through Title IV began in the 1980-81 school year. The program was modeled on the


Objective:
Materials:
Procedure:
Objectives:
Materials:
Procedure:
93
What other ways might the birds communicate?
2. Introduce the story to the class by reading up to page 13
3. Introduce the visual art component of the lesson.
The students will create their own Cu bird by assembling and gluing
articles on a flat surface.(collage)
A large bird cut from tagboard. Size should be aprox.2x3 feet.These are
prepared by the teacher(s) before the lesson. Each group of three students
will be given one cutout model of the Cu bird.
Scissors, glue, markers, college materials (feathers, glitter, magazines to
cut up,colored construction paper.
1. Demonstrate how to use colored construction paper to fold and cut
into three-dimensional forms.(fringe, pleat, curl, twist etc.)
2. Using the model bird demonstrate how some of these forms might aid
them in creating feathers for the Cu bird.
3. Divide the class into groups of three. Distribute scissors, glue and
collage materials to each group Give each group its own tagboard Cu
bird model
4. Allow groups enough time to create the plumage on their own Cu bird
models.
5. After cleaning up, display each groups finished product for
discussion.
6. Continue to read the story to the end of the book. Discuss the
definition of the words vain, elegant, dishonor, and traitor citing
examples that reinforce the meaning.
7. Introduce the music/dance component.
MUSIC Students will create a song with original lyrics.
DANCE Student will learn dance steps to accompany their song
Piano or taped music of song melody, chart of dance steps, blank chart
paper
1. Review list of names of birds (on board)
2. Teach by rote the sample stanza of the song:
Oh the (cardinal), oh the (cardinal)
Oh the (cardinal) is a mighty fine bird.
(With his feathers so red and his beak so fat)


15
In the late 1970s and early 1980s, a professor at the Harvard Graduate School of
Education developed a theory of cognitive development. Culminating in the 1993
publication of Frames of Mind, Howard Gardners theories of multiple intelligences
provided a significant impact on arts education. Gardners (1993) theory is based on a
radically different view of the mind that yields a different view of school. It is a
pluralistic view that recognizes many different and discrete facets of cognition and
acknowledges that people have different cognitive strengths and styles. Gardners theory
suggests some obvious linkage with the arts. A focus on the first two areas
(verbal/sequential and quantitative/ mathematical) comprises the greatest part of the
school day. However the five other intelligences (musical, visual/spatial,
physical/kinesthetic, knowledge about self and knowledge about others) may be directly
related to arts instruction. The Galef Institute, a nonprofit organization founded in 1989
by business leader Andrew G. Galef and his wife, draws extensively on Gardners
theories. The Galef Institute focuses on an interdisciplinary curriculum taught by Galef-
trained arts specialists and is used in many socially and economically challenged school
districts throughout the country.
Despite these differing ways of viewing intelligence, a decline in the Scholastic
Aptitude Test scores of high school students in the 1980s resulted in highly publicized
reports concerning weaknesses in American education. The best known of these, A
Nation at Risk (National Commission on Excellence in Education 1983), declared that
the lack of academic rigor in schools should be corrected by more demanding academic
requirements. In response, many states increased the number of courses required for
high school graduation and, in turn, reduced the number of electives offered. The arts
were considered at the bottom of a list of desirable subjects and were linked with


55
The science specialists and ARTS team members met during regularly scheduled
staff meeting times to develop the lessons. Each Interrelated ARTS team member was
responsible for teaching several Center School offerings each month as well as following
the regular classroom teaching schedule.
Developing Arts and Reading Teaching Strategies (DARTS')
This was a program that was conceived by two ARTS team members in 1982.
One was a visual art specialist and the other a specialist in music. These teachers went to
New York City for several days and observed seven different elementary schools in order
to observe and learn about the Learning to Read Through the Arts program that had been
developed by Bernadette OBrian. On their return, they met with the Montgomery
County Title I staff to develop a model. Since there was sufficient funding from the
Connecticut Park Center School to provide bus transportation for students, one entire
second grade from each selected Title I School was brought to the center for one school
day. The students met in the multi purpose room in the morning for arts lessons
developed around a second grade level book. Frequently there were two or more art
forms used for these lessons. After lunch the students worked with the Title I teacher on
writing, vocabulary, and other language arts skills that related to the same book. The
classroom teachers were there as well so they could follow up on what their students had
done. The ARTS team members soon developed and taught many lessons on various
books in all of the art forms. DARTS classes were held approximately twice a month and
were very popular with both students and teachers. Several of these lessons may be found
in Appendix D.
When Ruth and I got back (from New York), we got together with the Title I staff
and developed a model where we would choose a book on a second grade level,
present arts lessons on the book, and the Title I teacher in the area would have the


PROJECT ARTS/INTERRELATED ARTS FROM 1973 TO 1995:
A SUCCESSFUL PROGRAM FOR ARTS IN GENERAL EDUCATION
THERES MORE THAN ONE WAY TO MAKE AN A
By
ELIZABETH ADAMS
A DISSERTATION PRESENTED TO THE GRADUATE SCHOOL
OF THE UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT
OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA
2002


8
populations, establishing a program for gifted and talented students, and moving the
focus to middle schools). Others were the result of diminishing funding for arts-related
programs as computers became more visible in the schools.
A variety of inservice courses may be taken in Montgomery County for
recertification or for masters equivalency. Consequently, the arts teams taught an
inservice course for teachers, principals, and specialists. The course was then designated
as required for a teacher to receive full service from the arts team. Full service consisted
of the teacher working one-on-one with one of each of the four arts specialists for a total
of four semesters.
Limitations
The original program was designed for a particular time and geographic location.
Although the findings of the present study are therefore relevant to a specific time and
place, many aspects of the program (such as teacher in-service or procuring of funds)
may be adapted by other populations. The validity and reliability of qualitative data do
not need to meet the rigor of precision associated with quantitative data (Phelps, Ferrara,
and Goolsby 1993). Methods of data collection in this study include observation,
interview, and record review. These methods involve subjective analysis. Therefore,
findings are subject to the limitations common to all qualitative data.
Delimitations built in to the design of this study include the fact that it is specific
to one program that existed in one school system during one time period. An additional
delimitation is the fact that no evaluations were made that concerned student
achievement, although evaluations of student achievement in other programs are
reported.


56
kids in the same afternoon to work on writing, vocabulary, etc. that related to the
same book. We were able to get money for busses to bring a grade level from a
Title I school for an entire day at Connecticut Park. Of course the classroom
teachers were there too so they were able to follow up on what the kids had done.
We developed a lot of lessons on books in various art forms, and pretty soon all
of the ARTS team members were designing and teaching lessons for DARTS. We
did this approximately twice a month, and it was really popular with both the kids
and the teachers. (Jan Jones, music specialist)
Time for Artistic and Performing Experiences for Talented and Ready Youngsters
(TAPESTRY)
In the early 1980s, Montgomery County Schools began to put a great deal of time
and money into programs for students who had been labeled as academically gifted and
talented. This was largely at the instigation of parents who had been expressing a desire
for programs of this sort. The schools used standardized test scores and teacher
observation to identify which students should be placed into accelerated learning
situations. In the spring of 1984, the coordinator of the Gifted and Talented Department
met with the coordinator for Interrelated ARTS to plan a program for those students who
were identified as gifted in one or more art form. The Office of Program Development
provided funds for summer employment so that arts teachers and coordinators could
write the criteria and testing items for identification of gifted youngsters. The teachers
and coordinators relied on Renzullis (1982) conception of giftedness (ability, task
commitment, and creativity) as a guideline for preparing the test items.
In the fall of 1984, six schools were selected to pilot the program. The music and
arts specialists in the selected schools administered the tests for these arts forms, and
dance and drama teachers from Interrelated ARTS administered the tests for their art
forms. The students who were identified as gifted were taken out of their classes for
special instruction for a one-hour period each week. If a student showed talent in more
than one art form, he or she had to choose one in which to receive special instruction.


49
being in their classrooms, and work there proved to be a difficult experience for almost
all concerned.
Our going to special education centers had to do with laws passed at the time.
The special ed. centers had no music and art teachers at all. Mark Twain proved
to be very difficult. The kids were difficult, not used to anyone coming in. The
teachers were not consulted and in some instances were hostile. We only had one
team member who had qualifications and experience with special ed. Yet we all
were expected to do it. (Jane Papish, drama teacher).
In 1979 investigators from the Arts in Education for Handicapped Project visited
Montgomery County Public Schools programs including the Interrelated ARTS program.
In the final report of this project, Appell (1979), indicated that since Montgomery
County has so many innovative programs such as Interrelated ARTS, interest in the Arts
Education for the Handicapped Project was not very high.
Interrelated ARTS
Now that project ARTS was no longer receiving Federal funding, the coordinator
of the program and the head of the Department of Aesthetic Education thought that it
would be appropriate to change its name. At the beginning of the school year in 1977,
Project ARTS became known as Interrelated ARTS. The program lost funding for the
curriculum coordinator, the community resource coordinator, and the classroom aides
who assisted teachers in participating schools. Losing the aides made it much more
difficult for ARTS team members to confer with classroom teachers during the school
day, so the conferences had to take place after school or by telephone in the evenings.
The Interrelated ARTS teacher in-service program continued to be offered one
evening a week, and because the program was now financially supported by the school
system, the ARTS team members who taught the course received a stipend. Prior to this


102
Vigneault, M., May, G., and Johnson, R. (1978). Points of view: The arts in general
education Music Educators Journal, 64(9), 47.
Wenner, G. C. (1976). Arts in the mainstream of education. Music Educators Journal,
62(8), 28-36.
Wenner, G. C. (1978). Arts in general education: A multifaceted concept. Music
Educators Journal, 64(5), 28.
Williams, H. M. (1995). Dont ignore the arts. USA Today, 124 (Sept).
Wykell, A. (1996, Winter, Spring). Integration, infusion, interdisciplinary. ACE/FAAE,
Arts for a Complete Education/Florida Alliance for Arts Education, 5(10), 4.


23
Interrelated ARTS program in Montgomery County. The DC program began with a part-
time project director and five arts team members, two in drama, and one each in the other
art-forms. The teachers who participated in the program took an in-service course and
received demonstration lessons in their classrooms. Those who completed the in-service
course received either college or recertification credit. An evaluation model
implemented by the Division of Quality Assurance of the DC Public Schools, (1982)
required Arts team members to administer tests to a sample of 271 students. Significant t
scores suggested that students performed better following the program (Department of
Health, Education, and Welfare, National Institute of Education 1982)
Another program, developed in New York City, Learning Through an Expanded
Arts Program (LEAP), was developed by a non-profit educational organization and
served over 400,000 students. In this program, 85 consultants and many professional
artists and musicians worked with classroom teachers from kindergarten to grade eight,
teaching language arts, math skills, and other academic subjects through a variety of
modalities. Standard evaluations of LEAP in a typical district showed that the program
was quite successful. Of the students participating in the basic program, 93.4% developed
a better understanding of the subject matter, and 97% of the teachers said that they would
repeat the arts programs that were developed by the professional artists and musicians
(Dean and Gross 1992).
Aaron (1994) described music teachers use of production, perception, and
reflection activities in a program suggested by educational psychologist Jean Piaget. Arts
PROPEL, a high school arts program, was designed and implemented by Harvard Project
Zero, the Educational Testing Service, and the Pittsburgh Public School System. It
includes production (PRO), perception (PE) and reflection. The focus was on two


43
well as rhythm and Orff instruments. Team members also needed meeting space for
planning and record keeping, telephone access for contacting schools, and storage space
for curriculum resource packages.
In the third year 19 schools in grades K-6 were receiving service on a regular
basis, and the staff was expanded to include a community resource coordinator,
Marthalie Furber, whose job was to promote the value of the arts in education within the
entire school community. Additional funding was received for the 1976-77 school year
from the Office of Education/Arts Education Program under Section 409, Title IV, Public
Law 93-380, Elementary and Secondary Education in the Arts Programs, and from the
National Committee, Arts for the Handicapped. The Project ARTS staff conducted
workshops for elementary school principals in each administrative area, teacher
specialists in language arts and reading, and interested parents. This was the third and
final year for the program to receive funds from Title III. The goal of designing and
implementing a self-renewing system to initiate and support an arts program in grades
K-6 had been both refined and expanded during this period. The two major activities
stated in the grant proposal that would assist the program in becoming supported mainly
by Montgomery County were administrative workshops and curriculum resource package
development
Workshops
Workshops were coplanned and conducted by the Project ARTS teams, the
coordinators of the Division of Aesthetic Education, and well-known arts education
consultants. In October 1976, a half- day workshop was presented for 25 high level
administrators of Montgomery County Public Schools. Murray Sidlin, resident


99
Heller, G. N. (1985). On the meaning and value of historical research in music education.
Journal of Research in Music Education, 55(4), 4-6.
Heller, G. N., and Wilson B. D (1992). Historical research. In R. Colwell (Ed.),
Handbook of research on music teaching and learning. New York: Schirmer
Books.
Hoffer, C. R. (1986). Standards in music education. What are they? Why are they
important? Music Educators Journal, 72(May), 50-51
Hoffer, C.R. (1993). Introduction to music education. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth
Publishing Company.
Kaagan, S. (1998). Arts education: Schooling with imagination, Principal 77(4), 16-19.
Karel, L. C. (1966). Teacher education in the related arts. Music Educators Journal,
55(2), 38-43.
Kiester, G. J. (1985). Total education: Arts balance the analytical with the aesthetic.
Music Educators Journal, 75(2). 24-8.
King, A.R., and Brownell, J. A. (1966). The curriculum and the discipline of knowledge:
A theory of curriculum practice. New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Klimpton, J. (1985). Public education and the arts: Linked by necessity. Reston, VA:
Music Educators National Conference (MENC).
Kukuk, E. (1977). Evaluation report. ESEA Title III Project ARTS. Montgomery County
Public Schools. Montgomery County, MD.
Larson, S. (1995). Integrated music and improvisation: Teaching musicianship and
theory through menus, maps, and models. College Music Symposium, 55,76-90.
Lee, R. T. (1985). Expanding the role of the arts in education. Music Educators Journal,
72(2), 28-31
Leng, X., and Shaw, G. L. (1991). Toward a neural theory of higher brain function using
music as a window Concepts in Neuroscience, 2,229.
Lichtenstein, G., McLaughlin, M., and Knudsen, J. (1991). Teacher empowerment and
professional knowledge. Stanford, CA: Stanford University, Center for
Educational Policy Research.
Lindsay, P. J. (1978). Points of view: the arts in general educatioa Music Educators
Journal, 64(9), 45.


16
vocational education (Hoffer 1993). Elementary school teachers saw themselves as
responsible for covering a years work with a class, and their education programs tended
to reinforce this view. Goodlad (1980) suggested that if (as is frequently the case) the
malfunctioning culture of school begs attention, the same culture rarely encourages and
supports what is needed to change.
Concern with back to basics of the 1980s continued to be a difficult problem
for arts educators and their supporters to ignore. The prescription of the philosophy
consisted of more math, science, and homework, fewer frill courses, and increased
discipline (Klimpton 1985).
Fowler (1988) was concerned with rescuing the arts for Americas children.
The near universal lack of sufficient arts in the preparation of classroom teachers
is historic practice bordering on scandal. .. Given the pressures for achievement
in reading, mathematics, and other subjects in the compulsory curriculum,
classroom teachers simply do not value the arts sufficiently enough to give them
priority attention. Too many education administrators and school boards seem
quite content to look the other way. They dump the full responsibility for art
instruction on classroom teachers in spite of their inadequacies, and they quite
consistently fail to understand the indispensable role of the arts specialists in
assuring that this responsibility is realized (Fowler 1988, p 154).
In an address given on September 16,1988 at the Montgomery County Board of
Education retreat, Ann Richardson said that much of what is presently described in
curricula for schools falls into narrow academic guidelines. Very little in teaching is
concerned with interpretation, transformation, synthesis or new ideas (Richardson 1988).
Changing Trends
Toward the end of the 1980s, immense acceleration in the growth of knowledge
and significant advances in technology prompted a growing recognition that education
must be more than the mere acquisition of facts. No one denied that verbal and
mathematical skills are basic. No one argued that children must be taught to read and to


82
Grade level:
Time required:
Materials:
Background:
Procedure:
To develop movement sequences which illustrate solemn or humorous
animal dances
To create a mask which depicts an animal
6
Two 45-minute periods
Rhythm instruments drum, cymbals, tambourines, etc.
The Dance in Ancient Greece, by Lillian B. Lawler, Wesleyan
University Press, Middletown, CT., 1964 (in package)
Materials for making masks paper plates, yam, markers, crayons, hole
punch
The actual dances of the ancient Greeks can only be imagined and
pieced together from their writings and their art. We do know that they
developed many different kinds of dances and that one very important
type was the animal dances.
Many ancient people, including the Greeks, noticed that some animals
seem to actually dance. Apes, elephants, cat animals, dolphins, birds,
bees, and bears are some of the animals which have been observed
doing dancelike movements when they are in the wild state. Depending
on the animal, these movements occur as a solo, a pair, or a group.
In addition, early people were very aware of the importance of animals
and how vital they were to survival. Therefore, the characteristics and
movements of animals were often expressed in the dances created by
people.
Very early animal dances were usually performed in a serious and often
ritualistic manner. However, after many centuries, the animal dances
changed into the form of entertainment called mummery. The animal
mummery of the ancient Greeks was pantomimed by performers who
often wore masks of the animals they were imitating.
Share the background information about the ancient Greek animal
dances.
Discuss and record the students speculations about the importance of
animals to ancient people. For example:
Animals furnished people with food and clothing.
Animals could be dangerous to people.


5
Growth of Montgomery County
Montgomery County, Maryland was largely a farming county until after the Civil
War when the farmland character of the county slowly changed to suburban. The first
countywide educational system was established in 1860. By 1920, 80% of the county was
still used for dairy farming. As the nations capital grew, so did the surrounding
community, and with this growth came the need for planning and control. Soon, federal
employees and professionals were seeking residences outside of Washington DC, but
within easy commuting distance.
The period between the two world wars brought dramatic increases in population
as federal government agencies expanded into the county. These agencies included the
Naval Medical Center, Taylor Naval Research and Development Center, the National
Institutes of Health, and Walter Reed Hospital. By the beginning of 1941, there were
167, 063 white students and 2,044 black students in the Montgomery County Public
School System. In the next 50 years the population expanded to 10 times this number.
By the end of the twentieth century, approximately 850,000 people lived in Montgomery
County. The county became a prosperous suburb of the District of Columbia, and also the
home of many high technological and biotechnological industries as well as expanded
Federal agencies such as the Department of Energy and the National Bureau of Standards
(Sween 1984).
By the early 1950s, the annual budget of Montgomery County Public Schools
(MCPS) had passed $20 million, with some 40,000 students attending schools there.
Throughout the 1950s, the school population grew by about 5,000 students a year, and
the county built 50 new elementary schools and rebuilt or enlarged several others.
During the same period, MCPS opened eight large high schools and a dozen junior highs.


100
Madsen, C. K., and Madsen, C. H., Jr. (1970). Experimental research in music. Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Miller, S. I., and Fredericks, M. L. (1994). Qualitative Research Methods. New York:
Peter Lang.
Murphy, J., and Jones, L. (1976). Making connections during the middle learning years
(1990).. Washington, DC: Research in Arts Education, U.S. Department of
Health, Education, and Welfare.
National Commission on Excellence in Education. (1983, April). A nation at risk: The
imperative for educational reform. A report to the Nation and the Secretary of
Education, United States department of Education, Washington, DC.
National Standards for Arts Education. (1994). Music Educators National Conference,
Reston, Va.
Oddleifson, E. (1991) The case for the arts. Context, 47, 37-46.
Office of Community and Secondary Education. (1981). An approaach to learning
through the arts: Final report [Brochure]. Washington, DC: Elementary and
Secondary Education Act Title IV-C.
Office of Education. (1977). Project ARTS Final Report: Arts education program grant.
Section 409 Title IV Public Law 93-380 ESEA Title III Montgomery County
Public Schools.
Persichette, K. (1999). A change theory for schools: Some basic principles. A
presentation for the 1999 SITE International Conference, San Antonio, TX.
Phelps, R. P., Ferrara, L., and Goolsby, T. (1993). A guide to research in music
education. Landham, MD: Scarecrow Press.
Raucher, F. H., Shaw, G. L., Levine, L. J., Wright, E. L., Dennis, W.R., and Newcomb,
R. L. (1997). Music training causes long-term enhancement of preschool
childrens reasoning. Neurological Research, 19, 2-8.
Reimer, B. (1989). A philosophy of music education. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-
Hall.
Remer, J. (1996). Beyond enrichment: Building effective arts partnerships with schools
and your community. New York: American Council for the Arts.
Renzulli, J., Smith, L., and Reis, S. (1982). Curriculum compacting: An essential strategy
for working with gifted students. Elementary School Journal, 82, 185-94.


CHAPTER 4
PROGRAM HISTORY
This chapter provides a historical analysis as well as an overview of the program
and its various components. It is important to recognize that, while presented
sequentially, many of these events occurred concurrently.
Project ARTS: The Beginning
In 1973 the elementary art and music programs were the joint responsibility of
special art and music specialists and of classroom teachers. However, not all children (in
fact not even all schools) were being served by special teachers in the arts. Following
discussions between the citizens group and Board of Education members, the board
appointed a Task Force on the Arts to study the arts program.
One of the recommendations of the Task Force was that an intensive staff
development effort in the arts be instituted to assist classroom teachers in implementing
arts, arts-related, and integrated arts experiences in their classrooms. It was further
recommended that dance and drama become an integral part of the arts program in the
elementary school.
Even though Montgomery County was one of the richer counties in the nation,
the assistant director of Curriculum and Instruction decided to submit a plan to ESEA,
Title III asking for funds to help implement a plan to improve arts education. The
assistant director asked Janet Brome, who was at that time a Teacher Specialist for Media
Studies in the same department, to write a grant proposal requesting funding from the
39


CHAPTER 5
FINDINGS
In the 1970s many arts-in-general-education programs were funded both by the
Federal Government and by local governments. Most of these programs lasted between 3
and 5 years. Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS in Montgomery County, Maryland was a
program that was funded by both the federal government and the county government and
lasted for 22 years.
In reviewing data, in Chapter 4 the major themes that emerged were factors
related to the longevity, the quality and feasibility of the program This chapter examines
answers to the questions posed in Chapter 1. These are conceptualized as questions
regarding longevity, quality, and feasibility. While in practice, such factors are woven
parts of a whole, each of these is discussed separately and explored vis a vis the model
program described. Table 2 describes that model by use of a chart. Implicit in this are
recommendations for implementing such a program.
Table 2. Model for Implementation
Longevity Quality Feasibility
Meet needs of various
populations
Meet needs ov classroom
teachers
Address academic
curriculum
Arts and academic
curriculum receive equal
emphasis
Continuation of funding
Visibility to parents,
school board members,
others


59
The coordinator became coordinator of Visual Art for Montgomery County
Public Schools, and the remaining ARTS team members returned to elementary
classroom teaching.


48
In 1976 ARTS team members began serving teachers in three learning centers for
students who needed more help than they could receive in a special classroom.
Montgomery County has three such elementary schools, one middle school, and one high
school. None of these schools had music or art specialists, so the instruction that students
had received in the arts had been minimal. Working in these schools presented a new
challenge because only one of the 12 team members had received any training or
experience in special education. It was not required for classroom teachers in these
schools to take the in-service course taught by ARTS team members, so both classroom
teachers and ARTS team members were often in uncharted territory. ARTS team
members quickly realized that to plan and teach lessons in these schools required a closer
working relationship with the classroom teachers. Such relationships were successfully
formed among many classroom teachers and ARTS team members. The State of
Maryland began requiring three credit hours in Special Education for certification, so
within three years all of the ARTS team members had received some course work in this
field. Most, but not all of the work in special learning centers, was successful. One
learning center, Mark Twain Junior High School, was for emotionally disturbed
adolescents. In 1979 a branch of this school was created and was known as Samuel
Clemens. This part of Mark Twain School was designated for students who had been
identified as both emotionally disturbed and academically gifted. The coordinator of the
ARTS teams and the principal of Clemens decided that the ARTS program should work
in this school on a weekly basis. This decision was made without input from either
classroom teachers in the school or ARTS team members. Probably because the
classroom teachers had not been consulted, many seemed to be opposed to the idea.
Samuel Clemens students were not used to anyone other than their classroom teachers


64
what I want done in the school.. .. Teachers are excited about the possibilities
and feel more confident about participating in the arts. (Evaluation Report 1977)
I still remember the lessons that team members taught in my class. I still use a lot
of them. (Carole Blackwell, classroom teacher)
Quality
According to four of the interviewees, a major factor in the success of the
program was the quality of the curriculum-integration it was conceived to achieve.
I think the most important reason the program lasted so long is because we taught
the actual curriculum. Having been a classroom teacher and from talking with
teachers with whom we worked, I know that was the kind of assistance they
wanted. After all, they HAD to teach the required curriculum and there was never
enough time in which to do so. Most of the lessons we left for them fit right in to
what they were working on. (Nancy Harris, dance specialist)
The Council of Arts Accrediting Association (1994) claimed that there are two
major problems with integrated programs. One is the lack of focus and absence of
structures of knowledge (structuring learning to meet curriculum needs). The other is the
territorial claims of specialists in knowledge areas. In order to avoid these problems,
carefully conceived design features are needed in interdisciplinary programs.
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS fits into the co-equal model that was described
by Bresler (1995). Almost all of the ARTS team members had training and experience
both in classroom teaching and in a specific art form. All of the lessons that were
designed and taught by ARTS team members followed a similar format. Each lesson plan
included objectives from both the art form and from the basic curriculum. Montgomery
County Public Schools provided guides containing curriculum content and objectives for
each subject and grade level so that lesson plans could be specifically geared toward
curriculum objectives. Integrated techniques that use the arts within other course work
need to convey the objectives of that course work. The importance of learning in both


85
Grade level:
Time required:
Materials:
Background:
Procedure:
To create body shapes in the style of ancient Greek sculpture and
artifacts.
6
One hour
Books:
The Art of Ancient Greece by Shirley Glubok, Atheneum, NewYork,
1966 (in package)
Greek Athletic Games by Nancy Cole, Metropolitan Museum of Art (for
professional use only) (in package)
Chalkboard and chalk
Drum
Tape: March of the Olympians, U.S. Marine Band, RCA 78.13 (in
package)
The games of ancient Greece occurred in Olympia, Greece, and were
dedicated to the god Zeus. Zeus lived on Mt. Olympus. Only men
played in the games. All events took place outside in a dirt ring or track.
See Greek Athletic Games introduction for further information.
Share the background information with the students. Show pictures of
ancient Greek sculpture representing sporting events such as the discus
thrower, charioteer, boxer, archer, broad jumper, etc. (found in books
listed above in the Materials section)
Ask the students to bring each pose to life for eight counts and then
freeze in their starting position.
Ask the students to form groups of two or three. Each group will select
a sport from those listed on the board. Ask each group to create an eight
count sequence depicting the selected sport. Encourage the students to
use their bodies as objects (i.e., vaulting pole, discus, etc.) and to give
their compositions more interest by varying the amounts of energy, the
levels, and the directions faced.
Share the movement sequences created by bringing the Greek games to
life. Have the groups perform in a classroom arena (as they would
have been performed in ancient Greece).
The tape March of the Olympians may be used to provide background
music for the movements. Ask the students to freeze in a starting
position as the introduction part of the music is played. They will begin
their movement sequences when the march begins.


26
Teacher Effects
Boyle and Thompson (1976) conducted a study at Pennsylvania State University
that changed teachers self-perceptions of their ability to be effective teachers in the arts.
The premise was that self-confidence is essential for successful teaching and that
teachers can gain this confidence through successful creative experience. The study
provided nine sessions in Arts Encounter Workshops over a three-year period for a total
of 22 undergraduate elementary education majors. Participants self-rated, on five point
scales, their perception of how well prepared they felt to teach arts in their classrooms
prior to and at the conclusion of the Arts Encounter Workshops. The McNemar Test for
Significance of Changes indicated that the workshops resulted in significant development
of self-confidence to teach the arts. These findings suggest that such workshop sessions
can bring changes in perception.
Barry (1998) evaluated an arts program in the state of Alabama that developed
and implemented an in-service program for elementary teachers with the hope of
providing recommendations for future programs. In 1998, only 295 arts teachers, mostly
in music, served Alabamas 406,000 students. To provide arts instruction to every student
would have required over 1500 additional teachers. This program, therefore, sought to
acquaint elementary classroom teachers with theories of arts education and specify
examples of arts activities that could be validly integrated with other subjects. An arts
education conference was held in Auburn, Alabama, and teachers who attended (N= 28)
were tested and found to be most interested in arts activities that they could integrate into
their academic curriculum. Several teachers mentioned the value of having met arts and
arts education professionals. Because of the small respondent pool, the data were not
statistically analyzed (Barry 1998).


33
This list is relevant to the present study in several ways, particularly items one,
three, and five. The Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS program may be viewed from
many more perspectives than are presented here.
Procedures/Instrumentation
A decision must be made about how best to collect data for a valid historical
review. The following are important ways for gathering data in a qualitative study:
Interview data produced by a variety of schedules, such as informal and semi
structured.
Historical accounts, including logs, journals, official documents, life histories and
anecdotal reflections. (Miller and Fredericks 1994)
The purpose of this study is to present the history of a program that trained
classroom teachers to use arts strategies in teaching basic skills and to explore some of
the likely reasons for its longevity. To accomplish this purpose, and to remain true to the
principles of qualitative research outlined above, data were collected from several
sources. The primary sources include the following:
Recollections and Records of the Researcher
The investigator was a team member of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS from
1976 to 1993. A good research study requires a knowledge base, as well as theoretical
and methodological competence (Flinders 1993). Ely et al(1997) states that the
researcher belongs in the study, not only as a consciousness that filters the experience,
but as an actor as well.
Interviews
The best evidence in a historical study comes from primary sources; that is,
sources who provide eyewitness testimony of part of the past under consideration(Heller
and Wilson 1992).


70
In order to exist, Project ARTS/ Interrelated ARTS required yearly continuation
of funding. The first three years of funding was provided by a grant from the Federal
Government and matching funds from the Montgomery County Board of Education. At
the end of three years the program was entirely funded by Montgomery County and
continued to be so until the end of the program.
For the program to continue to receive funding it was necessary for it to be as
visible as possible. Parents, School Board members, County Council members,
administrators, and any others who were interested were invited to come into classrooms
to watch ARTS team members work. In addition visitors were invited to the special
classes at the Connecticut Park Center. Montgomery County School photographer, Bill
Mills, was frequently asked to photograph scenes of the ARTS teams in action and these
pictures appeared in The Superintendents Bulletin, a weekly publication that went to all
Montgomery County School Board employees. To attain greater visibility ARTS team
members attended budget hearings as a group and wore identifying badges.
Implications
A major conclusion of this study is that for arts-in-general education programs to
be initiated into public school systems there needs to be a model that combines some, if
not all of the factors that contributed to the success of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.
These factors include
An awareness of current educational trends and emphases combined with the
ability to meet the needs and requirements of a system in mutually supportive
ways (Longevity)
An awareness of teacher needs and plans to most effectively meet those needs
(Longevity)


71
The enlistment of both principals and teachers as enthusiastic supporters in
planning for an arts program including comprehensive in-service instruction for
teachers (Quality)
The participation of teachers and principals who maintain a high degree of
visibility, particularly to those in charge of school funding. This includes inviting
board of education members and other responsible for funding into the
classrooms, to workshops and to meetings where support for arts programs may
be expressed (Feasibility)
Reimer (1980) says that to design an effective arts program a clearly articulated
underlying philosophy is needed. In addition there must be teams of interdisciplinary
arts specialists to identify and develop arts resource materials, offer workshops for
teachers and administrators, coordinate resources and assist classroom teachers. All of
these factors may be found in Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.
To initiate an arts-in-general education program it is first necessary to determine
and clearly articulate the need for such a program. In the case of Project ARTS a small
but vocal group of citizens felt that elementary school students were receiving
insufficient arts instruction time by the specialists assigned to the schools. In addition
there was no instruction provided in dance or drama. The citizens group expressed these
concerns to the Board of Education. To assist in meeting the costs necessary to
implement an arts program, the Board asked a teacher specialist to write a grant
proposal.. This resulted in Montgomery County Public Schools receiving a Federal
government grant for the program which the school system jointly supported.
The ARTS team members were teachers who had background and experience in
classroom teaching as well as in a specific art form. These teachers were familiar with
the elementary curriculum and were able to assist classroom teachers in using arts lesson
that related to it.


73
There are many school systems throughout this country with varying resources,
both financial and cultural. A study of where support for arts programs may be found
(fiscal, cultural, etc.) could be of assistance to those interested in beginning such a
program.
Now that we have National Standards for Arts Education (1994), an arts-in-
general education program should be guided by these standards. The standards should
apply to lessons both for demonstration teaching and for classroom teacher use.. In fact,
the design of any program should include arts standards. A plan for evaluation with
clearly defined objectives based on national standards should be included in the planning
of arts programs.
Schools also have varying needs according to their geographical locations. Big
city school systems have many cultural advantages but may be lacking in community
support. A study of the resources needed in various geographical areas to support both
arts and other academic should be included in the development of a comprehensive
program. .
The gathering of many informed critical evaluations of a program may be more
effective in determining its true value To ensure this, a plan for evaluation with clearly
defined objectives should be included in the design for future projects.


14
1981. Without encouragement of the arts at the Federal level, many states (particularly
those with budget deficits) withdrew their support of arts programs. A Back to Basics
movement in the late 1970s resulted, in the opinion of Efland (1978), in the teaching of
fragmented bits and pieces of knowledge, and was thought to result in a general dumbing
down of schooling. Critics of education suggested that the frills, defined differently by
different people according to their biases, should be sacrificed so that greater time,
money, and effort could be applied to the basics (i.e., reading, writing, and mathematics)
(Turner 1984). Efland (1990) later suggested that educational behaviorists at this time did
not return to the past, but instead imposed a set of technocratic controls on classroom
practices that bored many students and limited the options of teachers, who then had to
primarily teach material covered on standardized tests. Between 1977 and 1987, an
increasing emphasis on tests such as the Standard Achievement Test was believed to
have pushed the arts back to the educational periphery (Fowler 1988). By the end of the
1970s, many of the special programs and projects in the arts, including CEMRAL and the
Arts in Education Program of the JDR 3 rd Fund had ceased to exist.
In 1982, the Illinois Alliance for Arts Education and that states Board of
Education produced a document on arts education that was meant to be part of Illinois
5-year comprehensive arts plan. Along with articles on the importance of arts education
published by Eisner (1978), Broudy (1978), Fowler (1979), and others, Bealmer (1982)
presented descriptions of six arts forms with examples of model programs.
One agency formed in 1982 was the Getty Center for Education in the Arts. Its
main activity was to develop discipline-based visual arts programs in schools. Whether
or not one subscribes to the specific outlines of the discipline-based model, this
organization had a significant effect on the entire field of the arts (Fowler 1988).


CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
During the early 1970s there was a swell of interest in introducing art in general
education programs. The Education Amendments of 1974 provided $750,000 for funds
designed to assist state and local education agencies in integrating the arts into general
education (Rogers 1977). In January 1978, the Music Educators Journal devoted an
entire issue to some of these programs, many of which are described later in this study.
The average length of these programs was from 2 to 5 years. The Project ARTS/
Interrelated ARTS program in the Montgomery County, Maryland schools existed for
over 20 years. This study presents an arts-in-general-education program from inception
to demise.
Purpose
The purpose of this study is to examine a program (Project ARTS/Interrelated
ARTS) that existed for more than 20 years and to analyze the factors that contributed to
its longevity. It is hoped that such an examination will provide guidelines for educators
who wish to replicate, approximate, or support similar programs.
Research Questions
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was a remarkable program that introduced the
arts into general education in Montgomery County, Maryland, from 1973 to 1995. The
program, which endured for 23 years, warrants investigation to determine how and why it
was successful.
1


List of Greek/Latin Roots and Their Meanings
Root
Meaning
Root
Meaning
super
supernatural
urbs
urban
post
post-hypnotic
itis
bronchitis
anti
antisocial
satis
satisfy
pre
predawn
vice
vice principal
inter
intercollegiate
bios
biosattelite
ambi
ambidextrous
faci, factus
manufacture
port
portable
ex, e
exhume
logos
meteorology
dexter
dextral
tele
telephotography
navis
navigate
pro
pro-American
manos
monologue
duco, ductus
aqueduct
aster
asterisk
photos
photoreceptor
pathos
pathetic
in
inaccurate
sub
submarine
demos
demography
graphe
graphite
maturus
maturity
bi
bisect
brevis
brief case
ped
pedal
micros
microwave
trans
transcontinental
lithos
lithology
re
refreeze
bronchosq
bronchitis
contra
contradict
scriptum
scriptwriter
credo
creditable
circle
circular
liber
librarian
Lesson 4
Title: Movement in Sevens (dance/movement)
Objectives: To identify the cultural characteristics evidenced in the life of the ancient
Greeks (Social Studies Objective C606.02)
To create movements in the 7/8 time signature which is characteristic of
Greek music and dance
Grade level: 6
Time required: 45 minutes
Materials: Large laminated chart with a composite of the specific rhythms in 7/8
time (in package)
Nine laminated cards with the specific rhythm and movement guidelines
on each (in package; also see p. 11).
A large open space such as the all-purpose room or gymnasium


To Dr. Phyllis E. Dorman,
Mentor and Friend


86
Extension
Lesson 3
Title:
Objectives:
Grade level:
Time required:
Materials:
Background:
Procedure:
Next, ask each group to select a favorite sport which is part of the
modem Olympic games. Ask the groups to create a new eight count
movement sequence to perform for the class.
Ask the students to compare and contrast the games of today with those
in ancient Greece. Have students identify the sports that were used in
ancient Greece and that are found in modem Olympic games.
The record Give it All Youve Got by Frank Mangione was recorded to
honor the 1980 Olympics. Play the music for the students. Suggest a
modem day sporting event. Have the students identify three different
movements, which interpret the sport. Play the music and have the
students perform the movements. Stop the music, and students freeze.
Repeat the activity with other modem sports.
Have the students develop a list of abilities which one must have to be
good in athletics as well as in dance: discipline, eye-hand/foot
coordination, rhythm, strength, agility, projection, ability to share and
work effectively with a groups, and concentration.
Know Your Roots (dance/movement)
To identify evidence of cultural characteristics from Greece in the
United States today (Social Studies Objective C607.01)
To individually execute movement(s) which represent a specific word
with a Greek or Latin root
6
50 minutes (The lesson may be repeated working with different words).
A set of cards listing roots, prefixes, and suffixes (excerpted from the
Social Studies Instructional Guide. Grade 6, p. 112).
A chalkboard or chart paper.
A stopwatch if a clock with a second hand is not available.
The students should have been introduced to the topic of Greek and
Latin roots and the importance that they have in the English language.
Hold up one of the root cards. Ask the students for a word in which this
root is contained, and then write one of the responses on the board or
chart. Do this for as many of the roots as there are students in the class.
(Make sure that there is an equal number of roots, prefixes, or suffixes


18
Integrating music within other subject areas is advantageous from a broad
educational perspective. Using a subject such as music that evokes many positive
feelings as a means of educating in other areas could well result in a much higher degree
of understanding in those areas.
From a music teaching perspective, I believe there would be much to be gained
by Integrating music with other core subjects. Such integration would not be
difficult and might well solve many of the attitudinal problems teachers encounter
when they try to teach music (Baker 1990, pp 11-18).
Many have also written eloquently of the beneficial effects of interrelating all of
the arts within the general curriculum. It has been noted that when a subject is related to
other aspects of life, student interest and comprehension are enhanced (Lindsay 1978).
Geoghegan (1994) suggested that educators have the capacity and responsibility to work
toward a cross disciplinary approach that will help every child in every school to feel the
tingle of truthful engagement that a holistic approach to education can bring.
Geoghegan (1994) also noted that this approach applies whether through drama, dance,
music, or visual art. Goldberg (1997) also suggested that the arts serve as a strategy for
learning, and that using the arts in this way expands traditional teaching methods into an
imaginative forum for exploration of subject matter. Simply teaching about the arts, then,
can be transformed into opportunities for students to apply their ideas in creative ways
(Goldberg 1997).
Still, difficulties remained. Eisner (1992) noted that prevailing conceptions of the
arts are based on a massive misunderstanding of the role of arts in human development
and in education. There is no more telling indicator of that importance than the time that
is allocated to them. Arts get approximately two hours a week in elementary schools and
are not required at all at the secondary level (Eisner 1992).


61
Recommendations for Program Implementation
The data suggest the following factors as crucial to successful program
replication. It is understood that specific communities should focus more or less energy
on a variety of factors related to these major topics
Longevity
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS began mainly as a teacher-training program for
elementary school teachers and grew over the years as different educational needs
developed. As an entity Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS functioned for 22 years, from
1973 to 1995.
Changes in Focus of Program/Flexibility
The program changed its foci as different emphases were placed on the curricula
in Montgomery County Public Schools. The first change was for ARTS teachers to work
in Special Education Centers. Other emphases included science programs and programs
for the gifted and talented. Since reading had always been a priority in the school
system, The DARTS program was developed. When space and resources became
available to couple the arts with science, mathematics, and computer learning, the
Connecticut Park Center School was begun. TAPESTRY was a logical outgrowth of the
push for special programs for the gifted and talented. In addition to these changes the
program retained its original character and continued with the regular work in elementary
classrooms. Of the 13 people interviewed, nine considered the changing foci as a major
reason for the programs longevity. The following interview excerpts illustrate this
opinion:
Over the years we met different political and educational needs. Our program
went along with national trends and changes and also changed to meet the needs
of Montgomery County Schools. (Jane Papish, Drama specialist)


78
Table A-4. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1978
Funds % of
($) Total Positions and Services Provided Results
ESEA Funds
0
MCPS Funds
259,992
Arts Team
162,015
Summer Per
Diem
8,000
FTE Teacher
Assistants
51,732
Teacher Travel
7,770
Telephone
1,500
Fixed Charges
28.475
259,992
Other Funds
79,000*** 23
30 pilot schools (Level II, III, IV
service) (420 teachers)
10,500 students to be involved in
demonstration teaching
Expanded pilot schools for
handicapped
Will be on call for services for all
MCPS schools 1 week per month
Will conduct additional sections of
in-service course EL-20
throughout county
Will conduct summer in-service
course EL-16
Will conduct community workshops
Will operate Arts Resource Center
Will produce materials for
dissemination
Will develop community resources
for use in schools
338,992
approx. Fiscal Year 1978 Total


98
Fowler, C. (1990). Recognizing the role of artistic intelligences. Music Educators
Journal, 7(1), 24-7.
Fowler, C. (1996). Strong arts, strong schools. New York: Oxford University Press.
Fowler, C., McMullan, B. J., and McLaughlin, C. (1991). Understanding how the arts
contribute to excellent Education. Prepared for the National Endowment for the
Arts. Contract DCA 90-50.
Frank, K. A., Topper, A., and Zhao, Y. (August 2000). Diffusion of innovations, social
capital, and sense of community. Presented at the annual meeting of the American
Sociological Association, Washington, DC.
Gardner, H. (1993a). Frames of mind: The theory of multiple intelligences. New York:
Basic Books.
Gardner, H. (1993b). Multiple intelligences: The theory in practice. New York: Basic
Books.
Geoghegan, W. (1994). Replacing the arts in education. Phi Delta Kappan, 75(6), 456-
458.
Goldberg, M. (1997). Arts and learning: An integrated approach to teaching and
learning in multicultural and multilingual settings. New York: Longman.
Goodlad, J. I. (1980). Beyond the rhetoric of promise. In J. Hausman & J. Wright (Eds.),
Arts and the schools. New York: McGraw Hill.
Grandin, T, Peterson, M., and Shaw, G. L. (1998). Spatial-temporal versus language-
analytic reasoning: The role of music training. Arts Education Policy Review,
99(6), 11-14.
Greenberg, P. (1979). Coming to whose senses? Arts Education, 32(6), 8-10.
Guba, E. G., and Lincoln, Y. S. (1983). Effective evaluation. San Francisco: Jossey-
Bass.
Hallinger, P., and Murphy, J. (1986). The social context of effective schools. American
Journal of Education, 94(3), 328
Hanna, J. L.(1992). Arts, academics, and productive citizens. Phi Delta Kappan, 73,
601-607.
Healy, J. M. (1990). Endangered minds: Why our children don't think. New York: Simon
and Schuster.


46
teachers to evaluate the lessons in the package. As Montgomery County received more
immigrants from Central America, Southeast Asia, and Asia the ARTS teams developed
curriculum resource packages that stressed the arts of these cultures. The teams also
developed a package on arts of the Harlem renaissance. An example of a curriculum
resource package(Greece) may be found in Appendix C.
According to Bolin (1978), building an arts resource center can be a tremendous
asset to any school or district. The space itself affirms the existence of arts activity and
provides a space in which thoughts are shared, ideas evolved, and information
disseminated. In January of 1977, an Arts Resource Center, known as the ARC, was
opened to all county teachers, specialists, and other personnel. In addition to the
curriculum packages, the center contained childrens books, adult books about the arts,
and art materials (including CEMRAL packages that pertained to the arts), all of which
could be borrowed by teachers or administrators. By 1985 the Resource List for the ARC
consisted of 98 pages and included books, kits, filmstrips, phonograph records, cassette
tapes, and video tapes in all four art forms as well as materials for programs for gifted
and talented.
Special Education
In 1974 Jean Kennedy Smith founded the National Committee, Arts for the
Handicapped. The purpose of this committee, which was housed at the John F. Kennedy
Center for the Performing Arts, was to provide opportunities for children with emotional,
physical, and mental disabilities to learn in, about, and through the arts. Because part of
the funding for Project ARTS was provided by the National Committee, Arts for the
Handicapped, ARTS team members also worked with students and teachers in special
education classrooms within the schools receiving service from the program. This


63
Two classroom teachers who are still teaching in Montgomery County made the
following comments when they responded to the e-mail request:
Having the ARTS staff come to my K classroom was extremely supportive I
began to create lessons following the same format, and the arts became an
Integral part of my daily program. (Ellie Shutak, classroom teacher)
I still use the arts all the time with my students. I used them as a kindergarten
teacher and with second and third graders. I liked the program because it gave
children the chance to express themselves in other ways. I have since developed
my own use of the arts and I am grateful that I had a chance to be a part of that
program. (Carolyn Potto, classroom teacher)
Results from a telephone survey of classroom teachers who received services
from the ARTS teams in 1977 showed that, 84% reported an increase in their skill and
knowledge of the arts, and 80% reported integrating the arts more into their curriculum
than they previously did (N = 75). A teacher evaluation of the in-service classes at the
end of three years showed that of 25 teachers interviewed, 19 considered the course to be
highly successful in meeting objectives, discovering individual potential, and
encouraging divergent thinking (Kukuk 1977). Since all classroom teachers were
required to take the in-service course offered by the ARTS teams before (or at the same
time), they received service in their schools, they were better able to work with the ARTS
team members in planning lessons. Classroom teachers served as an important part of the
planning process during conferences, both before and after the ARTS team teachers
work in the classroom. A classroom teacher would often feel confident enough to co
teach the lesson. In addition, the lesson plans included follow-up activities for future
use. These points are reflected in comments from principals in pilot schools in the
program in the following quotes:
I see the strengths of this project as the commitment, enthusiasm, and skill of the
teams... They accept teachers where they are. I feel that they are helping me do


12
An early constructive step to bring the arts into the mainstream of American
education was the Central Midwestern Regional Educational Laboratory (CEMREL).
Working with school systems, colleges, universities, and arts organization in the country,
CEMREL developed eight Aesthetic Education Learning Centers. These centers were
designed to provide curricular support to cooperating school systems, to bring together
agencies and their resources, and to provide aesthetic education programs for local
schools and communities. The centers were also planned to provide teacher education,
develop aesthetic education curricula suited to each cooperating system, and be
applicable to other systems nationwide (Rockefeller 1977).
In January 1978, the Music Educators Journal published a special issue dedicated
to arts in general education. In the opening article Wenner (1978, p 28) said, Arts in
general education is a comprehensive approach to reducing the isolation that the arts
have suffered from for far too many years. Fowler (1978) suggested filtering arts
through the entire curriculum as a way to put arts to obvious educational use. Fowler
(1978) also noted that when the arts function to enhance general education, they promote
a strong argument for their educational usefulness.
Since much of the burden for implementation of arts education falls to the
classroom teacher, it is necessary to provide inservice education for both administrators
and teachers to help them understand the arts processes and their application (Fowler
1978). In addition to dedication and assistance from educators, such programs also
require financial support. The National Alliance for Arts Education in Washington DC,
founded in 1973, proved to be a great help in assisting state and local education agencies
in integrating arts into general education. The goals of the alliance were threefold:


41
Work in the Schools
The individual ARTS team members worked in the schools on a one-on-one basis
with classroom teachers. Each classroom teacher in the program would first meet with
his/her assigned team member and discuss aspects of the curriculum that were planned for
the semester. Since copies of curriculum objectives in all subjects and grade levels were
available to ARTS team members, it was possible to design arts lessons to meet these
objectives. The ARTS team member would then, with the help of the classroom teacher,
plan arts lessons designed to meet academic curriculum objectives. Each classroom
teacher received a written lesson plan for each lesson taught by the ARTS team teacher
(An example of a lesson may be found in Appendix B). In this way, not only would the
classroom teacher have written lessons (approximately 28) in all four art forms, but also
he or she would have seen each lesson as it was taught. Each classroom teacher in the
program received a total of four semesters of service in his or her classroom, one
semester in each of the art forms.
Figure 1. Interrelated ARTS music specialist working with students while classroom
teacher observes


87
Adaptation
Special needs:
that have the letter a at the top comer as have the letter b at the
top). Refer to page 8 for one possible response to each one.
Divide the class in half and give one group the cards with the letter a
on them and the other half with the letter b on them. The class is to be
in two teams. Allow a sufficient amount of time for everyone to think
of movements, which represent their word.
One at a time, have the students portray movements that represent their
particular word. The rest of the team must identify the words. The
teacher should clock the correct response time. The clock should stop as
soon as the word is said and the amount of time taken should be written
on the board. The team has up to 30 seconds to determine the word.
After the clock is stopped, the person from the team who said the word
must be able to give the root and its meaning. If that cannot be done, 30
seconds is written on the board for that team. The object is to have the
lowest number of seconds by the end of the game.
At the conclusion of the lesson, ask the students the following questions:
What effect do words have on the culture of a country?
How does the importance of the root word in our country compare
with the architectural, governmental, and scientific advancements
evident in our society today?
Describe what each of the areas (government, medicine, theatre,
etc.) might be like without the accomplishments made by the
Greeks. Would they possibly have been contributed by another
culture?
For gifted and talented students:
Create a story that uses at least ten words that have Greek or Latin roots,
prefixes or suffices and that has a beginning, middle, or an ending. The
number of words can vary according to the level of ability of the
students.
Using a variety of locomotor and nonlocomotor movements, levels, and
force, have the students interpret the story into a movement sequence.


58
teachers. Some ARTS team members led workshops for middle school teachers showing
how the arts could be used in this curriculum. In addition, ARTS team members wrote a
book of lessons for middle school entitled Making Connections for the Middle Learning
Years (1990) Teachers in middle schools who received service from Interrelated ARTS
were not required to take an in-service course, nor did they require a whole-school
commitment.
Middle school people werent as interested (as elementary teachers), but teachers
had a lot of pressure on them. When junior high changed to middle schools, we
didnt want the sixth graders who previously had this experience to lose out on it,
but we had only elementary experience. The principals and some teachers at
middle schools were not as enthusiastic. (Jan Jones, music specialist)
This attitude gradually changed as ARTS teams met with academic teams at
middle schools and began working in classrooms to help these teachers find new ways of
delivering their academic curriculum. Multicultural curriculum resource packages
mentioned on pages 47,8 were particularly well received by Middle School teachers.
By 1994 the program consisted of only four arts teachers and a part-time
coordinator. The program lost the Connecticut Park space to an expanding Adult
Education Program and moved to a smaller space.
In the late 1980s and early 1990s the population of Montgomery County Schools
was becoming increasingly diverse as Hispanic, Southeast Asian and Asian families were
moving in to the county. This diversity required greater numbers of ESOL (English for
Speakers of Other Languages) to meet the needs of these students.
The program (Interrelated ARTS)was cut to meet staffing needs required by the
increased diverse population.(ESOL) and the demands to maintain high test
scores, particularly in science and mathematics. (Ann Richardson, Coordinator of
Interrelated ARTS)


3
part of the core curriculum, educators must find ways to improve the publics perception
of the educational importance of the arts. To accomplish this, it is apparent that teachers
and administrators of public schools will need to continually confront the problem of
how they relate to the community as represented by school boards, local political groups,
state legislators, and the voting public.
Because proficiency in the basic skills is a priority for school systems, one
frequently encounters the belief that any school activity that takes time away from the
study of reading, writing, and mathematics will interfere with the ability of students to
reach acceptable achievement levels. It seems, however, that more of the same kind of
instruction in these skills fails to produce improvement. Despite the problems of arts
gamering less importance in schools, there appears to be a movement led by teachers
who have discovered the power of integrating the arts into their teaching either in
partnership with arts specialists or (by necessity) on their own (Shepherd 1999). These
teachers need help answering the questions Why teach the arts? and Precisely what
should be taught? and perhaps most important of all, How should this be done?
(Cornett 1999).
Theoretical Framework
Change theory provides a logical framework for this study. Change CAN occur
in many ways When change occurs within a system, such as a school system, it is a
process; not an event. A change will cause a ripple effect throughout the system
(Persichette 1999). This may be categorized as a diffusion, or a process by which
innovation is communicated through various channels over a period of time (Rogers
1995). A change framework may be summarized as follows. A change agent wishes to
communicate an innovation to an intended adopter. This is accomplished by using a


27
Student Effects
A project to infuse academic studies with arts in Duluth, Minnesota examined the
pre-and post-tests of over 300 children in grades one through five. Significant gains were
demonstrated in test scores for students who had received arts instruction over those who
had not (Benson and Doane 1982).
A comprehensive arts education program developed by the Getty Institute moved
arts from the academic fringes into the core curriculum in Shady Brook Elementary
School in Bedford, Texas. Over the course of 5 years, scores on the Texas Assessment of
Academic Skills improved among the participating students as follows: reading scores
12.3%, writing scores 14%, and math scores 61%. In addition, anecdotal evidence
indicated an enhancement of students abilities to understand concepts and to express
themselves articulately (Chapman 1998).
Originally developed in New York City as a program for students who had not
learned to read by traditional methods, the Leaning to Read Trough the Arts (LTRTA)
was an integrated approach to elementary curriculum in which arts were used as the main
stimulus for all learning. This approach used specialists and classroom teachers. Music
instruction was evaluated for its effect on both attitude and total achievement with
substantial gains in both for several years (Collett 1991).
Ambler and Strong (1981) found that when arts were used to enhance the learning
activities in arithmetic, phonetics, and reading comprehension, attendance improved,
motivation was heightened, and test scores ranked above average. Additional research in
the Albuquerque, New Mexico elementary schools showed that students who participated
in band or orchestra had higher marks on comprehensive skills tests. Furthermore, the
longer they performed, the higher were their scores (Carlson 1985).


6
In 1970 there was a lower-than-expected enrollment in the elementary schools, which
resulted in the closing of some of the smaller schools. Due to the rapid growth of
industry, much of the farmland in the eastern part of the county had by this time
disappeared.
Racial segregation ended officially in 1954, and along with the issues of school
closings came problems of racially unbalanced schools. This situation was partially
solved by redrawing school boundaries and by pairing mainly white and mainly black
schools, with one building and staff handling lower grades of both populations and
another handling the upper grades. Another problem was the increasing number of
children from homes where English was not the primary language. The establishment of
English for Speakers of Other Languages (ESOL) helped more than 7,500 students, most
of whom were Asian or Hispanic.
By 1990, public school enrollment in MCPS was over 100,000 and climbing
steadily. Most of the population growth took place in the northern part of the county,
largely due to the enlargement and improvement of Interstate 270. Between 1985 and
1999, MCPS built 38 new schools, modernized another 50, and was using more than 250
portable classrooms to relieve overcrowding at a number of schools. At this point, the
total included 23 high schools, 32 middle schools, and 123 elementary schools. The
system was hiring 1,000 new teachers each year, and the annual cost of public education
passed the one billion dollar level, or about 45% of the total county budget (Sween and
Offutt 1999).
Background of the Project ARTS /Interrelated ARTS Program
In Montgomery County, in 1973, a group of citizens (Concerned Citizens for the
Arts in the Public Schools) met with the County Board of Education to discuss the


24
elements. The first was called domain projects and included a series of exercises,
activities, and productions in the visual arts, music, and creative writing. The second was
processfolios, an ongoing collection of students artistic productions such as drawings,
paintings, musical compositions, and creative writings (Armstrong 1994). The program
was based on the premise that the greatest learning takes place when students are active
constructors of their own knowledge. In addition to the production- perception-
reflection model used in general music class, the format allowed interdisciplinary
learning experiences that extend to learning in the core subjects such as geography and
science. Parents were encouraged to become involved in their childrens learning
through the use of interview forms and questionnaires (Aaron 1994).
Program Differences
Although these programs were designed and implemented to infuse arts into the
academic curriculum, there were many differences among them. Some of these
differences were the numbers and ages of students who were involved and the amount of
in-service training for classroom teachers. The concern for and methods employed to
evaluate each program also varied widely. Some differentiating characteristics are
summarized below.
The ABC Program was concerned with the development of student potential,
stressed different art forms in different schools, and confined documentation to
the observations of the participants.
The Open City Project focused on using both arts and non-arts related cultural
events, and the major objective of the program was to develop language skills in
early childhood classes. Evaluations included information tests, attitude scales for
parents and teachers, classroom observations, and pre-and-post-test standardized
scores.
Project SEARCH was developed to improve teacher attitudes toward the arts and
used evaluation methods appropriate to the measurement of attitudinal change.


57
The music and art teachers in the school provided instruction in these subjects, while
dance and drama instruction was provided by the Interrelated ARTS specialists. Salaries
for the Interrelated ARTS teachers who taught in the TAPESTRY Program were funded
by the Gifted and Talented Program. As the TAPESTRY program grew it became
necessary for Interrelated ARTS to hire two more drama and two more dance teachers to
replace those working on TAPESTRY.
Parents of students who were selected to participate in the program were for the
most part extremely supportive. Several parents testified at school board budget hearings,
and this helped in receiving continuing funding for the program.
The coordinator of the Gifted and Talented Program, Dr. Starnes, remembers that
there was a good representation of minority students in the program and that the teaching
was largely focused on skill developments rather than performance.
It was a nice mix of kids. I liked that there were skills being taught, and although
there were some performance aspects, it was more process than product oriented.
(Waveline Starnes, Coordinator of Gifted and Talented Program).
In 1990 the financial support for gifted programs ended, and the drama and dance
teachers were funded back into Interrelated ARTS
Middle School
In the late 1980s and early 1990s Montgomery County Schools began to focus on
several major changes. One was to provide more ESOL instructors to meet the needs of
the large number of immigrant from Hispanic, Southeast Asian and Asian countries.
Another was to restructure the junior high schools into middle schools. Middle schools
would contain grades 6, 7, and 8, while high school would be for grades 9, 10, 11, and
12. The coordinator of Interrelated ARTS, Dr. Ann Richardson, realized that much of the
work of the ARTS teams could be expanded to assist middle school students and


7
limitations of the countys existing arts programs. As a result of this meeting, the School
Board appointed a Task Force on the arts to study the existing arts program. At this time
most elementary schools had full or part time teachers in both music and visual art, but
students were receiving 40 minutes a week (or less) of instruction in these subjects. The
major recommendation was to begin an intensive staff development effort in the arts to
assist classroom teachers in implementing arts, arts-related curriculum, and integrated
arts experiences in their classrooms. The Task Force also recommended making dance
and drama (previously excluded) an integral part of the arts program at the elementary
school level.
The group submitted a proposal for classroom-teacher training in the arts to
Elementary and Secondary Education Act (ESEA) Title III that was approved for Federal
Government funding in 1974. Both Montgomery County Public Schools and ESEA Title
III funds supported the project that was first known as Projects ARTS (Arts Resource
Teams in the School). Additional grants were received from the United States Office of
Education through the Alliance for Arts Education and the National Committee, Arts for
the Handicapped (Office of Education 1977).
Initially, Project ARTS was a 3-year pilot program intended to be fully
incorporated into the local school system. It was not designed to take the place of
specific art and music specialists. The program serviced 18 pilot schools, and in
compliance with federal guidelines, also served two parochial schools and two schools in
St. Marys County. The project was designed to provide assistance, training, and support
to classroom teachers in an interrelated arts approach to learning. Throughout its
existence, the program witnessed many changes. Some of these changes reflected current
trends in education at the time they were instituted (such as working with special


32
values in historical research is providing historical information from one specific
situation for possible generalization to other areas (Madsen and Madsen 1970).
As a historical study this inquiry may be described as qualitative, an
encompassing term that attempts to define the meaning of what has occurred in the social
world. Some of the characteristics of qualitative research that apply to this study are
listed below.
It is holistic, seeking to understand its case as well as to understand how it is
different from other cases.
Its emphasis is observable, including observation by informants. There is a
preference for natural language description, and the researcher is the key
instrument.
It is descriptive. Data takes the form of words rather than numbers.
It is interpretive.
Observations and interpretations are validated through checking data against
multiple sources (Bresler and Stake 1992).
Ely, Vinz, Downing, and Anzul (1997) offer some views and suggestions about
some understandings in the writing of qualitative research. Their observations appear
meaningful and relevant to the present study.
There are many ways to come to know something, and such knowing is partial.
There are numerous ways for us to report.
8 All of our messages have agendas.
8 Our language creates reality.
8 Research is both context and culture bound. Furthermore, the researcher is
deeply concerned with what and who is being studied.
8 Affect and cognition are inextricably united
What we understand as social reality is multifaceted, sometimes clashing, and
often in flux.


37
Photographs
A Montgomery County Public School photographer originally made the pictures
that have been included in this study for a slide-tape presentation entitled, Theres More
Than One way to Make an A. They were taken by Bill Mills, one of the Montgomery
County Public School photographers, who graciously gave his consent for use in this
study. Since the slide presentation was widely used within the county, permission to use
photographs of the students was obtained from parents. Due to the time that has elapsed
since the slides were made, this documentation no longer exists. The camera is able to
record details and subtleties that otherwise might be forgotten or overlooked.
Furthermore, a photograph can be an instant record of what has taken place that will not
only enhance recollection, but make a strong statement about an event (Ball and Smith
1992).
Presenting Data
Data are presented in approximate chronological order (Table 1).
Table 1 A brief overview of the programs history
Project ARTS: 1974-1977 Interrelated ARTS: 1977-1993
Demonstration lessons(including
special education), workshops, in-
service training
1974/5 one team of four teachers-
grades K-3
1975/6 two teams-grades K-6
1976/7 three teams-grades K-6
Demonstration lessons (including Special
Education), workshops and in-service
training for K-6 plus:
Connecticut Park Center School 1982-
1993, Interdisciplinary lessons with
science and computer specialists.
DARTS 1983-1993: Title I specialists in
Center School. Arts lessons with trade
books at second grade level.
TAPESTRY: 1984-1990: Pull-out
program in dance and drama for
students identified as gifted and
talented in the arts.
Middle School: 1991-1995 workshops,
demonstration lessons in grades 6-8


65
areas was emphasized. The arts were not put in the service of learning in other subjects,
but taught with equivalent emphasis so that learning could take place in both areas. Figure
6 illustrates a dance movement teacher working with first graders on the meanings of
prepositions.
Figure 6. Learning through dance
In addition to curriculum objectives, the lessons included specific objectives from
the art form. Objectives in Music and Visual Art were found in the courses of study for
those subjects. ARTS team members in Dance and Drama were required to do more
research to find suitable objectives in their art forms. One of the advantages of being able
to refer to curriculum guides is that each grade level has its own specific content area. In
third grade social studies, for example, students study the geography and cultures of
Ghana, Mexico, and Japan. The classroom teacher may decide in what order they are
presented, but by the end of third grade all classes will have covered this material. ARTS
team members were able to compose lesson plans that with minor revisions could be used
in different schools. Since all classroom teachers were required to teach specific


APPENDIX B
LESSON PLAN
Title: One Wide River to Cross
Grade level: pre-K or K
Materials: book.One Wide River to Cross adapted by Barbara Emberley. Illustrated by
Ed Emberley
Music objectives:
to experience singing an adaptation of a traditional African American spiritual,
to become aware of the stanza-refrain form of the lyrics and music of the song,
to listen for and be able to identify the rhythm pattern accompanying the words,
One Wide River to Cross
Math objectives:
to use the correct number of fingers to correlate with the numbers in the song,
to explore different combinations of numbers which may be used in simple addition,
to demonstrate the commutative property of addition by reversing the order in which the
addends are shown.
Procedure:
1. Clap and say the title of the book in the rhythm of the words. Explain to the
students that they will clap and sing this rhythm whenever it occurs in the
book/song.
2. Read/sing the story making sure that the students can see the illustrations on each
page. Encourage the student to participate on the words, One wide river to cross
and on the chorus section.
3. Go back to the beginning of the book. Explain that this time every time a number
is mentioned in the song the students will show that number on their fingers using
a different hand each time a number is sung. At the sixth stanza, demonstrate
what you want the students to do and ask them to describe what you did( the
teacher will display five fingers on one hand and one finger on the other to show
six, then reverse so that the opposite hands show each number)
4. Continue through the verses demonstrating the numbers on your fingers and
having the student mirror you.
79


67
program, funding was also required for buses to transport students to Connecticut Park
Center school for both science programs and DARTS.
In Montgomery County the elected school board presents a yearly budget to the
County Council. The operating budget is broken down into costs for various programs,
salaries, etc. The County Council then decides which of the School Board items will be
either partially or completely funded. Both the County Council and the School Board
hold three hearing sessions in which parents, teachers, administrators, or other concerned
citizens may speak for a prescribed time (usually 3 minutes) in support of various issues.
Visibility
Obviously it is important for a program to have a great deal of support in order to
remain in the budget year after year. One of the ways that Project ARTS/Interrelated
ARTS maintained this support was to invite both School Board and County Council
members into classrooms to observe the program in action. In order to be as visible as
possible there was always a principal, teacher, and/or concerned parent to speak in
support of the program at these budget hearings. In addition, each ARTS team member
attended all of the hearings in a group and wore identifying badges which were also
given to others in attendance.
Administrative workshops and curriculum support packages also helped to keep
the program in the forefront of educational news. The objectives of the administrative
workshops were to demonstrate the value of integrating the arts into the daily curriculum
and to have administrators identify necessary support both in their schools and in the
school system. A series of five administrative workshops were provided through Federal
Government grants. The final report (Kukuk 1977) noted that Greater awareness and
knowledge resulting from the administrative workshops has changed attitudes about


44
conductor of the National Symphony Orchestra, and Martin Engle, Advisor for the Arts
and Humanities, National Institute for Education, addressed the group.
In November of 1976, a 2 1/2 day retreat was held at the Donaldson Brown
Center in Port Deposit, Maryland. Twenty-five administrators, supervisors, and
principals were present. The goal of the retreat was to develop individual group plans for
the implementation of quality arts programs, including the identification of
responsibilities. Both the Maryland State Alliance for Arts Education Chairman, Harold
Lott, and his associate from the State Department of Education, Victor Kotulak, were in
attendance. Participants were provided with hands-on experiences in each of the four art
forms by observing and participating in lessons taught by arts team members. There was
discussion of the learning process and its relation to the arts and the role of
administrators in providing arts programs. The speaker for the event was Elliot Eisner,
who addressed the group with the topics: Where Are We Going in Arts Education? and
The Art of Teaching
That was a wonderful retreat and the epitome of the influence of the Project
ARTS program to be able to attract such people. We invited Elliot Eisner to come
see what we were doing and to share some of his ideas with the staff members. I
was delighted with the team that put that together. (Richard Pioli, first Project
ARTS coordinator)
A series of three administrative workshops were held in January of 1977. Primary
consultant for these was Dr. Harry S. Broudy who presented his address, "How Basic is
Aesthetic Education? or Rts the Fourth R to approximately 600 administrators and
supervisors. Dr. Broudy also conducted seminars and discussions with smaller groups
attended by teachers, school board members, the superintendent, principals, Project
ARTS staff, and supervisors and administrators associated with the project.


CHAPTER 6
CONCLUSIONS
Summary
This study is about a particular program, Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS, that
integrated music, dance, visual art, and drama into the academic curriculum. The
program, which took place in Montgomery County, Maryland existed from 1973 until
1995. The study uses interviews, personal recollections and existing documents to
determine which factors were most important in its success. The major factors that
emerged were those concerning the programs longevity, quality, and feasibility.
The program achieved longevity by identifying and meeting the needs of various
populations such as gifted and talented students and physically handicapped students. In
addition the program met the needs of elementary classroom teachers by designing
lessons that addressed both the academic curriculum and the arts, by demonstrating these
lessons in teachers classrooms and by teaching arts related skills in an in-service course.
Quality was achieved by ARTS team members being thoroughly acquainted with
the elementary curriculum so that demonstration lessons directly addressed the content
area taught in the classroom. To achieve integrity between disciplines, the arts and
academic aspects of each lesson received equal emphasis whenever possible. It is
unfortunate that no instrument was established to measure student gains The provision
for this would be helpful in assessing the quality of an arts-in-general-education
programs in the future.
69


94
Oh the (cardinal) is a mighty fine bird.
3. Have the students together with the teacher compose more stanzas of
the song using different bird names and characteristics. Record on
chart paper.
4. Teach the dance steps that accompany the song:
Part A (performed with the first two lines)
Knee bends on the beat
Part B (performed with third line)
Step, step, step, kick(to the right)
Step, step, step, kick(to the left)
Part C (performed with last line)
Step, turn step,(to the right) knee bend
Step, turn, step,(to the left) knee bend
5. Perform the completed song and dance together.
Elaboration: As a group pick three or four words from the story to learn in Spanish.
Read Leo Lionis Tico and the Golden Wings. Compare and contrast the
two books.


42
A three-credit one-semester course was designed to give classroom teachers a
basic understanding of the four art forms and, through active participation, increase the
teachers confidence in the arts. The course was taught by four ARTS team members
during both fall and spring semesters after the school day and for six weeks in the
summer. Teachers could apply the credit for re-certification and/or masters equivalency.
After the first year of Project ARTS, regular service to a school was offered if at least
five teachers from one school had completed the course.
Program Workspace
The program was originally housed in two vacant classrooms of Wheaton Woods
Elementary School in Rockville. In 1974-75, monthly one-half day workshops were
conducted at Wheaton Woods during the first week of every month of the school year.
The K-3 teachers, principals, arts specialists, PTA cultural arts chairmen from the 12
pilot schools, K-3 teachers from St. John the Evangelist School, and teachers and
supervisors from St. Marys County Public Schools attended.
In its second year, the program moved to Ashburton Elementary School in
Bethesda, where an entire floor of the school was available. A third team was added, and
new pilot schools joined the project. The monthly workshops were replaced by an in-
service course that met weekly for one semester and was taught by the interrelated ARTS
teachers in the all-purpose room after school hours.
Workspace was extremely important for ARTS team members for several
reasons. Team members traveled to many schools throughout the county, so it was useful
to be in a fairly centralized location. Because all materials for demonstration lessons as
well as workshops were provided by the program, it was necessary to have space for a
great many art supplies (paper, paints, brushes, scissors, crayons, pastels, clay etc.) as


This dissertation was submitted to the Graduate Faculty of the College of Fine
Arts and to the Graduate School and was accepted as partial fulfillment of the
requirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
December 2002 odjosjeM'
Dean, College of Fine Arts
Dean, Graduate School


47
included classrooms for learning disabled, orthopedically impaired, mildly emotionally
disturbed, and visually and auditorily challenged students. Figures 2 and 3 show an ARTS
team drama teacher working with orthopedically challenged students and an ARTS team
music teacher working with mildly retarded high-school students. In 1977 Jean Kennedy
Smith addressed the Montgomery County Board of Education concerning the work that
was done by the ARTS teams.
Figure 4. Music teacher in the classroom


I certify that I have read this study and that in my opinion it conforms to
acceptable standards of scholarly presentation and is fully adequate, in scope and quality,
as a dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
Charles R. Hoffer, Chair
Professor of Music
I certify that I have read this study and that in my opinion it conforms to
acceptable standards of scholarly presentation and is fully adequate, in scope and quality,
as a dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
David Z. Kushner
Professor of Music
I certify that I have read this study and that in my opinion it conforms to
acceptable standards of scholarly presentation and is fully adequate, in scope and quality,
as a dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
Camille M. Smith
Associate Professor of Music
I certify that I have read this study and that in my opinion it conforms to
acceptable standards of scholarly presentation and is fully adequate, in scope and quality,
as a dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
Timothy S. Brophy
Assistant Professor of Music
I certify that I have read this study and that in my opinion it conforms to
acceptable standards of scholarly presentation and is fully adequate, in scope and quality,
as a dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
Linda L. Lamme
Professor of Teaching and Learning


40
federal government. The proposal was approved for funding in 1974 and was supported
jointly by Montgomery County Public Schools. Additional grants were received from the
United States Office of Education through the Alliance for Arts Education and The
National Committee-Arts for the Handicapped. Specific funding for the first three years
is described in Appendix A.
Project ARTS began with a director, Richard Pioli, who was hired from the local
public television station for the position, and a curriculum writer-evaluator, Janet Brome.
A secretary and a clerk typist also were hired. The first year of the project consisted of
two teams, each comprised of a drama, dance/movement, visual art, and music teacher.
Each team member had a background in both some area of the arts and in teaching. In
addition, each pilot school was supplied with an arts aide who assisted the classroom
teachers in initiating and developing arts activities on a continuing basis.
Pilot schools were chosen for the first year on the basis of principals requests and
to represent each of the six administrative areas.
At the time we began, we contacted the school principals that we knew best and
we felt that we would go with the principals that had a leaning toward arts
education, and there were a few of them. We did workshops for their teachers. It
was through these workshops that we got to tell people what we were doing.
(Richard Pioli, first coordinator of Project ARTS)
Only kindergarten through third grade (K-3) teachers in these schools were served
in the first year, and the services included monthly workshops and demonstration lessons
in the classroom for teachers followed by individual teacher conferences to plan follow
up activities. In compliance with federal guidelines, the project also served two parochial
schools in Montgomery County and extended some services to St. Marys County Public
Schools.


9
Definitions of Terms
The following terms are intended to convey the meanings defined below:
The Arts: Music, drama, visual art, and dance.
ARTS: An acronym for Arts Resource Teams in Schools
Arts Education: A program that includes all four art forms
Department of Aesthetic Education: In Montgomery County Schools,
education in and through the arts including visual art; general,
instrumental, and choral music; dance; and drama
Gifted and Talented: Students identified as gifted and talented in one or
more art form by teacher-designed testing instruments.
Interrelated Arts (no acronym): In the context of Montgomery County
Schools, one or more art forms used as a strategy to teach academic skills
Interrelated ARTS (acronym): The name of the arts in general-education
program in Montgomery County, Maryland
Project ARTS: The name of the arts-in-general-education program for the
first three years of its existence.
Special Needs Students: Students requiring either a special classroom
situation or their own schools to help with various needs such as
developmental, orthopedic, sensory, etc


101
Reynolds, C. (1979). Helping classroom staff teach general music. Music Educators
Journal, (55(8), 47-49.
Reynolds, J. (1966). Music outlines for elementary teachers. Music Educators Journal,
53(4), 44-46.
Richardson, A. S. (1998). A summary of the presentation on arts education assessment:
Gardner's model. Paper presented at the Montgomery County Board of Education
Retreat, MD.
Rogers, E. M. (1995). Diffusion of innovations (4th ed.). New York: The Free Press.
Rockefeller, D. Jr. (1977). Arts, education, and Americans. Panel of the American
council for the arts in education. Coming to our senses: The significance of the
arts for American education. New York: McGraw Hill.
Rogers, F. W. (1977). Arts education has arrived; Now what? Arts Education, 30(7), 14-
15.
Ruccius, E. (1994). Developing interdisciplinary arts programs. Update, 12(2), 28-31.
Shepherd, B. (1999). Forward to Cornett (Ed.). The arts as meaning makers. Columbus,
OH: Merrill Prentice-Hall.
Sherman, R. R., and Webb, R. B. (1990). Qualitative research in education: Focus and
methods. London: Falmer Press.
Sween, J. C. (1984). Montgomery County: Two centuries of change. Beverly Hills, CA:
Windsor Publications.
Sween, J. C., and Offutt, W. (1999). Montgomery County: Centuries of change. Sun
Valley, CA: American Historical Press.
Tellstromn, T. A. (1771). Music in American education. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and
Winston, Inc.
Trescott, J. (1996). A is for arts education. The Washington Post, October 12.
Trupia, C. J. (1978). Project search. Music Educators Journal 64(5), 71-2.
Turner, R. W. (1984). Whats basic? Ask this superintendent. Music Educators Journal,
70(6) 35-36.
Veblen, K. K., and Elliott, D. J. (2000, Fall). Integration: For or against? General Music
Today, 14,4


28
Other researchers are continuing to find that children, especially those in at-risk
categories, attain numerous tangible and intangible benefits from extensive sequential
music study. As a group, students who study music and the other arts do better on
standardized tests, and scores improve in students whose studies occur over a longer
period of time (Costa-Giomi, Price, Raucher, Schmidt, Shackford, Sims, et al (1999
A study in long-term memory by Berliner (1985) claimed that a multi-sensory
approach, such as visual imagery, movement, and touch, created more enduring learning
than did a single sensory approach. Larson (1995) claims that integrating aural, vocal,
visual, intellectual, digital, kinesthetic and emotional understanding contributes much to
the learning process.
Since 1990
During the last decade of the 20th century there has been a renewed interest in
using the arts as a means to humanize and energize curricula in the public schools
(Cornett 1999). A review of the literature concerning arts in general education shows
little substantive evidence to prove or disprove a connection between arts and student
performance. There do seem to be, however, strong connections between arts-focused
schools and excellence in education. When we examine school development through the
arts in a broad context it becomes apparent that arts-in-general-education programs can
help schools accomplish broad educational objectives (Remer 1996). In 1991, research
into the records of students in several Texas schools indicated that a curriculum that
devotes 25% or more of the school day to the arts produces youngsters with superior
academic abilities (Oddleifson 1991). Integrated techniques that employ the arts within
other course work, such as social studies or English, help to convey the objectives of that
work. It would seem, then, that arts should not be treated solely as methodologies for


66
curriculum, most were delighted to learn new strategies to help them meet the curriculum
objectives. As well as objectives, each lesson plan included a list of materials required to
teach the lesson, background information if necessary, and an ordered list of procedures.
Evaluation and extensions or follow-up suggestions for the classroom teacher followed
these procedures.
Feasibility
Regardless of the intrinsic value of the program, it would not be feasible to
replicate without sufficient funding to meet its considerable costs. Feasibility depends on
funding, which in turn can rely on visibility.
Budget Planning
The funding for the first three years of Project ARTS came from an ESEA Title
III grant, grants through the United States Office of Education through the Alliance for
Arts Education, the National Committee Arts for the Handicapped, and by Montgomery
County Public Schools. One of the major objectives stated in the final report was that
there were to be several aspects of the program specifically designed to enhance program
self-renewal (Kukuk and Brome 1977).
In supporting this program the budget for Project ARTS/Interrelated
ARTS required salaries for ARTS team members (12 by the 3rd year), including extra
funds for those team members teaching the in-service course, salaries for the program
coordinator, a full-time secretary, and a part-time librarian for the arts resource center.
Funding was also required for materials (such as visual arts supplies, rhythm instruments,
and trade books), mileage accrued by ARTS team members as they traveled to the
various schools, and of course the building that housed the program. Later in the


54
wooden pen approximately 8 feet square and 8 feet high. This pen was then filled to the
top with dirt, sectioned off into quadrants and seeded with objects such as bones (from a
science supply catalog), broken crockery, feathers, etc. An Interrelated ARTS visual art
teacher taught a lesson on arts and artifacts of various primitive cultures. The students
were then given instruction on the correct way to search for and record their findings.
They were provided with disposable paper gowns so that they could enter the dig without
soiling their clothes. After time spent in the dig, the students made speculations
concerning the culture of the people who might have used the artifacts they discovered.
They also made sketches of the things that they had found.
Another interrelated lesson was entitled, Good Vibrations. In this lesson, various
musical instruments were used to show how sounds were produced. The students also
conducted experiments in the production of sound energy. Students could feel the energy
waves by placing their hands next to a large gong as it was struck. They could observe
the power of sound energy by striking tuning forks and putting them in shallow pans of
water.
One very popular offering for fifth grade classes was called Ellis Island. This was
a drama simulation where students were cast in the role of immigrants coming to this
country. A drama teacher from Interrelated ARTS visited the participating classrooms a
day before the students came to the center to explain the history of Ellis Island
immigration and to assign to the children the roles that they would assume on the
following days. Teachers, aides, and frequently members of the community were cast as
the immigration officials and the rooms were set up to resemble the actual setting as
nearly as possible, At the close of the two day session a ceremony was held where
students were admitted to the country.


76
Table A-2. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1976
Funds % of
($) Total Positions and Services Provided Results
ESEA Funds
123,913
36 1 Project Director
1 Curriculum Writer/Evaluator
1 Full-Time Secretary
2.25 FTE Teacher Assistants
P/T Research Field Team
Consultants
Office Supplies
Substitute Time
Instructional Supplies/
Equipment
Administrative Travel
Instructional Travel
Fixed Charges
MCPS Funds
3 arts teams trained
18 pilot schools served (139 teachers
trained)
3,475 students involved in
demonstration classes twice
monthly
Interrelated arts summer school
taught by arts team
Developed videotapes of arts
processes for in-service use and for
dissemination
Fall in-service course, EL-20, taught
by arts teams (43 teachers)
Teacher assistants trained
Conducted nonpilot school
meetings/workshops
Arts Team
150,681
Members
11,264
Summer Per Diem
FTE Teacher
31,212
Assistants
3,300
Teacher Travel
1,000
Telephone
26.117
Fixed Charges
223,574
347,487 Fiscal Year 1976 Total


91
No people ever appreciated the dance more than did the ancient Greeks (p 11). The
importance of it is witnessed by the many times it is mentioned in the literature, with
reference given to dancing and dances. Dance held an important place in their religion,
their education, and their lives. Pictures in the book show both men and women dancing.
Dance took on a slightly different meaning than it is as we understand it today. The term
orchestra meant rhythmical movements of many sorts: movements with the feet, the
hands, the eyes, as well as the whole body. Many movement areas were considered
under the large umbrella of dance. Some of these were: a march or procession, a childs
rhythmic game, a ball game, an exhibition of juggling, tumbling or tight rope walking;
also, the rhythmical movements of animals, fish, birds, trees, and flowers. The Greeks
did not think of dance by itself. They always associated it with music and poetry or
verse. Their word mouslike included music, poetry, and dance. It was all considered
the same art.
We know something about the dance in ancient Greece, but we will never be able to
know exactly what the dances were. Some things tell us something about them. The
objects found by archaeologists often have dances or things associated with dance on
them. What has to be remembered is that what is found on the objects are
representations of the ideal of beauty and not necessarily as it really is. Not much is
known about the actual steps. What is usually written is written in descriptive terms such
as the itch, knocking at the door, etc. (p 22). It is very hard to say that some of the
folk dances done by the Greeks today have their beginnings in ancient Greece because
there is no recording of that. Since exact translations are not possible, it is hard to make
inferences from different words used with dance. ... for we shall never, in all
probability, be able to reproduce any ancient dance in its entirety. (p 27).
Some of the words associated with dance and their approximate meanings are as follows:
Schema denoting form, shape, appearance, figure, manner. A way of doing something
(P 25)
Phora carriage; may be the feet, hands, or whole body. It may be a combination of
our word step and movement. It would include such movements as walking, running,
leaping, twisting, or bending (p 26).
Deixis to show or portray; to portray mythical characters (p 26).
Cheironomia gesture (p 27).


13
To facilitate a network for communication and cooperation among arts and
education groups and agencies
To provide at the Kennedy Center and elsewhere arts education programs that can
be showcased and transported as models for both the arts and education
communities
To provide technical assistance (Rogers 1978, p 40).
Support of arts in general education continued in the 1970s. The Arts in General
Education Program (AIE) of the Rockefeller Foundation, with support from the Junior
League, supported five pilot schools that developed in-service courses in the arts. The
arts as processes are vital to education because mental growth is dependent on
developing the perceptual skills within each of us. AIE switches emphasis from products
to process (Fowler 1979, pp 8-9).
The decade between 1967 and 1977 also saw a rise in the publics desire for more
emphasis on basic education. Troubled by statistics that indicated a deterioration in the
school populations ability to read and write, the public lined up behind a back to
basics movement (Goodlad 1980). Another concern was that scheduling left little time
for specialists to plan with classroom teachers to relate the arts to subjects being taught.
Many specialists were suspicious of relating arts to other subjects and feared that the arts
would be diluted. Furthermore, it was thought best that teachers not teach outside their
discipline; and if the arts were used only to illustrate other subject areas, the value of
correlation would be open to question (Wenner 1976).
Changes in the 1980s
By 1980, Federal and State support of the arts had grown from 18 million to 145
million dollars (Blau 1989), but Federal programs in arts education were seriously
undermined and perhaps effectively eliminated by the Education Consolidation Act of


4
change process that establishes a channel through the change environment (Ellsworth
2000). In the case of Project ARTS, the group called Concerned Citizens for the Arts
may be viewed as the change agent, and the adopter was Montgomery County School
System, which acquired the funds to implement the program. A program to implement
such a change needs administrative support, a curricular design that includes some
flexibility, and teacher commitment (Ruccius 1994).These factors were all included in
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.
Context
Hallinger and Murphy (1986) state that schools can be understood only in
context. Ideas, people and events cannot be understood if isolated from their contexts.
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was a program that was conceived and implemented in
Montgomery County, Maryland. Therefore, a brief history of the political, economic and
educational development of the county is offered to provide a contextual background for
the program.
The Montgomery County Public School system is in an area known as a bedroom
community for the federal government. Following the lead of federal agencies, a number
of corporations (mostly in the areas of research and development and high technology)
moved into the county. This led to the growth of a prosperous area where community
residents had high incomes, academic training, and economic opportunity. Because
continuous funding for Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was a major reason for its
longevity, it is important to note that this program existed in an economically stable
environment.


Abstract of Dissertation Presented to the Graduate School
of the University of Florida in Partial Fulfillment of the
Requirements for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
PROJECT ARTS/INTERRELATED ARTS FROM 1973 TO 1995:
A SUCCESSFUL PROGRAM FOR ARTS IN GENERAL EDUCATION
THERES MORE THAN ONE WAY TO MAKE AN A
By
Elizabeth Adams
December 2002
Chair: Dr. Charles Hoffer
Major Department: Music
This study reviews the implementation and progress of a project integrating the
four art forms (music, dance, visual art, and drama) into general education curricula. The
program, known as Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS, existed from 1973 to 1995 in the
Montgomery County, Maryland school system. The study uses interviews, personal
recollections, and existing documents to determine why this program lasted so much
longer than most arts-in-general-education programs. Its description is offered as a
potential guideline for those wishing to replicate, approximate, and/or support similar
programs.
Interview data, formal reports, reflective observations, and photographs are
presented to describe and evaluate the program. Conclusions review factors related to its
quality, feasibility, and longevity. Finally, implications for replicating such a program
and for further study are presented.
vi


6
CONCLUSIONS
69
Summary 69
Implications 70
Recommendations for Further Study 72
APPENDIX
A ESEA TITLE III PROJECT ARTS FUNDING 75
B LESSON PLAN 79
C CURRICULUM RESOURCE PACKAGE 81
D DARTS LESSON 92
REFERENCES 95
BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH 103
v


77
Table A-3. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1977
Funds % of
($) Total Positions and Services Provided Results
ESEA Funds
120,000 31 1 Project Director
1 Curriculum Writer/Evaluator
1 Full-Time Secretary
1 Clerk Typist
1 Community Coordinator
Consultants
Substitutes
Instructional Supplies
Office Supplies
Administrative Travel
Instructional Travel for
Dissemination
Fixed Charges
MCPS Funds
247,309
Arts Team
154,615
Summer Per
Diem
7,584
FTE Teacher
Assistants
49,705
Teacher Travel
6,216
Telephone
1,500
Fixed Charges
27.689
247,309
Other Funds
8,000* 5
13.523**
21,523
388,832 Fiscal Year 1977 Total
* Alliance for Arts Education
** Handicapped
Continued arts team training
18 pilot schools served (Level III-rV
service) (165 teachers trained)
1 pilot school for handicapped
(second semester)-training 12
teachers
3 satellite schools served-14 teachers
trained
4,956 students involved in
demonstration classes
Developed and implemented a four-
level staff development program
Operated arts resource center
Refined and tested arts activity bank
prior to publishing
Conducted 3 countrywide
administrative arts workshops
with Division of Aesthetic
Education
Conducted fall in-service course, EL-
20 (47 teachers)
Will conduct EL-20 (spring
semester)-art, music, PE, and
classroom teachers (et
accepted)!
Will conduct EL-16 summer in-
service
Developed community support and
awareness for the arts through
community school visits and
special workshops
conducted 56 nonpilot school
workshops through February
1977
Will conduct summer workshop for
special ed teachers
Develop 3 arts support packages to be
integrated into other curriculum
areas
! 16 teacher applicants turned down


CHAPTER 2
REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE
A review of the literature related to the history of the arts in the school classroom
throughout the United States follows. I describe programs developed during the last
decades of the last century, noting how such programs became relevant to the use of arts
in classroom teaching. Finally, I present empirical studies relevant to the topic of
integrating arts into general curricula.
Historical Trends of Arts in Schools
Aesthetic education began to gain some presence in the schools in the 1960s
when Karel (1966) noted a definite need for an arts curriculum in teacher education.
Nevertheless, although United States competitiveness stressed the values of problem
solving, higher order thinking skills, risk taking, team work, and creativity, society in
general seemed to remain oblivious to the fact that arts are more than a frill or source
of entertainment (Hanna 1992).
In 1962 President Kennedy appointed Francis Keppel as Commissioner of
Education. He also appointed Kathryn Bloom as Director of Cultural Affairs. By 1965
these appointments led to the development of the Arts and Humanities Program. Keppel
was an eloquent advocate of the arts in education. The year 1965 became significant for
arts education when the passing of The Elementary and Secondary Education Act
(ESEA) further legitimized arts and humanities education. The National Endowment of
the Arts and the National Endowment for the Humanities were also founded in 1965. By
10


17
add, but many believed that the teaching of these skills had limited effectiveness.
Americans want quality education in their schools. Quality education means total
education, and total education means using every possible means to teach: not just
reading and writing and calculating, but also feeling, moving, dancing, improvising, and
creating (Kiester 1985, p 27).
Barry (1988) noted that with budget cuts giving classroom teachers sole
responsibility for arts education, it would be necessary to provide proactive advocacy for
full-time arts educators and comprehensive and in-depth instruction in the arts. He also
suggested that attention be given to educating classroom teachers, preparing them to
serve as arts instructors and also as advocates for arts education (Barry 1998). Instead of
school arts programs being confined to essential vocational training, there appeared to
be a need to promote curriculum building that is more rooted in culture. An
interdisciplinary arts program is not believed to be a substitute for discrete learning of the
various arts. However, applying a study of arts as a process for investigation and sharing
worlds of leaning can serve to pull students into subject matter and give them ownership
of it. In this way, as Fowler (1996) noted, learning becomes more inwardly directed and
gives students more excitement and personal involvement.
Gradually the concerns of advocates for arts education began to be given more
credence. In an article concerning music education in the United States, Fowler (1988)
noted that:
Music is a natural adjunct to the study of history and peoples. Its very nature
dictates that it have a place in these studies. It is difficult to understand how
social studies can be taught effectively without incorporating the arts, because
these symbolic systems can invoke periods and peoples in a way that words alone
cannot (Fowler 1988, p 154).


ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Many individuals have assisted in this research. First, I owe a great deal to my
sister, Dr. Catherine Adams. I thank her for her editing skills, for retyping seemingly
endless versions of this document, and for her patience. I deeply appreciate the patience
and skill of librarians Robena Cornwell and Michele Wilbank-Fox. I thank them for
helping me find everything I needed.
I am extremely grateful for the guidance of the chairman of my Graduate
Committee, Dr. Charles Hoffer. I benefitted from his expertise and encouragement and
also from that of my other committee members in the School of Music, Dr. Timothy
Brophy, Dr. David Kushner, and Dr. Camille Smith. To my outside committee member,
Dr. Linda Lamme, I offer particular thanks for her encouragement and direction. I
consider it a great honor to have worked with these truly exceptional educators.
Several of my former colleagues in Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS were
particularly helpful in providing detailed information about how the program worked.
These include Dr. Ann Richardson, former coordinator of the program, Betty Weincek,
dance specialist, and Janis Jones, music specialist.
Finally, I am extremely grateful for the support and encouragement of my
husband, Dr. David Young.


CHAPTER 3
METHODOLOGY
Sherman and Webb (1990) note that all research arises from ones actual or
qualitative life. Research is not abstract; it exists in a context. The context is the
environment in which humans are directly involved (Sherman and Webb 1990). It has
become increasingly accepted in the research community that the investigators
subjectivity operates during a research project (Fink 2000). Qualitative research takes
place in natural, as opposed to abstract or theoretical, settings and is studied as a whole
rather than in isolation from the past or present (Edson 1990). It implies a direct concern
with experience as it is lived, felt, or undergone (Sherman and Webb 1990). Historical
inquiry seeks to explain the significance of past experiences, but because historians must
interact with the evidence they gather, interpretation is inescapable (Edson 1990).
Design of the Study
Often the selection of a topic is based on the researchers current or past concerns.
Within qualitative research is a tradition whereby the principal research instrument is the
researcher (Phelps, Ferrara, and Goolsby 1993). Included among the characteristics of
qualitative research are the observations that it is holistic, in that it relates to a bounded
system, and it is empirical, with an emphasis on what can be observed (Bresler and Stake
1992).
We need history, not to tell us what happened, or to explain the past, but to make
the past alive so that it can explain and make a future possible (Bloom 1987). One of the
31


45
A summary of both internal and external evaluators concluded that the value of
the arts was effectively communicated through the series of workshops. The participants
stated that the consultants had effectively shared their philosophical positions relevant to
aesthetic education and that the workshops had developed support for a comprehensive
arts program in Montgomery County Public Schools The workshops helped to build a
solid base of support and understanding of aesthetic education (as defined in Chapter 1)
and the role that Project ARTS played in its development. As a result of administrative,
school board, teacher, and parental support, the entire funding of Project ARTS was
assumed by the Montgomery County Public Schools in 1977.
Association with the Kennedy Center
The Education Department of the John F. Kennedy for the Performing Arts
conducted teacher workshops, some of which were led by ARTS Team members. In
addition the Center published several booklets of lesson plans that were available for
national distribution. Most of the lessons were designed and written by ARTS team
members. These include The Afrikan Experience, The Australian Experience .and
Creativity (which was sponsored by Mobil Oil.) These activities brought both local and
national recognition to Interrelated ARTS .
Curriculum Resource Development
In addition to working in the classrooms and presenting workshops, ARTS team
members began developing curriculum resource packages that combined arts lessons
with reading, social studies, and science. These packages contained lesson plans, books,
pictures, manipulative materials, and resource lists for additional books and films. Each
package contained at least one lesson in each of the four art forms. Some of these were
piloted in elementary classrooms in the spring of 1977, and a form was provided for


52
of sufficient enrollment, and it had considerably more space. Interrelated ARTS now
shared a building with the Montgomery County Adult Education Program and a daycare
center. Each team member had a separate office, there was ample space for musical
instruments and art materials, and there was a large library to hold the ever-growing
accumulation of books and curriculum support packages. There were also five or six
unused classrooms that could be used for after-school workshops, and a large multi
purpose room. Typically, the ARTS teams would spend one day each week (usually
Monday) in the office in order to prepare materials and lessons for the coming week.
Each team would visit approximately eight or nine schools in a two-week period,
working with each assigned classroom teacher every other week for a total of seven
visits. This teaching schedule was in addition to preparing and presenting workshops and
teaching the in-service course. A notebook was kept in the main office of each school
served. This was used as a sign-in and sign-out place as well as a place for the ARTS
team member to write a brief summary of the lessons being taught.
Although members of the Interrelated ARTS staff felt that Connecticut Park was
ideally suited for their needs, another move was soon to come. The building of North
Chevy Chase Elementary school was not owned by the school system, and as part of the
leasing agreement, the building had to be occupied by a school program or it could be
leased or sold privately. In order to keep the property in the hands of the school system
while the building was being renovated, Interrelated ARTS, along with another smaller
program, was asked to occupy the building for one year. The other occupants were two
elementary science and computer specialists who were charged with writing curricula for
their subjects and to teach lessons that they designed. The students they taught were
brought by bus to the school. It seemed an ideal opportunity to the coordinators of both


35
TAPESTRY, a program for student s who were identified as gifted and talented in the
arts, and The Connecticut Park Center School. The ARTS team members were selected
as those who had been in the program for the longest time. Original team members were
Ms.Papish, Ms Gainer, and Ms. Jones, while Ms. Harris joined the program in 1976 and
Ms.Weincek in 1986.
It was difficult to find classroom teachers to interview, largely because of the vast
turnover in the location of teachers in the schools. Both teachers who were interviewed
had taken the in-service course and had received two years of classroom service by
ARTS team members. Four other classroom teachers were contacted by posting a
paragraph in the Superintendents Bulletin, a weekly paper distributed to all personnel in
the Montgomery County School System, asking for an e-mail response. Of these four,
two (Ellie Shutak and Carolyn Potto) reported that they were still using lessons and
teaching strategies that they had learned through working with Interrelated ARTS
teachers.
Because the perspectives of all the subjects interviewed were so different, the
questions had to be broad enough to include as much of their individual recollections as
possible. The following questions were asked:
Describe your personal involvement in Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.
What was your role?
What changes occurred in the program while you were a part of it?
What do you recall was the rationale for the change?
What in your opinion were the most important factors leading to the longevity of
the program?
Following their completion, the researcher sent chapters 5 and 6 to the former
coordinator, Dr. Richardson, and to two former team members, Merle Weincek and Janis
Jones, to confirm the validity of the reported history.


80
6+1 then 1+6
7+1 then 1+7
8+1 then 1+8 (some students may be able to figure out that 4+4 also works here)
9+1 then 1+9 (5+5 also works here)
5. Sing the story again and add this new way to count.
Elaboration:
The following chant is over 100 years old. American slave children would say
this as a hand clapping game.
Old ark she reeled, old ark she rocked
Old ark she sittin on the mountain top


TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS iii
ABSTRACT vi
CHAPTER
1 INTRODUCTION 1
Purpose 1
Research Questions 1
Rationale 2
Theoretical Framework 3
Context 4
Limitations 8
Definitions of Terms 9
2 REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE 10
Historical Trends of Arts in Schools 10
Program Development and Evaluation 20
Effectiveness of Arts in General Education 25
3 METHODOLOGY 31
Design of the Study 31
Procedures/Instrumentation 33
4 PROGRAM HISTORY 39
Project ARTS: The Beginning 39
Interrelated ARTS 49
5 FINDINGS 60
Recommendations for Program Implementation 61
Longevity 61
Quality 64
Feasibility 66
iv


APPENDIX A
ESEA TITLE III PROJECT ARTS FUNDING


34
Interviews were conducted with ARTS team members, classroom teachers,
administrators, and subject area specialists who were involved with the program.
Interviewing began with locating those who were either involved with a specific aspect
of the program such as TAPESTRY, or ARTS team members who had been with the
program for many years. This required several trips to Maryland in order to conduct
interviews in person. When it wasnt possible to conduct an interview in person it was
conducted by e-mail or telephone. The in-person interviews were tape recorded and later
transcribed. The subjects interviewed included:
The first coordinator of Project ARTS, who later became County Coordinator of
the Department of Aesthetic Education, Richard Pioli.
The author of the original grant, who was coordinator of Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS for five years, Janet Pitt Brome.
The two subsequent coordinators, the second of whom was with the program until
it ended, Eoline Kukuk Cary and Dr. Aim Richardson.
The coordinator of the Gifted and Talented Program in Montgomery County
Schools, Dr. Waveline Starnes.
Former science teacher who worked with Interrelated ARTS at the Connecticut
Park Center School and is now Science Coordinator in Montgomery County
Public Schools, William MacDonald
Five ARTS team members whose total experience in the program adds up to 75
years. These include: Jane Schisgall Papish,drama; Ruth Straus Gainer, visual art;
Janis Jones, music; Nancy Harris and Merle Weincek, dance.
Two classroom teachers who had received service from Interrelated ARTS for
two years each, Marie Sipple and Carole Blackwell.
These people were selected for several reasons. The first coordinator and
subsequent coordinators had the most comprehensive knowledge of the inner workings of
the program. Two (Dr. Starnes and Mr. MacDonald) were directly involved in the
implementation of programs developed as part of Interrelated ARTS. These were


29
teaching the basics. The importance of learning in both arts and academics needs to be
emphasized (Barrett, McCoy, and Veblen 1997). In a symposium on the integration of
the arts in the curriculum, Bresler (1995) describes four different models of integration.
These include 1) subservient, where the arts are used to lend interest or to spice up
other subjects, 2) social integration, where the arts serve as the social functioning of a
school, 3) affective, where the arts emphasize attitudes and feelings, and 4) co-equal,
which integrates the curriculum with arts-specific contents, skills, expressions, and
modes of thinking. A model program will identify relationships among subjects and
involve both classroom and arts teachers to plan curricula and collaborate on its delivery
(Fowler, McMullan, and McLaughlin 1991). There is a paucity of information, though,
on how this goal may best be accomplished. It is not clear how to build an understanding
of the arts at a time when public media indicates that school system budgets are
shrinking, and much attention seems to be given to the acquisition and testing of the
essential skills of reading, writing, and mathematics. A study summary published by
The National Endowment for the Arts (1991) includes several guidelines for
implementing an arts education model. Among these are:
Both the arts and other disciplines must have strength and integrity.
The model must be whole-school oriented.
Teachers must be active participants in learning about and developing the model
and the role of the arts (Fowler and McMullan 1991).
For teachers to fully integrate the arts into a classroom environment, a specific
plan needs to be in place to enable them to acquire not only the knowledge but also the
confidence necessary to implement it. Such a plan will differ from district to district, but
it should include answers to the following questions:
What teaching and learning experiences are necessary to assist classroom teachers
in the use of arts in the classroom?


PROJECT ARTS/INTERRELATED ARTS FROM 1973 TO 1995:
A SUCCESSFUL PROGRAM FOR ARTS IN GENERAL EDUCATION
THERES MORE THAN ONE WAY TO MAKE AN A
By
ELIZABETH ADAMS
A DISSERTATION PRESENTED TO THE GRADUATE SCHOOL
OF THE UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT
OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA
2002

To Dr. Phyllis E. Dorman,
Mentor and Friend

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Many individuals have assisted in this research. First, I owe a great deal to my
sister, Dr. Catherine Adams. I thank her for her editing skills, for retyping seemingly
endless versions of this document, and for her patience. I deeply appreciate the patience
and skill of librarians Robena Cornwell and Michele Wilbank-Fox. I thank them for
helping me find everything I needed.
I am extremely grateful for the guidance of the chairman of my Graduate
Committee, Dr. Charles Hoffer. I benefitted from his expertise and encouragement and
also from that of my other committee members in the School of Music, Dr. Timothy
Brophy, Dr. David Kushner, and Dr. Camille Smith. To my outside committee member,
Dr. Linda Lamme, I offer particular thanks for her encouragement and direction. I
consider it a great honor to have worked with these truly exceptional educators.
Several of my former colleagues in Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS were
particularly helpful in providing detailed information about how the program worked.
These include Dr. Ann Richardson, former coordinator of the program, Betty Weincek,
dance specialist, and Janis Jones, music specialist.
Finally, I am extremely grateful for the support and encouragement of my
husband, Dr. David Young.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS iii
ABSTRACT vi
CHAPTER
1 INTRODUCTION 1
Purpose 1
Research Questions 1
Rationale 2
Theoretical Framework 3
Context 4
Limitations 8
Definitions of Terms 9
2 REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE 10
Historical Trends of Arts in Schools 10
Program Development and Evaluation 20
Effectiveness of Arts in General Education 25
3 METHODOLOGY 31
Design of the Study 31
Procedures/Instrumentation 33
4 PROGRAM HISTORY 39
Project ARTS: The Beginning 39
Interrelated ARTS 49
5 FINDINGS 60
Recommendations for Program Implementation 61
Longevity 61
Quality 64
Feasibility 66
iv

6
CONCLUSIONS
69
Summary 69
Implications 70
Recommendations for Further Study 72
APPENDIX
A ESEA TITLE III PROJECT ARTS FUNDING 75
B LESSON PLAN 79
C CURRICULUM RESOURCE PACKAGE 81
D DARTS LESSON 92
REFERENCES 95
BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH 103
v

Abstract of Dissertation Presented to the Graduate School
of the University of Florida in Partial Fulfillment of the
Requirements for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy
PROJECT ARTS/INTERRELATED ARTS FROM 1973 TO 1995:
A SUCCESSFUL PROGRAM FOR ARTS IN GENERAL EDUCATION
THERES MORE THAN ONE WAY TO MAKE AN A
By
Elizabeth Adams
December 2002
Chair: Dr. Charles Hoffer
Major Department: Music
This study reviews the implementation and progress of a project integrating the
four art forms (music, dance, visual art, and drama) into general education curricula. The
program, known as Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS, existed from 1973 to 1995 in the
Montgomery County, Maryland school system. The study uses interviews, personal
recollections, and existing documents to determine why this program lasted so much
longer than most arts-in-general-education programs. Its description is offered as a
potential guideline for those wishing to replicate, approximate, and/or support similar
programs.
Interview data, formal reports, reflective observations, and photographs are
presented to describe and evaluate the program. Conclusions review factors related to its
quality, feasibility, and longevity. Finally, implications for replicating such a program
and for further study are presented.
vi

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
During the early 1970s there was a swell of interest in introducing art in general
education programs. The Education Amendments of 1974 provided $750,000 for funds
designed to assist state and local education agencies in integrating the arts into general
education (Rogers 1977). In January 1978, the Music Educators Journal devoted an
entire issue to some of these programs, many of which are described later in this study.
The average length of these programs was from 2 to 5 years. The Project ARTS/
Interrelated ARTS program in the Montgomery County, Maryland schools existed for
over 20 years. This study presents an arts-in-general-education program from inception
to demise.
Purpose
The purpose of this study is to examine a program (Project ARTS/Interrelated
ARTS) that existed for more than 20 years and to analyze the factors that contributed to
its longevity. It is hoped that such an examination will provide guidelines for educators
who wish to replicate, approximate, or support similar programs.
Research Questions
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was a remarkable program that introduced the
arts into general education in Montgomery County, Maryland, from 1973 to 1995. The
program, which endured for 23 years, warrants investigation to determine how and why it
was successful.
1

2
The overall question this research proposes to answer, then, is what are the
attributes of a successful interrelated arts program ? More specifically, because this
program lasted for more than 20 years, what major factors led to the longevity of this
program? Another important question is, How did this program achieve the quality that
led to its longevity? A final question is, How was this program able to maintain the
funding necessary for it to operate for such a long period of time? This study addressed
these primary research questions.
Rationale
Although there seems to be an increase in the body of literature concerning the
value of interrelating arts and academic skills, little attention has been paid to the manner
in which this interrelation may be best accomplished. Support and training in the arts for
classroom teachers is, at best, a random commodity in most school systems. Curricula
come and go at an alarming rate, and arts-in-general-education programs are no
exception. Information on factors that contributed to the longevity of Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS may assist other curriculum designers in planning arts-in-
general-education programs. Theories as to the and longevity of the program are
examined in light of data collected from documents, interviews, and personal
recollections.
Schools are often burdened with increasingly greater expectations; yet at the same
time they are criticized for producing graduates who are not able to read, write, or
calculate on a sufficiently high level to hold jobs or become productive community
citizens. Periodically, school districts try to fix the problem of lower test scores with a
back to basics movement. This movement is usually defined as reducing frills
(including art and music). Remer (1996) claims that for the arts to be considered a basic

3
part of the core curriculum, educators must find ways to improve the publics perception
of the educational importance of the arts. To accomplish this, it is apparent that teachers
and administrators of public schools will need to continually confront the problem of
how they relate to the community as represented by school boards, local political groups,
state legislators, and the voting public.
Because proficiency in the basic skills is a priority for school systems, one
frequently encounters the belief that any school activity that takes time away from the
study of reading, writing, and mathematics will interfere with the ability of students to
reach acceptable achievement levels. It seems, however, that more of the same kind of
instruction in these skills fails to produce improvement. Despite the problems of arts
gamering less importance in schools, there appears to be a movement led by teachers
who have discovered the power of integrating the arts into their teaching either in
partnership with arts specialists or (by necessity) on their own (Shepherd 1999). These
teachers need help answering the questions Why teach the arts? and Precisely what
should be taught? and perhaps most important of all, How should this be done?
(Cornett 1999).
Theoretical Framework
Change theory provides a logical framework for this study. Change CAN occur
in many ways When change occurs within a system, such as a school system, it is a
process; not an event. A change will cause a ripple effect throughout the system
(Persichette 1999). This may be categorized as a diffusion, or a process by which
innovation is communicated through various channels over a period of time (Rogers
1995). A change framework may be summarized as follows. A change agent wishes to
communicate an innovation to an intended adopter. This is accomplished by using a

4
change process that establishes a channel through the change environment (Ellsworth
2000). In the case of Project ARTS, the group called Concerned Citizens for the Arts
may be viewed as the change agent, and the adopter was Montgomery County School
System, which acquired the funds to implement the program. A program to implement
such a change needs administrative support, a curricular design that includes some
flexibility, and teacher commitment (Ruccius 1994).These factors were all included in
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.
Context
Hallinger and Murphy (1986) state that schools can be understood only in
context. Ideas, people and events cannot be understood if isolated from their contexts.
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was a program that was conceived and implemented in
Montgomery County, Maryland. Therefore, a brief history of the political, economic and
educational development of the county is offered to provide a contextual background for
the program.
The Montgomery County Public School system is in an area known as a bedroom
community for the federal government. Following the lead of federal agencies, a number
of corporations (mostly in the areas of research and development and high technology)
moved into the county. This led to the growth of a prosperous area where community
residents had high incomes, academic training, and economic opportunity. Because
continuous funding for Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was a major reason for its
longevity, it is important to note that this program existed in an economically stable
environment.

5
Growth of Montgomery County
Montgomery County, Maryland was largely a farming county until after the Civil
War when the farmland character of the county slowly changed to suburban. The first
countywide educational system was established in 1860. By 1920, 80% of the county was
still used for dairy farming. As the nations capital grew, so did the surrounding
community, and with this growth came the need for planning and control. Soon, federal
employees and professionals were seeking residences outside of Washington DC, but
within easy commuting distance.
The period between the two world wars brought dramatic increases in population
as federal government agencies expanded into the county. These agencies included the
Naval Medical Center, Taylor Naval Research and Development Center, the National
Institutes of Health, and Walter Reed Hospital. By the beginning of 1941, there were
167, 063 white students and 2,044 black students in the Montgomery County Public
School System. In the next 50 years the population expanded to 10 times this number.
By the end of the twentieth century, approximately 850,000 people lived in Montgomery
County. The county became a prosperous suburb of the District of Columbia, and also the
home of many high technological and biotechnological industries as well as expanded
Federal agencies such as the Department of Energy and the National Bureau of Standards
(Sween 1984).
By the early 1950s, the annual budget of Montgomery County Public Schools
(MCPS) had passed $20 million, with some 40,000 students attending schools there.
Throughout the 1950s, the school population grew by about 5,000 students a year, and
the county built 50 new elementary schools and rebuilt or enlarged several others.
During the same period, MCPS opened eight large high schools and a dozen junior highs.

6
In 1970 there was a lower-than-expected enrollment in the elementary schools, which
resulted in the closing of some of the smaller schools. Due to the rapid growth of
industry, much of the farmland in the eastern part of the county had by this time
disappeared.
Racial segregation ended officially in 1954, and along with the issues of school
closings came problems of racially unbalanced schools. This situation was partially
solved by redrawing school boundaries and by pairing mainly white and mainly black
schools, with one building and staff handling lower grades of both populations and
another handling the upper grades. Another problem was the increasing number of
children from homes where English was not the primary language. The establishment of
English for Speakers of Other Languages (ESOL) helped more than 7,500 students, most
of whom were Asian or Hispanic.
By 1990, public school enrollment in MCPS was over 100,000 and climbing
steadily. Most of the population growth took place in the northern part of the county,
largely due to the enlargement and improvement of Interstate 270. Between 1985 and
1999, MCPS built 38 new schools, modernized another 50, and was using more than 250
portable classrooms to relieve overcrowding at a number of schools. At this point, the
total included 23 high schools, 32 middle schools, and 123 elementary schools. The
system was hiring 1,000 new teachers each year, and the annual cost of public education
passed the one billion dollar level, or about 45% of the total county budget (Sween and
Offutt 1999).
Background of the Project ARTS /Interrelated ARTS Program
In Montgomery County, in 1973, a group of citizens (Concerned Citizens for the
Arts in the Public Schools) met with the County Board of Education to discuss the

7
limitations of the countys existing arts programs. As a result of this meeting, the School
Board appointed a Task Force on the arts to study the existing arts program. At this time
most elementary schools had full or part time teachers in both music and visual art, but
students were receiving 40 minutes a week (or less) of instruction in these subjects. The
major recommendation was to begin an intensive staff development effort in the arts to
assist classroom teachers in implementing arts, arts-related curriculum, and integrated
arts experiences in their classrooms. The Task Force also recommended making dance
and drama (previously excluded) an integral part of the arts program at the elementary
school level.
The group submitted a proposal for classroom-teacher training in the arts to
Elementary and Secondary Education Act (ESEA) Title III that was approved for Federal
Government funding in 1974. Both Montgomery County Public Schools and ESEA Title
III funds supported the project that was first known as Projects ARTS (Arts Resource
Teams in the School). Additional grants were received from the United States Office of
Education through the Alliance for Arts Education and the National Committee, Arts for
the Handicapped (Office of Education 1977).
Initially, Project ARTS was a 3-year pilot program intended to be fully
incorporated into the local school system. It was not designed to take the place of
specific art and music specialists. The program serviced 18 pilot schools, and in
compliance with federal guidelines, also served two parochial schools and two schools in
St. Marys County. The project was designed to provide assistance, training, and support
to classroom teachers in an interrelated arts approach to learning. Throughout its
existence, the program witnessed many changes. Some of these changes reflected current
trends in education at the time they were instituted (such as working with special

8
populations, establishing a program for gifted and talented students, and moving the
focus to middle schools). Others were the result of diminishing funding for arts-related
programs as computers became more visible in the schools.
A variety of inservice courses may be taken in Montgomery County for
recertification or for masters equivalency. Consequently, the arts teams taught an
inservice course for teachers, principals, and specialists. The course was then designated
as required for a teacher to receive full service from the arts team. Full service consisted
of the teacher working one-on-one with one of each of the four arts specialists for a total
of four semesters.
Limitations
The original program was designed for a particular time and geographic location.
Although the findings of the present study are therefore relevant to a specific time and
place, many aspects of the program (such as teacher in-service or procuring of funds)
may be adapted by other populations. The validity and reliability of qualitative data do
not need to meet the rigor of precision associated with quantitative data (Phelps, Ferrara,
and Goolsby 1993). Methods of data collection in this study include observation,
interview, and record review. These methods involve subjective analysis. Therefore,
findings are subject to the limitations common to all qualitative data.
Delimitations built in to the design of this study include the fact that it is specific
to one program that existed in one school system during one time period. An additional
delimitation is the fact that no evaluations were made that concerned student
achievement, although evaluations of student achievement in other programs are
reported.

9
Definitions of Terms
The following terms are intended to convey the meanings defined below:
The Arts: Music, drama, visual art, and dance.
ARTS: An acronym for Arts Resource Teams in Schools
Arts Education: A program that includes all four art forms
Department of Aesthetic Education: In Montgomery County Schools,
education in and through the arts including visual art; general,
instrumental, and choral music; dance; and drama
Gifted and Talented: Students identified as gifted and talented in one or
more art form by teacher-designed testing instruments.
Interrelated Arts (no acronym): In the context of Montgomery County
Schools, one or more art forms used as a strategy to teach academic skills
Interrelated ARTS (acronym): The name of the arts in general-education
program in Montgomery County, Maryland
Project ARTS: The name of the arts-in-general-education program for the
first three years of its existence.
Special Needs Students: Students requiring either a special classroom
situation or their own schools to help with various needs such as
developmental, orthopedic, sensory, etc

CHAPTER 2
REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE
A review of the literature related to the history of the arts in the school classroom
throughout the United States follows. I describe programs developed during the last
decades of the last century, noting how such programs became relevant to the use of arts
in classroom teaching. Finally, I present empirical studies relevant to the topic of
integrating arts into general curricula.
Historical Trends of Arts in Schools
Aesthetic education began to gain some presence in the schools in the 1960s
when Karel (1966) noted a definite need for an arts curriculum in teacher education.
Nevertheless, although United States competitiveness stressed the values of problem
solving, higher order thinking skills, risk taking, team work, and creativity, society in
general seemed to remain oblivious to the fact that arts are more than a frill or source
of entertainment (Hanna 1992).
In 1962 President Kennedy appointed Francis Keppel as Commissioner of
Education. He also appointed Kathryn Bloom as Director of Cultural Affairs. By 1965
these appointments led to the development of the Arts and Humanities Program. Keppel
was an eloquent advocate of the arts in education. The year 1965 became significant for
arts education when the passing of The Elementary and Secondary Education Act
(ESEA) further legitimized arts and humanities education. The National Endowment of
the Arts and the National Endowment for the Humanities were also founded in 1965. By
10

11
1966, an estimated $100 million (mostly under ESEA titles) dealt in some way with arts
education. Money from the Arts and Humanities Program backed many programs to
introduce theater and dance to school curricula and did much to strengthen all the arts in
general education (Murphy and Jones 1976).
Even so, little concern was given to the concept of classroom teachers providing
arts programs or relating arts to academic curriculum before the 1970s. Some schools
employed music specialists, but they were usually responsible for so many students that
ongoing programs were difficult to maintain. Reynolds (1966), for example, described
teaching a 30-minute lesson each week to 40 classes. She also complained of no
carryover or reinforcement, of all classes using the same text, and of classroom teachers
remaining in their rooms rather than participating in the lessons.
New Directions
There was a great expansion of support for the arts in the 1970s. This expansion
was indicated by greatly augmented levels of both private and public spending in the arts
(Blau 1989). In the mid 1970s there was some impact on teacher training programs that
could be attributed to increasing awareness of the value of integrating arts and
academics.
By that time, arts educators recognized a need for a balanced curriculum in
elementary education that developed all the sensory and cognitive capacities of children
and that used all of the modes of expression possible to human beings (Eisner 1978).
Broudy (1978) told educators that the case for arts education depends on what art can do
to clarify and enrich experience that other subjects in the curriculum cannot. He
indicated that arts are basic, that the aesthetic response is indispensable to all experience,
and that instruction in the aesthetic response is basic and necessary (Broudy 1978).

12
An early constructive step to bring the arts into the mainstream of American
education was the Central Midwestern Regional Educational Laboratory (CEMREL).
Working with school systems, colleges, universities, and arts organization in the country,
CEMREL developed eight Aesthetic Education Learning Centers. These centers were
designed to provide curricular support to cooperating school systems, to bring together
agencies and their resources, and to provide aesthetic education programs for local
schools and communities. The centers were also planned to provide teacher education,
develop aesthetic education curricula suited to each cooperating system, and be
applicable to other systems nationwide (Rockefeller 1977).
In January 1978, the Music Educators Journal published a special issue dedicated
to arts in general education. In the opening article Wenner (1978, p 28) said, Arts in
general education is a comprehensive approach to reducing the isolation that the arts
have suffered from for far too many years. Fowler (1978) suggested filtering arts
through the entire curriculum as a way to put arts to obvious educational use. Fowler
(1978) also noted that when the arts function to enhance general education, they promote
a strong argument for their educational usefulness.
Since much of the burden for implementation of arts education falls to the
classroom teacher, it is necessary to provide inservice education for both administrators
and teachers to help them understand the arts processes and their application (Fowler
1978). In addition to dedication and assistance from educators, such programs also
require financial support. The National Alliance for Arts Education in Washington DC,
founded in 1973, proved to be a great help in assisting state and local education agencies
in integrating arts into general education. The goals of the alliance were threefold:

13
To facilitate a network for communication and cooperation among arts and
education groups and agencies
To provide at the Kennedy Center and elsewhere arts education programs that can
be showcased and transported as models for both the arts and education
communities
To provide technical assistance (Rogers 1978, p 40).
Support of arts in general education continued in the 1970s. The Arts in General
Education Program (AIE) of the Rockefeller Foundation, with support from the Junior
League, supported five pilot schools that developed in-service courses in the arts. The
arts as processes are vital to education because mental growth is dependent on
developing the perceptual skills within each of us. AIE switches emphasis from products
to process (Fowler 1979, pp 8-9).
The decade between 1967 and 1977 also saw a rise in the publics desire for more
emphasis on basic education. Troubled by statistics that indicated a deterioration in the
school populations ability to read and write, the public lined up behind a back to
basics movement (Goodlad 1980). Another concern was that scheduling left little time
for specialists to plan with classroom teachers to relate the arts to subjects being taught.
Many specialists were suspicious of relating arts to other subjects and feared that the arts
would be diluted. Furthermore, it was thought best that teachers not teach outside their
discipline; and if the arts were used only to illustrate other subject areas, the value of
correlation would be open to question (Wenner 1976).
Changes in the 1980s
By 1980, Federal and State support of the arts had grown from 18 million to 145
million dollars (Blau 1989), but Federal programs in arts education were seriously
undermined and perhaps effectively eliminated by the Education Consolidation Act of

14
1981. Without encouragement of the arts at the Federal level, many states (particularly
those with budget deficits) withdrew their support of arts programs. A Back to Basics
movement in the late 1970s resulted, in the opinion of Efland (1978), in the teaching of
fragmented bits and pieces of knowledge, and was thought to result in a general dumbing
down of schooling. Critics of education suggested that the frills, defined differently by
different people according to their biases, should be sacrificed so that greater time,
money, and effort could be applied to the basics (i.e., reading, writing, and mathematics)
(Turner 1984). Efland (1990) later suggested that educational behaviorists at this time did
not return to the past, but instead imposed a set of technocratic controls on classroom
practices that bored many students and limited the options of teachers, who then had to
primarily teach material covered on standardized tests. Between 1977 and 1987, an
increasing emphasis on tests such as the Standard Achievement Test was believed to
have pushed the arts back to the educational periphery (Fowler 1988). By the end of the
1970s, many of the special programs and projects in the arts, including CEMRAL and the
Arts in Education Program of the JDR 3 rd Fund had ceased to exist.
In 1982, the Illinois Alliance for Arts Education and that states Board of
Education produced a document on arts education that was meant to be part of Illinois
5-year comprehensive arts plan. Along with articles on the importance of arts education
published by Eisner (1978), Broudy (1978), Fowler (1979), and others, Bealmer (1982)
presented descriptions of six arts forms with examples of model programs.
One agency formed in 1982 was the Getty Center for Education in the Arts. Its
main activity was to develop discipline-based visual arts programs in schools. Whether
or not one subscribes to the specific outlines of the discipline-based model, this
organization had a significant effect on the entire field of the arts (Fowler 1988).

15
In the late 1970s and early 1980s, a professor at the Harvard Graduate School of
Education developed a theory of cognitive development. Culminating in the 1993
publication of Frames of Mind, Howard Gardners theories of multiple intelligences
provided a significant impact on arts education. Gardners (1993) theory is based on a
radically different view of the mind that yields a different view of school. It is a
pluralistic view that recognizes many different and discrete facets of cognition and
acknowledges that people have different cognitive strengths and styles. Gardners theory
suggests some obvious linkage with the arts. A focus on the first two areas
(verbal/sequential and quantitative/ mathematical) comprises the greatest part of the
school day. However the five other intelligences (musical, visual/spatial,
physical/kinesthetic, knowledge about self and knowledge about others) may be directly
related to arts instruction. The Galef Institute, a nonprofit organization founded in 1989
by business leader Andrew G. Galef and his wife, draws extensively on Gardners
theories. The Galef Institute focuses on an interdisciplinary curriculum taught by Galef-
trained arts specialists and is used in many socially and economically challenged school
districts throughout the country.
Despite these differing ways of viewing intelligence, a decline in the Scholastic
Aptitude Test scores of high school students in the 1980s resulted in highly publicized
reports concerning weaknesses in American education. The best known of these, A
Nation at Risk (National Commission on Excellence in Education 1983), declared that
the lack of academic rigor in schools should be corrected by more demanding academic
requirements. In response, many states increased the number of courses required for
high school graduation and, in turn, reduced the number of electives offered. The arts
were considered at the bottom of a list of desirable subjects and were linked with

16
vocational education (Hoffer 1993). Elementary school teachers saw themselves as
responsible for covering a years work with a class, and their education programs tended
to reinforce this view. Goodlad (1980) suggested that if (as is frequently the case) the
malfunctioning culture of school begs attention, the same culture rarely encourages and
supports what is needed to change.
Concern with back to basics of the 1980s continued to be a difficult problem
for arts educators and their supporters to ignore. The prescription of the philosophy
consisted of more math, science, and homework, fewer frill courses, and increased
discipline (Klimpton 1985).
Fowler (1988) was concerned with rescuing the arts for Americas children.
The near universal lack of sufficient arts in the preparation of classroom teachers
is historic practice bordering on scandal. .. Given the pressures for achievement
in reading, mathematics, and other subjects in the compulsory curriculum,
classroom teachers simply do not value the arts sufficiently enough to give them
priority attention. Too many education administrators and school boards seem
quite content to look the other way. They dump the full responsibility for art
instruction on classroom teachers in spite of their inadequacies, and they quite
consistently fail to understand the indispensable role of the arts specialists in
assuring that this responsibility is realized (Fowler 1988, p 154).
In an address given on September 16,1988 at the Montgomery County Board of
Education retreat, Ann Richardson said that much of what is presently described in
curricula for schools falls into narrow academic guidelines. Very little in teaching is
concerned with interpretation, transformation, synthesis or new ideas (Richardson 1988).
Changing Trends
Toward the end of the 1980s, immense acceleration in the growth of knowledge
and significant advances in technology prompted a growing recognition that education
must be more than the mere acquisition of facts. No one denied that verbal and
mathematical skills are basic. No one argued that children must be taught to read and to

17
add, but many believed that the teaching of these skills had limited effectiveness.
Americans want quality education in their schools. Quality education means total
education, and total education means using every possible means to teach: not just
reading and writing and calculating, but also feeling, moving, dancing, improvising, and
creating (Kiester 1985, p 27).
Barry (1988) noted that with budget cuts giving classroom teachers sole
responsibility for arts education, it would be necessary to provide proactive advocacy for
full-time arts educators and comprehensive and in-depth instruction in the arts. He also
suggested that attention be given to educating classroom teachers, preparing them to
serve as arts instructors and also as advocates for arts education (Barry 1998). Instead of
school arts programs being confined to essential vocational training, there appeared to
be a need to promote curriculum building that is more rooted in culture. An
interdisciplinary arts program is not believed to be a substitute for discrete learning of the
various arts. However, applying a study of arts as a process for investigation and sharing
worlds of leaning can serve to pull students into subject matter and give them ownership
of it. In this way, as Fowler (1996) noted, learning becomes more inwardly directed and
gives students more excitement and personal involvement.
Gradually the concerns of advocates for arts education began to be given more
credence. In an article concerning music education in the United States, Fowler (1988)
noted that:
Music is a natural adjunct to the study of history and peoples. Its very nature
dictates that it have a place in these studies. It is difficult to understand how
social studies can be taught effectively without incorporating the arts, because
these symbolic systems can invoke periods and peoples in a way that words alone
cannot (Fowler 1988, p 154).

18
Integrating music within other subject areas is advantageous from a broad
educational perspective. Using a subject such as music that evokes many positive
feelings as a means of educating in other areas could well result in a much higher degree
of understanding in those areas.
From a music teaching perspective, I believe there would be much to be gained
by Integrating music with other core subjects. Such integration would not be
difficult and might well solve many of the attitudinal problems teachers encounter
when they try to teach music (Baker 1990, pp 11-18).
Many have also written eloquently of the beneficial effects of interrelating all of
the arts within the general curriculum. It has been noted that when a subject is related to
other aspects of life, student interest and comprehension are enhanced (Lindsay 1978).
Geoghegan (1994) suggested that educators have the capacity and responsibility to work
toward a cross disciplinary approach that will help every child in every school to feel the
tingle of truthful engagement that a holistic approach to education can bring.
Geoghegan (1994) also noted that this approach applies whether through drama, dance,
music, or visual art. Goldberg (1997) also suggested that the arts serve as a strategy for
learning, and that using the arts in this way expands traditional teaching methods into an
imaginative forum for exploration of subject matter. Simply teaching about the arts, then,
can be transformed into opportunities for students to apply their ideas in creative ways
(Goldberg 1997).
Still, difficulties remained. Eisner (1992) noted that prevailing conceptions of the
arts are based on a massive misunderstanding of the role of arts in human development
and in education. There is no more telling indicator of that importance than the time that
is allocated to them. Arts get approximately two hours a week in elementary schools and
are not required at all at the secondary level (Eisner 1992).

19
Nevertheless, arts advocacy progressed. By 1994 the Music Educators
National.Conference (MENC) as the contracting agency published a description and
standards of the school music program that defined quality music programs as providing
daily instruction to each student in kindergarten through sixth grade. The
recommendation was that this instruction was best provided by music specialists, but
should be assisted by the classroom teacher who would continue to use music activities
between visits from the specialist. MENC further recommended that each child from
kindergarten through third grade have music experiences in school for a total of no less
than 100 minutes a week and that children in grades four through six have no less
thanl 50 minutes of music per week. A quality program would provide 150 minutes of
music per week in kindergarten through third grade and 200 minutes in grades four
through six (National standards for arts education 1994). The obvious implication was
that classroom teachers, as well as specialists, needed to be effective in providing music
experiences in the elementary grades.
These were the first of a set of national voluntary curriculum standards for what
children should know and be able to do in dance, music, theater, and visual art, and the
standards were presented to the Secretary of Education. They were passed by Congress
and signed by President William J. Clinton in March 1994. These standards are
significant in that they not only expect students to create and perform in the arts, but to
understand the entire body of work that comprises our intellectual and cultural heritage
(Williams 1995). Since these standards, both national and state, represent a profession
wide consensus, they have a greater impact on school administrators, school board
members, and other interested persons (Hoffer 1994). Still, it remains doubtful how

20
many school pupils are actually receiving the kind of consistent and sequential exposure
to the arts that can produce real results.
By 1996, the Kennedy Center had launched a national drive to push the benefits
of the arts in the schools. According to the Chairman of the center Roger L. Stevens, the
purpose of the initiative is to integrate the arts and arts education into the lives of every
American student (Trescott 1996).
Program Development and Evaluation
Throughout all of this time, a variety of arts education programs were in existence
at various locations in the United States, but with little commonality in the basic
structure. Each curricular design was geared to the interests and needs of an individual
school or school district. In a survey of 27 programs, Lee (1985) found that arts
education programs occurred both within and outside the school setting. They usually
received outside financial assistance, lasted one to five years, and became more internal
only when their funding was included as part of the school budget.
Program Descriptions
Goodlad (1977) surveyed extant programs in arts instruction in the United States
and made observations in 200 classrooms, 67 schools, and 13 major population centers. It
was noted that arts instruction was included in kindergarten but fell off rapidly after that.
Classroom teachers (who were thought to have a limited interest in the arts and to be
inadequately trained to teach them) taught 90% of elementary school arts (Goodlad
1977).
Several representative examples of arts in education programs that began in the
1970s are identified here as more or less typical. Some were rigorously evaluated. When
that is the case, empirical evidence is cited. Funding sources are reported where relevant.

21
The Arts in Basic Curriculum (ABC) in Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools
in North Carolina involved five voluntary pilot schools with the understanding that the
faculty of each school would develop its own arts program. Subjective observations by
the reporters include the following: The impact of the program was that: the climate of
the school changed, a humanistic concept of education took root, and principals, teachers,
and administrators worked more as a team. In addition, teachers became more involved
in the planning process, the arts took a rightful and meaningful place in the total
curriculum, and children exhibited the joy of leaning (Carter and Adams 1978).
The Open City Project in East Harlem was a project in which students in an early
childhood center participated in cultural and in non-arts theme events that were teacher-
evaluated. Additional evaluations included information tests, attitudinal scales for parents
and teachers, content analysis of curriculum materials, and video tapes of student
behavior, as well as pre- and post-test administration of the Stanford Early School
Achievement Test. Children in the project showed considerable growth in the first seven
months of the program, with rates that were significantly higher than those of the control
group. Children who participated in the Open City Program raised their total reading
scores to the national average (Baker 1978).
Project SEARCH in New York State was a program aimed toward reorienting
teachers attitudes towards the arts. The state department of education encouraged
school districts in rural, suburban and urban communities to develop comprehensive arts
programs. Five school districts were chosen, and more than 20,000 teachers from both
parochial and public schools were involved in the project. Data from a comprehensive
evaluation clearly demonstrated a significant difference in attitudes toward learning
between students in the arts in education classrooms and students in control classrooms.

22
The attitude data were gathered through video-tape interaction analysis, semantic
differentials, and Likert scales. Neither the teacher training nor in-service components
were described (Trupia 1978).
A program that seemed most similar to Montgomery County Project ARTS was
the Arts in Education Program in Jefferson County, Colorado (JEFFCO). Beginning in
1971, JEFFCO was a three-year program created for grades kindergarten through 12 with
objectives to enhance instruction in basic studies with interdisciplinary arts-related
activities. The program included an innovative staff development program charged with
developing strategies for incorporating the arts into basic curriculum using an
interdisciplinary approach. The JEFFCO Program was designed to function as an in-
service training project. Principals, teachers, and curriculum coordinators participated in
workshops and individual study to learn arts skills and methods of applying them in
classrooms. Classroom teachers and arts specialists attended workshops after school
hours and on weekends. Teachers were given released time, graduate level college credit,
and credit for advancement on the salary scale. The workshops covered all of the subject
areas at all grade levels. Funding was provided by the J.D. Rockefeller 3rd Foundation,
The Alliance for Arts Education, The National Committee of Arts for the Handicapped,
and CEMRELs Aesthetic Education Learning Center Program, along with joint funding
by the John F. Kennedy Center of Performing Arts and the Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare (Allison 1978).
A program, begun in 1979 and existing for three years in the District of Columbia
public school system, was located at the Region C Education Center at Bunker Hill in
Washington DC. Although no outside sources provided funding in the first year, funding
through Title IV began in the 1980-81 school year. The program was modeled on the

23
Interrelated ARTS program in Montgomery County. The DC program began with a part-
time project director and five arts team members, two in drama, and one each in the other
art-forms. The teachers who participated in the program took an in-service course and
received demonstration lessons in their classrooms. Those who completed the in-service
course received either college or recertification credit. An evaluation model
implemented by the Division of Quality Assurance of the DC Public Schools, (1982)
required Arts team members to administer tests to a sample of 271 students. Significant t
scores suggested that students performed better following the program (Department of
Health, Education, and Welfare, National Institute of Education 1982)
Another program, developed in New York City, Learning Through an Expanded
Arts Program (LEAP), was developed by a non-profit educational organization and
served over 400,000 students. In this program, 85 consultants and many professional
artists and musicians worked with classroom teachers from kindergarten to grade eight,
teaching language arts, math skills, and other academic subjects through a variety of
modalities. Standard evaluations of LEAP in a typical district showed that the program
was quite successful. Of the students participating in the basic program, 93.4% developed
a better understanding of the subject matter, and 97% of the teachers said that they would
repeat the arts programs that were developed by the professional artists and musicians
(Dean and Gross 1992).
Aaron (1994) described music teachers use of production, perception, and
reflection activities in a program suggested by educational psychologist Jean Piaget. Arts
PROPEL, a high school arts program, was designed and implemented by Harvard Project
Zero, the Educational Testing Service, and the Pittsburgh Public School System. It
includes production (PRO), perception (PE) and reflection. The focus was on two

24
elements. The first was called domain projects and included a series of exercises,
activities, and productions in the visual arts, music, and creative writing. The second was
processfolios, an ongoing collection of students artistic productions such as drawings,
paintings, musical compositions, and creative writings (Armstrong 1994). The program
was based on the premise that the greatest learning takes place when students are active
constructors of their own knowledge. In addition to the production- perception-
reflection model used in general music class, the format allowed interdisciplinary
learning experiences that extend to learning in the core subjects such as geography and
science. Parents were encouraged to become involved in their childrens learning
through the use of interview forms and questionnaires (Aaron 1994).
Program Differences
Although these programs were designed and implemented to infuse arts into the
academic curriculum, there were many differences among them. Some of these
differences were the numbers and ages of students who were involved and the amount of
in-service training for classroom teachers. The concern for and methods employed to
evaluate each program also varied widely. Some differentiating characteristics are
summarized below.
The ABC Program was concerned with the development of student potential,
stressed different art forms in different schools, and confined documentation to
the observations of the participants.
The Open City Project focused on using both arts and non-arts related cultural
events, and the major objective of the program was to develop language skills in
early childhood classes. Evaluations included information tests, attitude scales for
parents and teachers, classroom observations, and pre-and-post-test standardized
scores.
Project SEARCH was developed to improve teacher attitudes toward the arts and
used evaluation methods appropriate to the measurement of attitudinal change.

25
JEFFCO had a substantial in-service training component and was aimed at
enhancing instruction in basic skill through the arts in grades kindergarten
through 12. No evaluations on the outcomes of the program were located.
The program in the District of Columbia was also active in providing in-service
training. This program used an evaluation model that was developed by the
Division of Quality Assurance of the school system and that showed statistically
significant growth in student test scores.
LEAP is one program that not only is still in existence but it has expanded to
include 450 schools in the northeast U.S. and brings experts in not only arts but
also all curriculum areas to work with classroom teachers. There are 64
subheadings in the arts that are currently listed in the LEAP web page.
(LEAPNY.org)
PROPEL was concerned with expanding the teaching of music specialists to
include interdisciplinary learning in other curriculum areas. Subjective evaluation
was accomplished through student reflection as each student described the extent
of his/her participation in a project.
It is clear that most of these programs were successful on a short term basis, but
none, with the exception of LEAP, is still in existence. The life span of most was from
three to five years. Some were designed for early childhood, some for secondary schools,
and some for elementary schools. Some were funded through organizations such as the
John D. Rockefeller 3rd foundation, (JEFFCO and ABC) and some through the local
school districts (Open City and the DC Program). All included in-service training for
classroom teachers. In-service training seemed to be the only vehicle for continuation of
using the arts in general education.
Effectiveness of Arts in General Education
Since the presence of arts in school curricula affects both those who receive
instruction, and those who provide it, program effectiveness may be viewed from both
those points of view. Several studies have documented these effects.

26
Teacher Effects
Boyle and Thompson (1976) conducted a study at Pennsylvania State University
that changed teachers self-perceptions of their ability to be effective teachers in the arts.
The premise was that self-confidence is essential for successful teaching and that
teachers can gain this confidence through successful creative experience. The study
provided nine sessions in Arts Encounter Workshops over a three-year period for a total
of 22 undergraduate elementary education majors. Participants self-rated, on five point
scales, their perception of how well prepared they felt to teach arts in their classrooms
prior to and at the conclusion of the Arts Encounter Workshops. The McNemar Test for
Significance of Changes indicated that the workshops resulted in significant development
of self-confidence to teach the arts. These findings suggest that such workshop sessions
can bring changes in perception.
Barry (1998) evaluated an arts program in the state of Alabama that developed
and implemented an in-service program for elementary teachers with the hope of
providing recommendations for future programs. In 1998, only 295 arts teachers, mostly
in music, served Alabamas 406,000 students. To provide arts instruction to every student
would have required over 1500 additional teachers. This program, therefore, sought to
acquaint elementary classroom teachers with theories of arts education and specify
examples of arts activities that could be validly integrated with other subjects. An arts
education conference was held in Auburn, Alabama, and teachers who attended (N= 28)
were tested and found to be most interested in arts activities that they could integrate into
their academic curriculum. Several teachers mentioned the value of having met arts and
arts education professionals. Because of the small respondent pool, the data were not
statistically analyzed (Barry 1998).

27
Student Effects
A project to infuse academic studies with arts in Duluth, Minnesota examined the
pre-and post-tests of over 300 children in grades one through five. Significant gains were
demonstrated in test scores for students who had received arts instruction over those who
had not (Benson and Doane 1982).
A comprehensive arts education program developed by the Getty Institute moved
arts from the academic fringes into the core curriculum in Shady Brook Elementary
School in Bedford, Texas. Over the course of 5 years, scores on the Texas Assessment of
Academic Skills improved among the participating students as follows: reading scores
12.3%, writing scores 14%, and math scores 61%. In addition, anecdotal evidence
indicated an enhancement of students abilities to understand concepts and to express
themselves articulately (Chapman 1998).
Originally developed in New York City as a program for students who had not
learned to read by traditional methods, the Leaning to Read Trough the Arts (LTRTA)
was an integrated approach to elementary curriculum in which arts were used as the main
stimulus for all learning. This approach used specialists and classroom teachers. Music
instruction was evaluated for its effect on both attitude and total achievement with
substantial gains in both for several years (Collett 1991).
Ambler and Strong (1981) found that when arts were used to enhance the learning
activities in arithmetic, phonetics, and reading comprehension, attendance improved,
motivation was heightened, and test scores ranked above average. Additional research in
the Albuquerque, New Mexico elementary schools showed that students who participated
in band or orchestra had higher marks on comprehensive skills tests. Furthermore, the
longer they performed, the higher were their scores (Carlson 1985).

28
Other researchers are continuing to find that children, especially those in at-risk
categories, attain numerous tangible and intangible benefits from extensive sequential
music study. As a group, students who study music and the other arts do better on
standardized tests, and scores improve in students whose studies occur over a longer
period of time (Costa-Giomi, Price, Raucher, Schmidt, Shackford, Sims, et al (1999
A study in long-term memory by Berliner (1985) claimed that a multi-sensory
approach, such as visual imagery, movement, and touch, created more enduring learning
than did a single sensory approach. Larson (1995) claims that integrating aural, vocal,
visual, intellectual, digital, kinesthetic and emotional understanding contributes much to
the learning process.
Since 1990
During the last decade of the 20th century there has been a renewed interest in
using the arts as a means to humanize and energize curricula in the public schools
(Cornett 1999). A review of the literature concerning arts in general education shows
little substantive evidence to prove or disprove a connection between arts and student
performance. There do seem to be, however, strong connections between arts-focused
schools and excellence in education. When we examine school development through the
arts in a broad context it becomes apparent that arts-in-general-education programs can
help schools accomplish broad educational objectives (Remer 1996). In 1991, research
into the records of students in several Texas schools indicated that a curriculum that
devotes 25% or more of the school day to the arts produces youngsters with superior
academic abilities (Oddleifson 1991). Integrated techniques that employ the arts within
other course work, such as social studies or English, help to convey the objectives of that
work. It would seem, then, that arts should not be treated solely as methodologies for

29
teaching the basics. The importance of learning in both arts and academics needs to be
emphasized (Barrett, McCoy, and Veblen 1997). In a symposium on the integration of
the arts in the curriculum, Bresler (1995) describes four different models of integration.
These include 1) subservient, where the arts are used to lend interest or to spice up
other subjects, 2) social integration, where the arts serve as the social functioning of a
school, 3) affective, where the arts emphasize attitudes and feelings, and 4) co-equal,
which integrates the curriculum with arts-specific contents, skills, expressions, and
modes of thinking. A model program will identify relationships among subjects and
involve both classroom and arts teachers to plan curricula and collaborate on its delivery
(Fowler, McMullan, and McLaughlin 1991). There is a paucity of information, though,
on how this goal may best be accomplished. It is not clear how to build an understanding
of the arts at a time when public media indicates that school system budgets are
shrinking, and much attention seems to be given to the acquisition and testing of the
essential skills of reading, writing, and mathematics. A study summary published by
The National Endowment for the Arts (1991) includes several guidelines for
implementing an arts education model. Among these are:
Both the arts and other disciplines must have strength and integrity.
The model must be whole-school oriented.
Teachers must be active participants in learning about and developing the model
and the role of the arts (Fowler and McMullan 1991).
For teachers to fully integrate the arts into a classroom environment, a specific
plan needs to be in place to enable them to acquire not only the knowledge but also the
confidence necessary to implement it. Such a plan will differ from district to district, but
it should include answers to the following questions:
What teaching and learning experiences are necessary to assist classroom teachers
in the use of arts in the classroom?

30
- How may a classroom teacher best acquire a basic understanding and knowledge
of using arts in the classroom?
What follow up services need to be provided to increase teacher knowledge and
confidence? (Cornett 1999).
The history of an exemplary program that lasted for over 20 years, Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS, will point to answers for the questions posited above and make
it possible for other programs in the arts to emulate this program in order to become a
more integral part of the school curriculum. By pursuing the path of arts integration,
schools will not only be better equipped to meet the challenges of the future, but provide
pleasing experiences for all participants along the way (Kaagan 1998).

CHAPTER 3
METHODOLOGY
Sherman and Webb (1990) note that all research arises from ones actual or
qualitative life. Research is not abstract; it exists in a context. The context is the
environment in which humans are directly involved (Sherman and Webb 1990). It has
become increasingly accepted in the research community that the investigators
subjectivity operates during a research project (Fink 2000). Qualitative research takes
place in natural, as opposed to abstract or theoretical, settings and is studied as a whole
rather than in isolation from the past or present (Edson 1990). It implies a direct concern
with experience as it is lived, felt, or undergone (Sherman and Webb 1990). Historical
inquiry seeks to explain the significance of past experiences, but because historians must
interact with the evidence they gather, interpretation is inescapable (Edson 1990).
Design of the Study
Often the selection of a topic is based on the researchers current or past concerns.
Within qualitative research is a tradition whereby the principal research instrument is the
researcher (Phelps, Ferrara, and Goolsby 1993). Included among the characteristics of
qualitative research are the observations that it is holistic, in that it relates to a bounded
system, and it is empirical, with an emphasis on what can be observed (Bresler and Stake
1992).
We need history, not to tell us what happened, or to explain the past, but to make
the past alive so that it can explain and make a future possible (Bloom 1987). One of the
31

32
values in historical research is providing historical information from one specific
situation for possible generalization to other areas (Madsen and Madsen 1970).
As a historical study this inquiry may be described as qualitative, an
encompassing term that attempts to define the meaning of what has occurred in the social
world. Some of the characteristics of qualitative research that apply to this study are
listed below.
It is holistic, seeking to understand its case as well as to understand how it is
different from other cases.
Its emphasis is observable, including observation by informants. There is a
preference for natural language description, and the researcher is the key
instrument.
It is descriptive. Data takes the form of words rather than numbers.
It is interpretive.
Observations and interpretations are validated through checking data against
multiple sources (Bresler and Stake 1992).
Ely, Vinz, Downing, and Anzul (1997) offer some views and suggestions about
some understandings in the writing of qualitative research. Their observations appear
meaningful and relevant to the present study.
There are many ways to come to know something, and such knowing is partial.
There are numerous ways for us to report.
8 All of our messages have agendas.
8 Our language creates reality.
8 Research is both context and culture bound. Furthermore, the researcher is
deeply concerned with what and who is being studied.
8 Affect and cognition are inextricably united
What we understand as social reality is multifaceted, sometimes clashing, and
often in flux.

33
This list is relevant to the present study in several ways, particularly items one,
three, and five. The Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS program may be viewed from
many more perspectives than are presented here.
Procedures/Instrumentation
A decision must be made about how best to collect data for a valid historical
review. The following are important ways for gathering data in a qualitative study:
Interview data produced by a variety of schedules, such as informal and semi
structured.
Historical accounts, including logs, journals, official documents, life histories and
anecdotal reflections. (Miller and Fredericks 1994)
The purpose of this study is to present the history of a program that trained
classroom teachers to use arts strategies in teaching basic skills and to explore some of
the likely reasons for its longevity. To accomplish this purpose, and to remain true to the
principles of qualitative research outlined above, data were collected from several
sources. The primary sources include the following:
Recollections and Records of the Researcher
The investigator was a team member of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS from
1976 to 1993. A good research study requires a knowledge base, as well as theoretical
and methodological competence (Flinders 1993). Ely et al(1997) states that the
researcher belongs in the study, not only as a consciousness that filters the experience,
but as an actor as well.
Interviews
The best evidence in a historical study comes from primary sources; that is,
sources who provide eyewitness testimony of part of the past under consideration(Heller
and Wilson 1992).

34
Interviews were conducted with ARTS team members, classroom teachers,
administrators, and subject area specialists who were involved with the program.
Interviewing began with locating those who were either involved with a specific aspect
of the program such as TAPESTRY, or ARTS team members who had been with the
program for many years. This required several trips to Maryland in order to conduct
interviews in person. When it wasnt possible to conduct an interview in person it was
conducted by e-mail or telephone. The in-person interviews were tape recorded and later
transcribed. The subjects interviewed included:
The first coordinator of Project ARTS, who later became County Coordinator of
the Department of Aesthetic Education, Richard Pioli.
The author of the original grant, who was coordinator of Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS for five years, Janet Pitt Brome.
The two subsequent coordinators, the second of whom was with the program until
it ended, Eoline Kukuk Cary and Dr. Aim Richardson.
The coordinator of the Gifted and Talented Program in Montgomery County
Schools, Dr. Waveline Starnes.
Former science teacher who worked with Interrelated ARTS at the Connecticut
Park Center School and is now Science Coordinator in Montgomery County
Public Schools, William MacDonald
Five ARTS team members whose total experience in the program adds up to 75
years. These include: Jane Schisgall Papish,drama; Ruth Straus Gainer, visual art;
Janis Jones, music; Nancy Harris and Merle Weincek, dance.
Two classroom teachers who had received service from Interrelated ARTS for
two years each, Marie Sipple and Carole Blackwell.
These people were selected for several reasons. The first coordinator and
subsequent coordinators had the most comprehensive knowledge of the inner workings of
the program. Two (Dr. Starnes and Mr. MacDonald) were directly involved in the
implementation of programs developed as part of Interrelated ARTS. These were

35
TAPESTRY, a program for student s who were identified as gifted and talented in the
arts, and The Connecticut Park Center School. The ARTS team members were selected
as those who had been in the program for the longest time. Original team members were
Ms.Papish, Ms Gainer, and Ms. Jones, while Ms. Harris joined the program in 1976 and
Ms.Weincek in 1986.
It was difficult to find classroom teachers to interview, largely because of the vast
turnover in the location of teachers in the schools. Both teachers who were interviewed
had taken the in-service course and had received two years of classroom service by
ARTS team members. Four other classroom teachers were contacted by posting a
paragraph in the Superintendents Bulletin, a weekly paper distributed to all personnel in
the Montgomery County School System, asking for an e-mail response. Of these four,
two (Ellie Shutak and Carolyn Potto) reported that they were still using lessons and
teaching strategies that they had learned through working with Interrelated ARTS
teachers.
Because the perspectives of all the subjects interviewed were so different, the
questions had to be broad enough to include as much of their individual recollections as
possible. The following questions were asked:
Describe your personal involvement in Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.
What was your role?
What changes occurred in the program while you were a part of it?
What do you recall was the rationale for the change?
What in your opinion were the most important factors leading to the longevity of
the program?
Following their completion, the researcher sent chapters 5 and 6 to the former
coordinator, Dr. Richardson, and to two former team members, Merle Weincek and Janis
Jones, to confirm the validity of the reported history.

36
Formal Reports
Two formal reports were submitted to the Montgomery County School Board
following the completion of the federally funded program. (Kukuk 1977; Brome and
Kukuk 1977) These included both an Evaluation and a Final Report. These documents,
invaluable in providing a record of how and why the program began and was operated,
were prepared in 1977 by the coordinator, curriculum writer, and all of the ARTS team
members. The Evaluation report contains results of a telephone survey, structured
interviews, principals evaluations, and administrative workshop evaluations. The Final
Report contains descriptions and evaluations of project ARTS as well as copies of
brochures, agendas for workshops and several groups of lessons that were prepared by
ARTS team members. These volumes, however useful in recording the beginnings of the
program, were the only comprehensive written data available. To obtain the history of the
remaining years it was necessary to rely on the memory of the researcher and those who
were interviewed. Fortunately, many of the lesson plans had been kept both by the
researcher and other ARTS team members.
In addition to the documents mentioned above, there are four books of lesson
plans written by team members. Additional documents were those prepared by ARTS
team members for Making Connections During the Middle Learning Years, (Maryland
Alliance for Arts Education 1990), lessons, materials from curriculum support packages,
and written records from the DARTS program described in Chapter 4.
Organizing evidence in a historical investigation is primarily concerned with the
passage of time. Flistorians must explain events as they unfold. Sequence is fundamental
to history (Heller 1985). In order to clarify the sequence of events, Table 1 is presented to
assist in understanding simultaneous events that occurred in the life of Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.

37
Photographs
A Montgomery County Public School photographer originally made the pictures
that have been included in this study for a slide-tape presentation entitled, Theres More
Than One way to Make an A. They were taken by Bill Mills, one of the Montgomery
County Public School photographers, who graciously gave his consent for use in this
study. Since the slide presentation was widely used within the county, permission to use
photographs of the students was obtained from parents. Due to the time that has elapsed
since the slides were made, this documentation no longer exists. The camera is able to
record details and subtleties that otherwise might be forgotten or overlooked.
Furthermore, a photograph can be an instant record of what has taken place that will not
only enhance recollection, but make a strong statement about an event (Ball and Smith
1992).
Presenting Data
Data are presented in approximate chronological order (Table 1).
Table 1 A brief overview of the programs history
Project ARTS: 1974-1977 Interrelated ARTS: 1977-1993
Demonstration lessons(including
special education), workshops, in-
service training
1974/5 one team of four teachers-
grades K-3
1975/6 two teams-grades K-6
1976/7 three teams-grades K-6
Demonstration lessons (including Special
Education), workshops and in-service
training for K-6 plus:
Connecticut Park Center School 1982-
1993, Interdisciplinary lessons with
science and computer specialists.
DARTS 1983-1993: Title I specialists in
Center School. Arts lessons with trade
books at second grade level.
TAPESTRY: 1984-1990: Pull-out
program in dance and drama for
students identified as gifted and
talented in the arts.
Middle School: 1991-1995 workshops,
demonstration lessons in grades 6-8

38
The study reviews the history of arts education in public schools in the United
States, specifically arts-in-general-education programs. Interview data, formal reports,
reflective observations, and photographs are used to describe the history of Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS and to determine the reasons for the longevity of this program.
In qualitative inquiry the researcher is an important instrument in providing insights to
experience as it is lived or felt. In beginning this study it was imperative to determine
whether sufficient data that either agreed with or differed from the biases and
assumptions of the researcher could be obtained. The process of gathering the data for a
valid historical review included many aspects. Because qualitative research is context
specific the researcher found it necessary to include a brief history of Montgomery
County, Maryland including the growth of the public school system in the county. Two
volumes were found in the Montgomery County Historical House located in Rockville,
Maryland that were invaluable in providing this information. To remain true to the
principles inherent in qualitative research, it is necessary to present data in a coherent and
systematic fashion, and to do so in a somewhat consecutive order. A narrative form is
used to accomplish this purpose.
Interviews and documents/reports are described in detail in the
Instruments/Procedure section. These were carefully examined in order to most
effectively describe the unfolding of the program. Questions 1 and 2 addressed the
subjects involvement in the program as teachers, administrators or specialists in subject
areas Questions 3 and 4 helped to place the interviewees in the various aspects of the
program as it changed. Question 5 addressed the research question (i.e., Why did this
program exist for so many years). Themes which related to longevity (changes in focus
and work with teachers), quality, and feasibility(budget and visibility) emerged and are
presented in Chapters 4 and 5.

CHAPTER 4
PROGRAM HISTORY
This chapter provides a historical analysis as well as an overview of the program
and its various components. It is important to recognize that, while presented
sequentially, many of these events occurred concurrently.
Project ARTS: The Beginning
In 1973 the elementary art and music programs were the joint responsibility of
special art and music specialists and of classroom teachers. However, not all children (in
fact not even all schools) were being served by special teachers in the arts. Following
discussions between the citizens group and Board of Education members, the board
appointed a Task Force on the Arts to study the arts program.
One of the recommendations of the Task Force was that an intensive staff
development effort in the arts be instituted to assist classroom teachers in implementing
arts, arts-related, and integrated arts experiences in their classrooms. It was further
recommended that dance and drama become an integral part of the arts program in the
elementary school.
Even though Montgomery County was one of the richer counties in the nation,
the assistant director of Curriculum and Instruction decided to submit a plan to ESEA,
Title III asking for funds to help implement a plan to improve arts education. The
assistant director asked Janet Brome, who was at that time a Teacher Specialist for Media
Studies in the same department, to write a grant proposal requesting funding from the
39

40
federal government. The proposal was approved for funding in 1974 and was supported
jointly by Montgomery County Public Schools. Additional grants were received from the
United States Office of Education through the Alliance for Arts Education and The
National Committee-Arts for the Handicapped. Specific funding for the first three years
is described in Appendix A.
Project ARTS began with a director, Richard Pioli, who was hired from the local
public television station for the position, and a curriculum writer-evaluator, Janet Brome.
A secretary and a clerk typist also were hired. The first year of the project consisted of
two teams, each comprised of a drama, dance/movement, visual art, and music teacher.
Each team member had a background in both some area of the arts and in teaching. In
addition, each pilot school was supplied with an arts aide who assisted the classroom
teachers in initiating and developing arts activities on a continuing basis.
Pilot schools were chosen for the first year on the basis of principals requests and
to represent each of the six administrative areas.
At the time we began, we contacted the school principals that we knew best and
we felt that we would go with the principals that had a leaning toward arts
education, and there were a few of them. We did workshops for their teachers. It
was through these workshops that we got to tell people what we were doing.
(Richard Pioli, first coordinator of Project ARTS)
Only kindergarten through third grade (K-3) teachers in these schools were served
in the first year, and the services included monthly workshops and demonstration lessons
in the classroom for teachers followed by individual teacher conferences to plan follow
up activities. In compliance with federal guidelines, the project also served two parochial
schools in Montgomery County and extended some services to St. Marys County Public
Schools.

41
Work in the Schools
The individual ARTS team members worked in the schools on a one-on-one basis
with classroom teachers. Each classroom teacher in the program would first meet with
his/her assigned team member and discuss aspects of the curriculum that were planned for
the semester. Since copies of curriculum objectives in all subjects and grade levels were
available to ARTS team members, it was possible to design arts lessons to meet these
objectives. The ARTS team member would then, with the help of the classroom teacher,
plan arts lessons designed to meet academic curriculum objectives. Each classroom
teacher received a written lesson plan for each lesson taught by the ARTS team teacher
(An example of a lesson may be found in Appendix B). In this way, not only would the
classroom teacher have written lessons (approximately 28) in all four art forms, but also
he or she would have seen each lesson as it was taught. Each classroom teacher in the
program received a total of four semesters of service in his or her classroom, one
semester in each of the art forms.
Figure 1. Interrelated ARTS music specialist working with students while classroom
teacher observes

42
A three-credit one-semester course was designed to give classroom teachers a
basic understanding of the four art forms and, through active participation, increase the
teachers confidence in the arts. The course was taught by four ARTS team members
during both fall and spring semesters after the school day and for six weeks in the
summer. Teachers could apply the credit for re-certification and/or masters equivalency.
After the first year of Project ARTS, regular service to a school was offered if at least
five teachers from one school had completed the course.
Program Workspace
The program was originally housed in two vacant classrooms of Wheaton Woods
Elementary School in Rockville. In 1974-75, monthly one-half day workshops were
conducted at Wheaton Woods during the first week of every month of the school year.
The K-3 teachers, principals, arts specialists, PTA cultural arts chairmen from the 12
pilot schools, K-3 teachers from St. John the Evangelist School, and teachers and
supervisors from St. Marys County Public Schools attended.
In its second year, the program moved to Ashburton Elementary School in
Bethesda, where an entire floor of the school was available. A third team was added, and
new pilot schools joined the project. The monthly workshops were replaced by an in-
service course that met weekly for one semester and was taught by the interrelated ARTS
teachers in the all-purpose room after school hours.
Workspace was extremely important for ARTS team members for several
reasons. Team members traveled to many schools throughout the county, so it was useful
to be in a fairly centralized location. Because all materials for demonstration lessons as
well as workshops were provided by the program, it was necessary to have space for a
great many art supplies (paper, paints, brushes, scissors, crayons, pastels, clay etc.) as

43
well as rhythm and Orff instruments. Team members also needed meeting space for
planning and record keeping, telephone access for contacting schools, and storage space
for curriculum resource packages.
In the third year 19 schools in grades K-6 were receiving service on a regular
basis, and the staff was expanded to include a community resource coordinator,
Marthalie Furber, whose job was to promote the value of the arts in education within the
entire school community. Additional funding was received for the 1976-77 school year
from the Office of Education/Arts Education Program under Section 409, Title IV, Public
Law 93-380, Elementary and Secondary Education in the Arts Programs, and from the
National Committee, Arts for the Handicapped. The Project ARTS staff conducted
workshops for elementary school principals in each administrative area, teacher
specialists in language arts and reading, and interested parents. This was the third and
final year for the program to receive funds from Title III. The goal of designing and
implementing a self-renewing system to initiate and support an arts program in grades
K-6 had been both refined and expanded during this period. The two major activities
stated in the grant proposal that would assist the program in becoming supported mainly
by Montgomery County were administrative workshops and curriculum resource package
development
Workshops
Workshops were coplanned and conducted by the Project ARTS teams, the
coordinators of the Division of Aesthetic Education, and well-known arts education
consultants. In October 1976, a half- day workshop was presented for 25 high level
administrators of Montgomery County Public Schools. Murray Sidlin, resident

44
conductor of the National Symphony Orchestra, and Martin Engle, Advisor for the Arts
and Humanities, National Institute for Education, addressed the group.
In November of 1976, a 2 1/2 day retreat was held at the Donaldson Brown
Center in Port Deposit, Maryland. Twenty-five administrators, supervisors, and
principals were present. The goal of the retreat was to develop individual group plans for
the implementation of quality arts programs, including the identification of
responsibilities. Both the Maryland State Alliance for Arts Education Chairman, Harold
Lott, and his associate from the State Department of Education, Victor Kotulak, were in
attendance. Participants were provided with hands-on experiences in each of the four art
forms by observing and participating in lessons taught by arts team members. There was
discussion of the learning process and its relation to the arts and the role of
administrators in providing arts programs. The speaker for the event was Elliot Eisner,
who addressed the group with the topics: Where Are We Going in Arts Education? and
The Art of Teaching
That was a wonderful retreat and the epitome of the influence of the Project
ARTS program to be able to attract such people. We invited Elliot Eisner to come
see what we were doing and to share some of his ideas with the staff members. I
was delighted with the team that put that together. (Richard Pioli, first Project
ARTS coordinator)
A series of three administrative workshops were held in January of 1977. Primary
consultant for these was Dr. Harry S. Broudy who presented his address, "How Basic is
Aesthetic Education? or Rts the Fourth R to approximately 600 administrators and
supervisors. Dr. Broudy also conducted seminars and discussions with smaller groups
attended by teachers, school board members, the superintendent, principals, Project
ARTS staff, and supervisors and administrators associated with the project.

45
A summary of both internal and external evaluators concluded that the value of
the arts was effectively communicated through the series of workshops. The participants
stated that the consultants had effectively shared their philosophical positions relevant to
aesthetic education and that the workshops had developed support for a comprehensive
arts program in Montgomery County Public Schools The workshops helped to build a
solid base of support and understanding of aesthetic education (as defined in Chapter 1)
and the role that Project ARTS played in its development. As a result of administrative,
school board, teacher, and parental support, the entire funding of Project ARTS was
assumed by the Montgomery County Public Schools in 1977.
Association with the Kennedy Center
The Education Department of the John F. Kennedy for the Performing Arts
conducted teacher workshops, some of which were led by ARTS Team members. In
addition the Center published several booklets of lesson plans that were available for
national distribution. Most of the lessons were designed and written by ARTS team
members. These include The Afrikan Experience, The Australian Experience .and
Creativity (which was sponsored by Mobil Oil.) These activities brought both local and
national recognition to Interrelated ARTS .
Curriculum Resource Development
In addition to working in the classrooms and presenting workshops, ARTS team
members began developing curriculum resource packages that combined arts lessons
with reading, social studies, and science. These packages contained lesson plans, books,
pictures, manipulative materials, and resource lists for additional books and films. Each
package contained at least one lesson in each of the four art forms. Some of these were
piloted in elementary classrooms in the spring of 1977, and a form was provided for

46
teachers to evaluate the lessons in the package. As Montgomery County received more
immigrants from Central America, Southeast Asia, and Asia the ARTS teams developed
curriculum resource packages that stressed the arts of these cultures. The teams also
developed a package on arts of the Harlem renaissance. An example of a curriculum
resource package(Greece) may be found in Appendix C.
According to Bolin (1978), building an arts resource center can be a tremendous
asset to any school or district. The space itself affirms the existence of arts activity and
provides a space in which thoughts are shared, ideas evolved, and information
disseminated. In January of 1977, an Arts Resource Center, known as the ARC, was
opened to all county teachers, specialists, and other personnel. In addition to the
curriculum packages, the center contained childrens books, adult books about the arts,
and art materials (including CEMRAL packages that pertained to the arts), all of which
could be borrowed by teachers or administrators. By 1985 the Resource List for the ARC
consisted of 98 pages and included books, kits, filmstrips, phonograph records, cassette
tapes, and video tapes in all four art forms as well as materials for programs for gifted
and talented.
Special Education
In 1974 Jean Kennedy Smith founded the National Committee, Arts for the
Handicapped. The purpose of this committee, which was housed at the John F. Kennedy
Center for the Performing Arts, was to provide opportunities for children with emotional,
physical, and mental disabilities to learn in, about, and through the arts. Because part of
the funding for Project ARTS was provided by the National Committee, Arts for the
Handicapped, ARTS team members also worked with students and teachers in special
education classrooms within the schools receiving service from the program. This

47
included classrooms for learning disabled, orthopedically impaired, mildly emotionally
disturbed, and visually and auditorily challenged students. Figures 2 and 3 show an ARTS
team drama teacher working with orthopedically challenged students and an ARTS team
music teacher working with mildly retarded high-school students. In 1977 Jean Kennedy
Smith addressed the Montgomery County Board of Education concerning the work that
was done by the ARTS teams.
Figure 4. Music teacher in the classroom

48
In 1976 ARTS team members began serving teachers in three learning centers for
students who needed more help than they could receive in a special classroom.
Montgomery County has three such elementary schools, one middle school, and one high
school. None of these schools had music or art specialists, so the instruction that students
had received in the arts had been minimal. Working in these schools presented a new
challenge because only one of the 12 team members had received any training or
experience in special education. It was not required for classroom teachers in these
schools to take the in-service course taught by ARTS team members, so both classroom
teachers and ARTS team members were often in uncharted territory. ARTS team
members quickly realized that to plan and teach lessons in these schools required a closer
working relationship with the classroom teachers. Such relationships were successfully
formed among many classroom teachers and ARTS team members. The State of
Maryland began requiring three credit hours in Special Education for certification, so
within three years all of the ARTS team members had received some course work in this
field. Most, but not all of the work in special learning centers, was successful. One
learning center, Mark Twain Junior High School, was for emotionally disturbed
adolescents. In 1979 a branch of this school was created and was known as Samuel
Clemens. This part of Mark Twain School was designated for students who had been
identified as both emotionally disturbed and academically gifted. The coordinator of the
ARTS teams and the principal of Clemens decided that the ARTS program should work
in this school on a weekly basis. This decision was made without input from either
classroom teachers in the school or ARTS team members. Probably because the
classroom teachers had not been consulted, many seemed to be opposed to the idea.
Samuel Clemens students were not used to anyone other than their classroom teachers

49
being in their classrooms, and work there proved to be a difficult experience for almost
all concerned.
Our going to special education centers had to do with laws passed at the time.
The special ed. centers had no music and art teachers at all. Mark Twain proved
to be very difficult. The kids were difficult, not used to anyone coming in. The
teachers were not consulted and in some instances were hostile. We only had one
team member who had qualifications and experience with special ed. Yet we all
were expected to do it. (Jane Papish, drama teacher).
In 1979 investigators from the Arts in Education for Handicapped Project visited
Montgomery County Public Schools programs including the Interrelated ARTS program.
In the final report of this project, Appell (1979), indicated that since Montgomery
County has so many innovative programs such as Interrelated ARTS, interest in the Arts
Education for the Handicapped Project was not very high.
Interrelated ARTS
Now that project ARTS was no longer receiving Federal funding, the coordinator
of the program and the head of the Department of Aesthetic Education thought that it
would be appropriate to change its name. At the beginning of the school year in 1977,
Project ARTS became known as Interrelated ARTS. The program lost funding for the
curriculum coordinator, the community resource coordinator, and the classroom aides
who assisted teachers in participating schools. Losing the aides made it much more
difficult for ARTS team members to confer with classroom teachers during the school
day, so the conferences had to take place after school or by telephone in the evenings.
The Interrelated ARTS teacher in-service program continued to be offered one
evening a week, and because the program was now financially supported by the school
system, the ARTS team members who taught the course received a stipend. Prior to this

50
time teaching the course had been considered part of the job, and the teachers received
no extra remuneration for conducting it.
By 1978 the program had outgrown the space provided for it at Ashburton
Elementary School, and so two weeks before the opening of school in 1978, the program
moved to Larchmont School in Bethesda, Maryland. This was an elementary school that
had closed due to lack of enrollment. Ample space was therefore available for workshops
and for each team member to have a separate office. It also had an empty library with
plenty of room for the rapidly expanding resource center. Another advantage was that
Larchmont was only a few blocks from the Washington Beltway and Interstate Route
270. Team members were thus able to reach the schools more efficiently.
Levels of Service
The program was increasingly popular, with many more principals calling to
request having their schools included. In order to more clearly define the services offered
to teachers, levels of service were established
Through a 1 -hour orientation session, the staff demonstrated the integrated arts
approach and described the project services available. Teachers who were interested in
receiving regular services of the ARTS team entered Level 2.
A three-credit semester in-service course gave teachers a basic understanding
of the four art forms, and through active participation, increased the teachers confidence
in the arts. If at least five teachers from one school completed the course, the ARTS
teams provided regular in-school follow-up services. Teachers who took the course
learned strategies in teaching through the arts.

51
Next the ARTS teams visited participating teachers in their schools approximately
twice monthly to do demonstration teaching, conferencing, and coplanning with teachers.
Each teacher received up to four semesters of follow-up service, concentrating one
semester on each art form. A teacher attaining the objectives for level 3 moved to level 4.
Finally the ARTS teams were available as consultants to teachers on an on-call
basis (Evaluation Report 1977) In order to explain the program to prospective teachers, a
photographer from Montgomery County School System helped the teams put together a
slide tape show. This explained all of the levels of service and allowed the viewers to see
pictures of the teams in action. Figure 4 illustrates a visual art teacher giving follow-up
service in the classroom.
Figure 4. Art Teacher in the Classroom
At the end of the 1979 school year, the school system sold the Larchmont school
building, and the program was forced to move again. This time it was to Connecticut Park
School in Silver Spring. The building was a school that had been closed due to lack

52
of sufficient enrollment, and it had considerably more space. Interrelated ARTS now
shared a building with the Montgomery County Adult Education Program and a daycare
center. Each team member had a separate office, there was ample space for musical
instruments and art materials, and there was a large library to hold the ever-growing
accumulation of books and curriculum support packages. There were also five or six
unused classrooms that could be used for after-school workshops, and a large multi
purpose room. Typically, the ARTS teams would spend one day each week (usually
Monday) in the office in order to prepare materials and lessons for the coming week.
Each team would visit approximately eight or nine schools in a two-week period,
working with each assigned classroom teacher every other week for a total of seven
visits. This teaching schedule was in addition to preparing and presenting workshops and
teaching the in-service course. A notebook was kept in the main office of each school
served. This was used as a sign-in and sign-out place as well as a place for the ARTS
team member to write a brief summary of the lessons being taught.
Although members of the Interrelated ARTS staff felt that Connecticut Park was
ideally suited for their needs, another move was soon to come. The building of North
Chevy Chase Elementary school was not owned by the school system, and as part of the
leasing agreement, the building had to be occupied by a school program or it could be
leased or sold privately. In order to keep the property in the hands of the school system
while the building was being renovated, Interrelated ARTS, along with another smaller
program, was asked to occupy the building for one year. The other occupants were two
elementary science and computer specialists who were charged with writing curricula for
their subjects and to teach lessons that they designed. The students they taught were
brought by bus to the school. It seemed an ideal opportunity to the coordinators of both

53
programs for science and arts teachers to get together to design interrelated lessons
including both subjects. This was to develop into an important adjunct program for
Interrelated ARTS, the Connecticut Park Center School.
The center was originally at North Chevy Chase School. The town owned the
property but the lease said it belonged to the school system as long as it was used
as a school, so Interrelated ARTS was moved in to hold it (during renovation).
The math and science specialists were put there as well. Then teachers (math and
science and ARTS team members) started to work together to make connections.
As computers improved in quality there was more to do with visual arts. ARTS
Team members did preparation lessons with teachers and kids in the schools
before they came to the center. For science and math, teachers would come in
after school. (Bill Mac Donald, Science specialist)
Connecticut Park Center School
When the year of occupying North Chevy Chase was over, both Interrelated
ARTS and the science program moved back to Connecticut Park, and the Connecticut
Park Center School became an important part of the Interrelated ARTS program. This
program offered a unique opportunity for students to acquire specific skills in content
areas and to participate in interdisciplinary studies usually not offered in their home
schools.
The classes offered were described in a catalog that was sent to all of the
elementary schools in the county, and classes were brought by school buses to the center.
Some of the offerings could accommodate two or more classes, while for others it was
more feasible to have one class at a time. Prior to their students coming to the center,
teachers attended after-school workshops given by the ARTS and science teacher who
would be teaching their classes. This allowed the classroom teacher to prepare the class
for the experience as well as to provide follow up.
An example of one of the most popular offerings was archeology. An entire
classroom was set up as a simulated archeological dig. This was achieved by building a

54
wooden pen approximately 8 feet square and 8 feet high. This pen was then filled to the
top with dirt, sectioned off into quadrants and seeded with objects such as bones (from a
science supply catalog), broken crockery, feathers, etc. An Interrelated ARTS visual art
teacher taught a lesson on arts and artifacts of various primitive cultures. The students
were then given instruction on the correct way to search for and record their findings.
They were provided with disposable paper gowns so that they could enter the dig without
soiling their clothes. After time spent in the dig, the students made speculations
concerning the culture of the people who might have used the artifacts they discovered.
They also made sketches of the things that they had found.
Another interrelated lesson was entitled, Good Vibrations. In this lesson, various
musical instruments were used to show how sounds were produced. The students also
conducted experiments in the production of sound energy. Students could feel the energy
waves by placing their hands next to a large gong as it was struck. They could observe
the power of sound energy by striking tuning forks and putting them in shallow pans of
water.
One very popular offering for fifth grade classes was called Ellis Island. This was
a drama simulation where students were cast in the role of immigrants coming to this
country. A drama teacher from Interrelated ARTS visited the participating classrooms a
day before the students came to the center to explain the history of Ellis Island
immigration and to assign to the children the roles that they would assume on the
following days. Teachers, aides, and frequently members of the community were cast as
the immigration officials and the rooms were set up to resemble the actual setting as
nearly as possible, At the close of the two day session a ceremony was held where
students were admitted to the country.

55
The science specialists and ARTS team members met during regularly scheduled
staff meeting times to develop the lessons. Each Interrelated ARTS team member was
responsible for teaching several Center School offerings each month as well as following
the regular classroom teaching schedule.
Developing Arts and Reading Teaching Strategies (DARTS')
This was a program that was conceived by two ARTS team members in 1982.
One was a visual art specialist and the other a specialist in music. These teachers went to
New York City for several days and observed seven different elementary schools in order
to observe and learn about the Learning to Read Through the Arts program that had been
developed by Bernadette OBrian. On their return, they met with the Montgomery
County Title I staff to develop a model. Since there was sufficient funding from the
Connecticut Park Center School to provide bus transportation for students, one entire
second grade from each selected Title I School was brought to the center for one school
day. The students met in the multi purpose room in the morning for arts lessons
developed around a second grade level book. Frequently there were two or more art
forms used for these lessons. After lunch the students worked with the Title I teacher on
writing, vocabulary, and other language arts skills that related to the same book. The
classroom teachers were there as well so they could follow up on what their students had
done. The ARTS team members soon developed and taught many lessons on various
books in all of the art forms. DARTS classes were held approximately twice a month and
were very popular with both students and teachers. Several of these lessons may be found
in Appendix D.
When Ruth and I got back (from New York), we got together with the Title I staff
and developed a model where we would choose a book on a second grade level,
present arts lessons on the book, and the Title I teacher in the area would have the

56
kids in the same afternoon to work on writing, vocabulary, etc. that related to the
same book. We were able to get money for busses to bring a grade level from a
Title I school for an entire day at Connecticut Park. Of course the classroom
teachers were there too so they were able to follow up on what the kids had done.
We developed a lot of lessons on books in various art forms, and pretty soon all
of the ARTS team members were designing and teaching lessons for DARTS. We
did this approximately twice a month, and it was really popular with both the kids
and the teachers. (Jan Jones, music specialist)
Time for Artistic and Performing Experiences for Talented and Ready Youngsters
(TAPESTRY)
In the early 1980s, Montgomery County Schools began to put a great deal of time
and money into programs for students who had been labeled as academically gifted and
talented. This was largely at the instigation of parents who had been expressing a desire
for programs of this sort. The schools used standardized test scores and teacher
observation to identify which students should be placed into accelerated learning
situations. In the spring of 1984, the coordinator of the Gifted and Talented Department
met with the coordinator for Interrelated ARTS to plan a program for those students who
were identified as gifted in one or more art form. The Office of Program Development
provided funds for summer employment so that arts teachers and coordinators could
write the criteria and testing items for identification of gifted youngsters. The teachers
and coordinators relied on Renzullis (1982) conception of giftedness (ability, task
commitment, and creativity) as a guideline for preparing the test items.
In the fall of 1984, six schools were selected to pilot the program. The music and
arts specialists in the selected schools administered the tests for these arts forms, and
dance and drama teachers from Interrelated ARTS administered the tests for their art
forms. The students who were identified as gifted were taken out of their classes for
special instruction for a one-hour period each week. If a student showed talent in more
than one art form, he or she had to choose one in which to receive special instruction.

57
The music and art teachers in the school provided instruction in these subjects, while
dance and drama instruction was provided by the Interrelated ARTS specialists. Salaries
for the Interrelated ARTS teachers who taught in the TAPESTRY Program were funded
by the Gifted and Talented Program. As the TAPESTRY program grew it became
necessary for Interrelated ARTS to hire two more drama and two more dance teachers to
replace those working on TAPESTRY.
Parents of students who were selected to participate in the program were for the
most part extremely supportive. Several parents testified at school board budget hearings,
and this helped in receiving continuing funding for the program.
The coordinator of the Gifted and Talented Program, Dr. Starnes, remembers that
there was a good representation of minority students in the program and that the teaching
was largely focused on skill developments rather than performance.
It was a nice mix of kids. I liked that there were skills being taught, and although
there were some performance aspects, it was more process than product oriented.
(Waveline Starnes, Coordinator of Gifted and Talented Program).
In 1990 the financial support for gifted programs ended, and the drama and dance
teachers were funded back into Interrelated ARTS
Middle School
In the late 1980s and early 1990s Montgomery County Schools began to focus on
several major changes. One was to provide more ESOL instructors to meet the needs of
the large number of immigrant from Hispanic, Southeast Asian and Asian countries.
Another was to restructure the junior high schools into middle schools. Middle schools
would contain grades 6, 7, and 8, while high school would be for grades 9, 10, 11, and
12. The coordinator of Interrelated ARTS, Dr. Ann Richardson, realized that much of the
work of the ARTS teams could be expanded to assist middle school students and

58
teachers. Some ARTS team members led workshops for middle school teachers showing
how the arts could be used in this curriculum. In addition, ARTS team members wrote a
book of lessons for middle school entitled Making Connections for the Middle Learning
Years (1990) Teachers in middle schools who received service from Interrelated ARTS
were not required to take an in-service course, nor did they require a whole-school
commitment.
Middle school people werent as interested (as elementary teachers), but teachers
had a lot of pressure on them. When junior high changed to middle schools, we
didnt want the sixth graders who previously had this experience to lose out on it,
but we had only elementary experience. The principals and some teachers at
middle schools were not as enthusiastic. (Jan Jones, music specialist)
This attitude gradually changed as ARTS teams met with academic teams at
middle schools and began working in classrooms to help these teachers find new ways of
delivering their academic curriculum. Multicultural curriculum resource packages
mentioned on pages 47,8 were particularly well received by Middle School teachers.
By 1994 the program consisted of only four arts teachers and a part-time
coordinator. The program lost the Connecticut Park space to an expanding Adult
Education Program and moved to a smaller space.
In the late 1980s and early 1990s the population of Montgomery County Schools
was becoming increasingly diverse as Hispanic, Southeast Asian and Asian families were
moving in to the county. This diversity required greater numbers of ESOL (English for
Speakers of Other Languages) to meet the needs of these students.
The program (Interrelated ARTS)was cut to meet staffing needs required by the
increased diverse population.(ESOL) and the demands to maintain high test
scores, particularly in science and mathematics. (Ann Richardson, Coordinator of
Interrelated ARTS)

59
The coordinator became coordinator of Visual Art for Montgomery County
Public Schools, and the remaining ARTS team members returned to elementary
classroom teaching.

CHAPTER 5
FINDINGS
In the 1970s many arts-in-general-education programs were funded both by the
Federal Government and by local governments. Most of these programs lasted between 3
and 5 years. Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS in Montgomery County, Maryland was a
program that was funded by both the federal government and the county government and
lasted for 22 years.
In reviewing data, in Chapter 4 the major themes that emerged were factors
related to the longevity, the quality and feasibility of the program This chapter examines
answers to the questions posed in Chapter 1. These are conceptualized as questions
regarding longevity, quality, and feasibility. While in practice, such factors are woven
parts of a whole, each of these is discussed separately and explored vis a vis the model
program described. Table 2 describes that model by use of a chart. Implicit in this are
recommendations for implementing such a program.
Table 2. Model for Implementation
Longevity Quality Feasibility
Meet needs of various
populations
Meet needs ov classroom
teachers
Address academic
curriculum
Arts and academic
curriculum receive equal
emphasis
Continuation of funding
Visibility to parents,
school board members,
others

61
Recommendations for Program Implementation
The data suggest the following factors as crucial to successful program
replication. It is understood that specific communities should focus more or less energy
on a variety of factors related to these major topics
Longevity
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS began mainly as a teacher-training program for
elementary school teachers and grew over the years as different educational needs
developed. As an entity Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS functioned for 22 years, from
1973 to 1995.
Changes in Focus of Program/Flexibility
The program changed its foci as different emphases were placed on the curricula
in Montgomery County Public Schools. The first change was for ARTS teachers to work
in Special Education Centers. Other emphases included science programs and programs
for the gifted and talented. Since reading had always been a priority in the school
system, The DARTS program was developed. When space and resources became
available to couple the arts with science, mathematics, and computer learning, the
Connecticut Park Center School was begun. TAPESTRY was a logical outgrowth of the
push for special programs for the gifted and talented. In addition to these changes the
program retained its original character and continued with the regular work in elementary
classrooms. Of the 13 people interviewed, nine considered the changing foci as a major
reason for the programs longevity. The following interview excerpts illustrate this
opinion:
Over the years we met different political and educational needs. Our program
went along with national trends and changes and also changed to meet the needs
of Montgomery County Schools. (Jane Papish, Drama specialist)

62
At Chevy Chase the opportunity presented itself to set up a center school. Math,
science, and CRI (computer related instruction) had been looking for an
opportunity to do this. ... We needed to be exemplary and integrate arts and
science. (Bill MacDonald, science specialist)
If you look back closely you can see how things that were politically important
became implemented, for instance handicapped kids when special education was
being stressed, and gifted and talented kids, and of course middle school.
(Waveline Starns, Coordinator for Gifted and Talented Programs)
When Ann (Richardson) realized that we were in danger of being cut because of
computers, she was very smart to go to another grade and that what we had to
offer could be expanded for secondary education. (Betty Weincek, dance
specialist)
Work with Classroom Teachers
Another major correlate to longevity appears to have been the programs attention
to the classroom teacher. It would seem that classroom teachers who want to integrate (or
interrelate) appropriately need the resources and support of arts specialists. They also
need extensive training (Wykell 1996). Figure 5 illustrates a classroom teacher receiving
instructions in painting from an ARTS team member.
Figure 5. Teaching Visual Art

63
Two classroom teachers who are still teaching in Montgomery County made the
following comments when they responded to the e-mail request:
Having the ARTS staff come to my K classroom was extremely supportive I
began to create lessons following the same format, and the arts became an
Integral part of my daily program. (Ellie Shutak, classroom teacher)
I still use the arts all the time with my students. I used them as a kindergarten
teacher and with second and third graders. I liked the program because it gave
children the chance to express themselves in other ways. I have since developed
my own use of the arts and I am grateful that I had a chance to be a part of that
program. (Carolyn Potto, classroom teacher)
Results from a telephone survey of classroom teachers who received services
from the ARTS teams in 1977 showed that, 84% reported an increase in their skill and
knowledge of the arts, and 80% reported integrating the arts more into their curriculum
than they previously did (N = 75). A teacher evaluation of the in-service classes at the
end of three years showed that of 25 teachers interviewed, 19 considered the course to be
highly successful in meeting objectives, discovering individual potential, and
encouraging divergent thinking (Kukuk 1977). Since all classroom teachers were
required to take the in-service course offered by the ARTS teams before (or at the same
time), they received service in their schools, they were better able to work with the ARTS
team members in planning lessons. Classroom teachers served as an important part of the
planning process during conferences, both before and after the ARTS team teachers
work in the classroom. A classroom teacher would often feel confident enough to co
teach the lesson. In addition, the lesson plans included follow-up activities for future
use. These points are reflected in comments from principals in pilot schools in the
program in the following quotes:
I see the strengths of this project as the commitment, enthusiasm, and skill of the
teams... They accept teachers where they are. I feel that they are helping me do

64
what I want done in the school.. .. Teachers are excited about the possibilities
and feel more confident about participating in the arts. (Evaluation Report 1977)
I still remember the lessons that team members taught in my class. I still use a lot
of them. (Carole Blackwell, classroom teacher)
Quality
According to four of the interviewees, a major factor in the success of the
program was the quality of the curriculum-integration it was conceived to achieve.
I think the most important reason the program lasted so long is because we taught
the actual curriculum. Having been a classroom teacher and from talking with
teachers with whom we worked, I know that was the kind of assistance they
wanted. After all, they HAD to teach the required curriculum and there was never
enough time in which to do so. Most of the lessons we left for them fit right in to
what they were working on. (Nancy Harris, dance specialist)
The Council of Arts Accrediting Association (1994) claimed that there are two
major problems with integrated programs. One is the lack of focus and absence of
structures of knowledge (structuring learning to meet curriculum needs). The other is the
territorial claims of specialists in knowledge areas. In order to avoid these problems,
carefully conceived design features are needed in interdisciplinary programs.
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS fits into the co-equal model that was described
by Bresler (1995). Almost all of the ARTS team members had training and experience
both in classroom teaching and in a specific art form. All of the lessons that were
designed and taught by ARTS team members followed a similar format. Each lesson plan
included objectives from both the art form and from the basic curriculum. Montgomery
County Public Schools provided guides containing curriculum content and objectives for
each subject and grade level so that lesson plans could be specifically geared toward
curriculum objectives. Integrated techniques that use the arts within other course work
need to convey the objectives of that course work. The importance of learning in both

65
areas was emphasized. The arts were not put in the service of learning in other subjects,
but taught with equivalent emphasis so that learning could take place in both areas. Figure
6 illustrates a dance movement teacher working with first graders on the meanings of
prepositions.
Figure 6. Learning through dance
In addition to curriculum objectives, the lessons included specific objectives from
the art form. Objectives in Music and Visual Art were found in the courses of study for
those subjects. ARTS team members in Dance and Drama were required to do more
research to find suitable objectives in their art forms. One of the advantages of being able
to refer to curriculum guides is that each grade level has its own specific content area. In
third grade social studies, for example, students study the geography and cultures of
Ghana, Mexico, and Japan. The classroom teacher may decide in what order they are
presented, but by the end of third grade all classes will have covered this material. ARTS
team members were able to compose lesson plans that with minor revisions could be used
in different schools. Since all classroom teachers were required to teach specific

66
curriculum, most were delighted to learn new strategies to help them meet the curriculum
objectives. As well as objectives, each lesson plan included a list of materials required to
teach the lesson, background information if necessary, and an ordered list of procedures.
Evaluation and extensions or follow-up suggestions for the classroom teacher followed
these procedures.
Feasibility
Regardless of the intrinsic value of the program, it would not be feasible to
replicate without sufficient funding to meet its considerable costs. Feasibility depends on
funding, which in turn can rely on visibility.
Budget Planning
The funding for the first three years of Project ARTS came from an ESEA Title
III grant, grants through the United States Office of Education through the Alliance for
Arts Education, the National Committee Arts for the Handicapped, and by Montgomery
County Public Schools. One of the major objectives stated in the final report was that
there were to be several aspects of the program specifically designed to enhance program
self-renewal (Kukuk and Brome 1977).
In supporting this program the budget for Project ARTS/Interrelated
ARTS required salaries for ARTS team members (12 by the 3rd year), including extra
funds for those team members teaching the in-service course, salaries for the program
coordinator, a full-time secretary, and a part-time librarian for the arts resource center.
Funding was also required for materials (such as visual arts supplies, rhythm instruments,
and trade books), mileage accrued by ARTS team members as they traveled to the
various schools, and of course the building that housed the program. Later in the

67
program, funding was also required for buses to transport students to Connecticut Park
Center school for both science programs and DARTS.
In Montgomery County the elected school board presents a yearly budget to the
County Council. The operating budget is broken down into costs for various programs,
salaries, etc. The County Council then decides which of the School Board items will be
either partially or completely funded. Both the County Council and the School Board
hold three hearing sessions in which parents, teachers, administrators, or other concerned
citizens may speak for a prescribed time (usually 3 minutes) in support of various issues.
Visibility
Obviously it is important for a program to have a great deal of support in order to
remain in the budget year after year. One of the ways that Project ARTS/Interrelated
ARTS maintained this support was to invite both School Board and County Council
members into classrooms to observe the program in action. In order to be as visible as
possible there was always a principal, teacher, and/or concerned parent to speak in
support of the program at these budget hearings. In addition, each ARTS team member
attended all of the hearings in a group and wore identifying badges which were also
given to others in attendance.
Administrative workshops and curriculum support packages also helped to keep
the program in the forefront of educational news. The objectives of the administrative
workshops were to demonstrate the value of integrating the arts into the daily curriculum
and to have administrators identify necessary support both in their schools and in the
school system. A series of five administrative workshops were provided through Federal
Government grants. The final report (Kukuk 1977) noted that Greater awareness and
knowledge resulting from the administrative workshops has changed attitudes about

68
Project ARTS at the same time the demands have increased for the program. At the end
of the three years of funding through grants, a core group of administrators met regularly
with the Division of Aesthetic Education to plan the development of a comprehensive
arts program for Montgomery County Public Schools.

CHAPTER 6
CONCLUSIONS
Summary
This study is about a particular program, Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS, that
integrated music, dance, visual art, and drama into the academic curriculum. The
program, which took place in Montgomery County, Maryland existed from 1973 until
1995. The study uses interviews, personal recollections and existing documents to
determine which factors were most important in its success. The major factors that
emerged were those concerning the programs longevity, quality, and feasibility.
The program achieved longevity by identifying and meeting the needs of various
populations such as gifted and talented students and physically handicapped students. In
addition the program met the needs of elementary classroom teachers by designing
lessons that addressed both the academic curriculum and the arts, by demonstrating these
lessons in teachers classrooms and by teaching arts related skills in an in-service course.
Quality was achieved by ARTS team members being thoroughly acquainted with
the elementary curriculum so that demonstration lessons directly addressed the content
area taught in the classroom. To achieve integrity between disciplines, the arts and
academic aspects of each lesson received equal emphasis whenever possible. It is
unfortunate that no instrument was established to measure student gains The provision
for this would be helpful in assessing the quality of an arts-in-general-education
programs in the future.
69

70
In order to exist, Project ARTS/ Interrelated ARTS required yearly continuation
of funding. The first three years of funding was provided by a grant from the Federal
Government and matching funds from the Montgomery County Board of Education. At
the end of three years the program was entirely funded by Montgomery County and
continued to be so until the end of the program.
For the program to continue to receive funding it was necessary for it to be as
visible as possible. Parents, School Board members, County Council members,
administrators, and any others who were interested were invited to come into classrooms
to watch ARTS team members work. In addition visitors were invited to the special
classes at the Connecticut Park Center. Montgomery County School photographer, Bill
Mills, was frequently asked to photograph scenes of the ARTS teams in action and these
pictures appeared in The Superintendents Bulletin, a weekly publication that went to all
Montgomery County School Board employees. To attain greater visibility ARTS team
members attended budget hearings as a group and wore identifying badges.
Implications
A major conclusion of this study is that for arts-in-general education programs to
be initiated into public school systems there needs to be a model that combines some, if
not all of the factors that contributed to the success of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.
These factors include
An awareness of current educational trends and emphases combined with the
ability to meet the needs and requirements of a system in mutually supportive
ways (Longevity)
An awareness of teacher needs and plans to most effectively meet those needs
(Longevity)

71
The enlistment of both principals and teachers as enthusiastic supporters in
planning for an arts program including comprehensive in-service instruction for
teachers (Quality)
The participation of teachers and principals who maintain a high degree of
visibility, particularly to those in charge of school funding. This includes inviting
board of education members and other responsible for funding into the
classrooms, to workshops and to meetings where support for arts programs may
be expressed (Feasibility)
Reimer (1980) says that to design an effective arts program a clearly articulated
underlying philosophy is needed. In addition there must be teams of interdisciplinary
arts specialists to identify and develop arts resource materials, offer workshops for
teachers and administrators, coordinate resources and assist classroom teachers. All of
these factors may be found in Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.
To initiate an arts-in-general education program it is first necessary to determine
and clearly articulate the need for such a program. In the case of Project ARTS a small
but vocal group of citizens felt that elementary school students were receiving
insufficient arts instruction time by the specialists assigned to the schools. In addition
there was no instruction provided in dance or drama. The citizens group expressed these
concerns to the Board of Education. To assist in meeting the costs necessary to
implement an arts program, the Board asked a teacher specialist to write a grant
proposal.. This resulted in Montgomery County Public Schools receiving a Federal
government grant for the program which the school system jointly supported.
The ARTS team members were teachers who had background and experience in
classroom teaching as well as in a specific art form. These teachers were familiar with
the elementary curriculum and were able to assist classroom teachers in using arts lesson
that related to it.

72
To maintain funding an arts program must continue to meet the needs of the
system that is supporting it. In the case of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS this was
accomplished by changing direction as the need to do so appeared. In addition the
program maintained a high degree of visibility by inviting school board members,
parents, and administrators to observe and participate in lessons and workshops.
Recommendations for Further Study
One recommendation is that research be done to indicate whether communication
among community, parents, and teachers would affect arts programs. Interrelated ARTS
began with a community group called Concerned Citizens for the Arts. Many programs
reviewed in this study suggested that the inclusion of involved community members was
important to the success of the program. It would also be useful to examine parental
support of standards that include the arts.
In the past two decades here has been extensive research on the effects of music
on the human brain. Relating some of these studies such as those mentioned in Chapter 2,
to arts programs in schools would surely yield support for including such programs in
public schools
An additional recommendation is that control group research to correlate student
academic growth with arts experiences be undertaken. This may be accomplished
through the use of pre-and post-test scores within schools that plan an arts-in-general-
education program This study is focused on the reasons for a particular programs
longevity. Unfortunately no information that concerned student academic gains for
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was available. For arts-in-general-education programs
to gain acceptance, studies of student gains correlated with test scores among programs
with and without arts experiences could be helpful.

73
There are many school systems throughout this country with varying resources,
both financial and cultural. A study of where support for arts programs may be found
(fiscal, cultural, etc.) could be of assistance to those interested in beginning such a
program.
Now that we have National Standards for Arts Education (1994), an arts-in-
general education program should be guided by these standards. The standards should
apply to lessons both for demonstration teaching and for classroom teacher use.. In fact,
the design of any program should include arts standards. A plan for evaluation with
clearly defined objectives based on national standards should be included in the planning
of arts programs.
Schools also have varying needs according to their geographical locations. Big
city school systems have many cultural advantages but may be lacking in community
support. A study of the resources needed in various geographical areas to support both
arts and other academic should be included in the development of a comprehensive
program. .
The gathering of many informed critical evaluations of a program may be more
effective in determining its true value To ensure this, a plan for evaluation with clearly
defined objectives should be included in the design for future projects.

APPENDIX A
ESEA TITLE III PROJECT ARTS FUNDING

Table A-l. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1975
Funds % of Positions
($) Total and Services Provided Results
ESEA
88,437
44 1
Project Director
1
Curriculum Writer/Evaluator
.5
Secretary
4.5
FTE Teacher Assistants
P/T Research Field Team
Consultants
Instructional
Supplies/Equipment
Administrative Travel
Fixed Charges
MCPS Funds
123,913 56 8 Arts Team Members
Inst. Travel
Office Supplies
Telephone
Fixed Charges
96,557
1,000
600
800
14.966
113,923
2 arts teams trained
12 pilot schools served (105 teachers
trained)
2,992 students involved in
demonstration classes twice
monthly
First formal instruction in dance-
drama, K-3
Summer in-service course, EL-16,
taught by arts teams (32 teachers)
3 countrywide workshops presented to
art, music, and PE specialists
Designed staff development program
Collected arts activities for bank
Teacher assistants trained
Monthly workshops held centrally for
all participating teachers
202,360 Fiscal Year 1975 Total
75

76
Table A-2. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1976
Funds % of
($) Total Positions and Services Provided Results
ESEA Funds
123,913
36 1 Project Director
1 Curriculum Writer/Evaluator
1 Full-Time Secretary
2.25 FTE Teacher Assistants
P/T Research Field Team
Consultants
Office Supplies
Substitute Time
Instructional Supplies/
Equipment
Administrative Travel
Instructional Travel
Fixed Charges
MCPS Funds
3 arts teams trained
18 pilot schools served (139 teachers
trained)
3,475 students involved in
demonstration classes twice
monthly
Interrelated arts summer school
taught by arts team
Developed videotapes of arts
processes for in-service use and for
dissemination
Fall in-service course, EL-20, taught
by arts teams (43 teachers)
Teacher assistants trained
Conducted nonpilot school
meetings/workshops
Arts Team
150,681
Members
11,264
Summer Per Diem
FTE Teacher
31,212
Assistants
3,300
Teacher Travel
1,000
Telephone
26.117
Fixed Charges
223,574
347,487 Fiscal Year 1976 Total

77
Table A-3. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1977
Funds % of
($) Total Positions and Services Provided Results
ESEA Funds
120,000 31 1 Project Director
1 Curriculum Writer/Evaluator
1 Full-Time Secretary
1 Clerk Typist
1 Community Coordinator
Consultants
Substitutes
Instructional Supplies
Office Supplies
Administrative Travel
Instructional Travel for
Dissemination
Fixed Charges
MCPS Funds
247,309
Arts Team
154,615
Summer Per
Diem
7,584
FTE Teacher
Assistants
49,705
Teacher Travel
6,216
Telephone
1,500
Fixed Charges
27.689
247,309
Other Funds
8,000* 5
13.523**
21,523
388,832 Fiscal Year 1977 Total
* Alliance for Arts Education
** Handicapped
Continued arts team training
18 pilot schools served (Level III-rV
service) (165 teachers trained)
1 pilot school for handicapped
(second semester)-training 12
teachers
3 satellite schools served-14 teachers
trained
4,956 students involved in
demonstration classes
Developed and implemented a four-
level staff development program
Operated arts resource center
Refined and tested arts activity bank
prior to publishing
Conducted 3 countrywide
administrative arts workshops
with Division of Aesthetic
Education
Conducted fall in-service course, EL-
20 (47 teachers)
Will conduct EL-20 (spring
semester)-art, music, PE, and
classroom teachers (et
accepted)!
Will conduct EL-16 summer in-
service
Developed community support and
awareness for the arts through
community school visits and
special workshops
conducted 56 nonpilot school
workshops through February
1977
Will conduct summer workshop for
special ed teachers
Develop 3 arts support packages to be
integrated into other curriculum
areas
! 16 teacher applicants turned down

78
Table A-4. ESEA Title III Project Arts Funding-Fiscal Year 1978
Funds % of
($) Total Positions and Services Provided Results
ESEA Funds
0
MCPS Funds
259,992
Arts Team
162,015
Summer Per
Diem
8,000
FTE Teacher
Assistants
51,732
Teacher Travel
7,770
Telephone
1,500
Fixed Charges
28.475
259,992
Other Funds
79,000*** 23
30 pilot schools (Level II, III, IV
service) (420 teachers)
10,500 students to be involved in
demonstration teaching
Expanded pilot schools for
handicapped
Will be on call for services for all
MCPS schools 1 week per month
Will conduct additional sections of
in-service course EL-20
throughout county
Will conduct summer in-service
course EL-16
Will conduct community workshops
Will operate Arts Resource Center
Will produce materials for
dissemination
Will develop community resources
for use in schools
338,992
approx. Fiscal Year 1978 Total

APPENDIX B
LESSON PLAN
Title: One Wide River to Cross
Grade level: pre-K or K
Materials: book.One Wide River to Cross adapted by Barbara Emberley. Illustrated by
Ed Emberley
Music objectives:
to experience singing an adaptation of a traditional African American spiritual,
to become aware of the stanza-refrain form of the lyrics and music of the song,
to listen for and be able to identify the rhythm pattern accompanying the words,
One Wide River to Cross
Math objectives:
to use the correct number of fingers to correlate with the numbers in the song,
to explore different combinations of numbers which may be used in simple addition,
to demonstrate the commutative property of addition by reversing the order in which the
addends are shown.
Procedure:
1. Clap and say the title of the book in the rhythm of the words. Explain to the
students that they will clap and sing this rhythm whenever it occurs in the
book/song.
2. Read/sing the story making sure that the students can see the illustrations on each
page. Encourage the student to participate on the words, One wide river to cross
and on the chorus section.
3. Go back to the beginning of the book. Explain that this time every time a number
is mentioned in the song the students will show that number on their fingers using
a different hand each time a number is sung. At the sixth stanza, demonstrate
what you want the students to do and ask them to describe what you did( the
teacher will display five fingers on one hand and one finger on the other to show
six, then reverse so that the opposite hands show each number)
4. Continue through the verses demonstrating the numbers on your fingers and
having the student mirror you.
79

80
6+1 then 1+6
7+1 then 1+7
8+1 then 1+8 (some students may be able to figure out that 4+4 also works here)
9+1 then 1+9 (5+5 also works here)
5. Sing the story again and add this new way to count.
Elaboration:
The following chant is over 100 years old. American slave children would say
this as a hand clapping game.
Old ark she reeled, old ark she rocked
Old ark she sittin on the mountain top

APPENDIX C:
CURRICULUM RESOURCE PACKAGE
Introduction
The lessons in this guide have been designed for use with the sixth grade social
studies unit on Greece. The teacher will also find that some lessons will also serve to
meet such reading/language arts objectives as developing the ability to read narration for
a purpose, developing the ability to interpret creatively, and developing an understanding
that myths reflect the culture that engenders them.
It is intended that this guide will not only provide students with an opportunity to
learn about ancient Greece but to explore some of the ways in which ancient Greece has
contributed to our modem civilization.
Contributors to this guide are: Elizabeth Adams, Marian DiJulio, Lillian Hasko,
Janis Jones, Nancy Kirsch, Ruth Kline, Nancy Kessler, Esther Lakner, Jane Lynn, Diane
Pokras, and Elizabeth Segal. Provided by the Interrelated ARTS Program; Eoline
Kukuk, Coordinator.
Sample Lessons
Lesson 1
Title: Ancient Greek Animal Dances (dance/movement)
Objectives: To identify cultural characteristics evidenced in the life of the ancient
Greeks (Social Studies Objective C606.02)
To study the animal dances of ancient Greece
81

82
Grade level:
Time required:
Materials:
Background:
Procedure:
To develop movement sequences which illustrate solemn or humorous
animal dances
To create a mask which depicts an animal
6
Two 45-minute periods
Rhythm instruments drum, cymbals, tambourines, etc.
The Dance in Ancient Greece, by Lillian B. Lawler, Wesleyan
University Press, Middletown, CT., 1964 (in package)
Materials for making masks paper plates, yam, markers, crayons, hole
punch
The actual dances of the ancient Greeks can only be imagined and
pieced together from their writings and their art. We do know that they
developed many different kinds of dances and that one very important
type was the animal dances.
Many ancient people, including the Greeks, noticed that some animals
seem to actually dance. Apes, elephants, cat animals, dolphins, birds,
bees, and bears are some of the animals which have been observed
doing dancelike movements when they are in the wild state. Depending
on the animal, these movements occur as a solo, a pair, or a group.
In addition, early people were very aware of the importance of animals
and how vital they were to survival. Therefore, the characteristics and
movements of animals were often expressed in the dances created by
people.
Very early animal dances were usually performed in a serious and often
ritualistic manner. However, after many centuries, the animal dances
changed into the form of entertainment called mummery. The animal
mummery of the ancient Greeks was pantomimed by performers who
often wore masks of the animals they were imitating.
Share the background information about the ancient Greek animal
dances.
Discuss and record the students speculations about the importance of
animals to ancient people. For example:
Animals furnished people with food and clothing.
Animals could be dangerous to people.

83
Some animals could be domesticated.
Some animals could furnish pleasure to people.
Some animals were thought to be sacred and were worshiped and
protected.
Some animals were used as sacrifices to the gods.
Share the following list of animals for which there is evidence that they
were depicted in ancient Greek animal dances:
bull and cow bear
snake lion
fish wolf
birds deer
rooster, owl, swallow, fox
stork, nightingale, goat
raven, eagle, hawk horse
griffin donkey
lizard ram
pig or boar panther
Discuss and list with the students the various movements, which each
animal makes. Ask how these movements could be exaggerated.
Example: Bird swooping, flapping, strutting, turning, cocking head,
jumping
Have the students take their self space and try several of the
movement words for the different animals. Use a rhythm instrument
and provide a definite number of counts for each movement. For
example:
Try swooping up and down in any direction while I play the
tambourine for ten counts. End on count ten in a bird shape. Try
it again, but make your movements twice as large. Now try it in
slow motion.
After exploring many of the animals movements with the class, have
the students select the animals, which they would like to describe in
mask and movement. Small groups will most likely evolve. Subgroups
of serious or funny animal mummery could be formed.
Provide time for students to decide and practice:
which movements they will do,
how many counts they will need for their movements,
which rhythm instruments to use for accompaniment, (the dancers
could use an instrument themselves or they could have another
student provide the sounds)
whether they will move as a small group or as individuals.

84
Adaptation for
special needs:
Lesson 2
Title:
Objectives:
what their pathway will be. For example: a curving line, a square,
a circle?
Encourage the students to exaggerate their movements, to change levels,
directions, and speed.
Have the students make a simple mask using the following directions:
Place a paper plate over the face to determine the location of eyes.
Mark lightly with a pencil where the eyes are to be cut. Cut holes for
eyes that are large enough to permit clear vision.
Draw the animal face on the paper plate using large or exaggerated
features. Color with markers or crayons.
Punch holes in sides of the mask and attach yam. Try on mask and
make any necessary adjustments in eyehole openings.
Ask the students to practice performing their movement sequences while
wearing their masks.
Have a sharing time for the individual and group animal dances using
the masks and rhythm instruments.
Allow time for discussing and evaluating the student performances. As
part of the discussion, ask the students to identify movements, which
depicted the corresponding animal movements.
More gifted students may enjoy reading a translation of The Birds by
Aristophanes and speculating where animal movements might have been
used by the characters in the play.
Ancient Greek Olympics (dance/movement)
To identify cultural characteristics evidenced in the life of the ancient
Greeks (Social Studies Objective C606.02)
To identify characteristics of ancient Mediterranean civilizations that are
reflected in Western civilizations. (Social Studies Objective C607.00)
To use movement to learn about the origins of the Greek Olympic
games.

85
Grade level:
Time required:
Materials:
Background:
Procedure:
To create body shapes in the style of ancient Greek sculpture and
artifacts.
6
One hour
Books:
The Art of Ancient Greece by Shirley Glubok, Atheneum, NewYork,
1966 (in package)
Greek Athletic Games by Nancy Cole, Metropolitan Museum of Art (for
professional use only) (in package)
Chalkboard and chalk
Drum
Tape: March of the Olympians, U.S. Marine Band, RCA 78.13 (in
package)
The games of ancient Greece occurred in Olympia, Greece, and were
dedicated to the god Zeus. Zeus lived on Mt. Olympus. Only men
played in the games. All events took place outside in a dirt ring or track.
See Greek Athletic Games introduction for further information.
Share the background information with the students. Show pictures of
ancient Greek sculpture representing sporting events such as the discus
thrower, charioteer, boxer, archer, broad jumper, etc. (found in books
listed above in the Materials section)
Ask the students to bring each pose to life for eight counts and then
freeze in their starting position.
Ask the students to form groups of two or three. Each group will select
a sport from those listed on the board. Ask each group to create an eight
count sequence depicting the selected sport. Encourage the students to
use their bodies as objects (i.e., vaulting pole, discus, etc.) and to give
their compositions more interest by varying the amounts of energy, the
levels, and the directions faced.
Share the movement sequences created by bringing the Greek games to
life. Have the groups perform in a classroom arena (as they would
have been performed in ancient Greece).
The tape March of the Olympians may be used to provide background
music for the movements. Ask the students to freeze in a starting
position as the introduction part of the music is played. They will begin
their movement sequences when the march begins.

86
Extension
Lesson 3
Title:
Objectives:
Grade level:
Time required:
Materials:
Background:
Procedure:
Next, ask each group to select a favorite sport which is part of the
modem Olympic games. Ask the groups to create a new eight count
movement sequence to perform for the class.
Ask the students to compare and contrast the games of today with those
in ancient Greece. Have students identify the sports that were used in
ancient Greece and that are found in modem Olympic games.
The record Give it All Youve Got by Frank Mangione was recorded to
honor the 1980 Olympics. Play the music for the students. Suggest a
modem day sporting event. Have the students identify three different
movements, which interpret the sport. Play the music and have the
students perform the movements. Stop the music, and students freeze.
Repeat the activity with other modem sports.
Have the students develop a list of abilities which one must have to be
good in athletics as well as in dance: discipline, eye-hand/foot
coordination, rhythm, strength, agility, projection, ability to share and
work effectively with a groups, and concentration.
Know Your Roots (dance/movement)
To identify evidence of cultural characteristics from Greece in the
United States today (Social Studies Objective C607.01)
To individually execute movement(s) which represent a specific word
with a Greek or Latin root
6
50 minutes (The lesson may be repeated working with different words).
A set of cards listing roots, prefixes, and suffixes (excerpted from the
Social Studies Instructional Guide. Grade 6, p. 112).
A chalkboard or chart paper.
A stopwatch if a clock with a second hand is not available.
The students should have been introduced to the topic of Greek and
Latin roots and the importance that they have in the English language.
Hold up one of the root cards. Ask the students for a word in which this
root is contained, and then write one of the responses on the board or
chart. Do this for as many of the roots as there are students in the class.
(Make sure that there is an equal number of roots, prefixes, or suffixes

87
Adaptation
Special needs:
that have the letter a at the top comer as have the letter b at the
top). Refer to page 8 for one possible response to each one.
Divide the class in half and give one group the cards with the letter a
on them and the other half with the letter b on them. The class is to be
in two teams. Allow a sufficient amount of time for everyone to think
of movements, which represent their word.
One at a time, have the students portray movements that represent their
particular word. The rest of the team must identify the words. The
teacher should clock the correct response time. The clock should stop as
soon as the word is said and the amount of time taken should be written
on the board. The team has up to 30 seconds to determine the word.
After the clock is stopped, the person from the team who said the word
must be able to give the root and its meaning. If that cannot be done, 30
seconds is written on the board for that team. The object is to have the
lowest number of seconds by the end of the game.
At the conclusion of the lesson, ask the students the following questions:
What effect do words have on the culture of a country?
How does the importance of the root word in our country compare
with the architectural, governmental, and scientific advancements
evident in our society today?
Describe what each of the areas (government, medicine, theatre,
etc.) might be like without the accomplishments made by the
Greeks. Would they possibly have been contributed by another
culture?
For gifted and talented students:
Create a story that uses at least ten words that have Greek or Latin roots,
prefixes or suffices and that has a beginning, middle, or an ending. The
number of words can vary according to the level of ability of the
students.
Using a variety of locomotor and nonlocomotor movements, levels, and
force, have the students interpret the story into a movement sequence.

List of Greek/Latin Roots and Their Meanings
Root
Meaning
Root
Meaning
super
supernatural
urbs
urban
post
post-hypnotic
itis
bronchitis
anti
antisocial
satis
satisfy
pre
predawn
vice
vice principal
inter
intercollegiate
bios
biosattelite
ambi
ambidextrous
faci, factus
manufacture
port
portable
ex, e
exhume
logos
meteorology
dexter
dextral
tele
telephotography
navis
navigate
pro
pro-American
manos
monologue
duco, ductus
aqueduct
aster
asterisk
photos
photoreceptor
pathos
pathetic
in
inaccurate
sub
submarine
demos
demography
graphe
graphite
maturus
maturity
bi
bisect
brevis
brief case
ped
pedal
micros
microwave
trans
transcontinental
lithos
lithology
re
refreeze
bronchosq
bronchitis
contra
contradict
scriptum
scriptwriter
credo
creditable
circle
circular
liber
librarian
Lesson 4
Title: Movement in Sevens (dance/movement)
Objectives: To identify the cultural characteristics evidenced in the life of the ancient
Greeks (Social Studies Objective C606.02)
To create movements in the 7/8 time signature which is characteristic of
Greek music and dance
Grade level: 6
Time required: 45 minutes
Materials: Large laminated chart with a composite of the specific rhythms in 7/8
time (in package)
Nine laminated cards with the specific rhythm and movement guidelines
on each (in package; also see p. 11).
A large open space such as the all-purpose room or gymnasium

89
Background:
Procedure:
Teachers should read the background from the book, The Dance in
Ancient Greece (see pp. 12-13) and paraphrase or select those sections
which seem applicable to the specific classes level of ability.
Students should be acquainted with locomotor and non-locomotor
movements (seep. 14).
Explain that one of the time signatures used in Greek music is 7/8. Also
explain that the movements which will be done are not supposed to
represent Greek folk dances. The lesson involves putting movements to a
designated rhythm in 7/8 time.
Using the rhythm chart (in the package), have the class as a group clap
out all of the nine rhythms.
Review locomotor and nonlocomotor movements with the class by listing
them on the board as follows:
Locomotor walk, run, hop, jump, leap, skip, gallop, slide
Nonlocomotor bend, stretch, push, pull, bounce, shake, twist, swing
Divide the class into nine equal groups and give each group a card with
its specific rhythm and movement guidelines.
Provide the following directions for the groups:
Clap out the rhythm that is on your card
Create movements that correspond to your groups card (except
for the group with a sound, no sounds should be made).
Begin and end the 7 count sequence in the same place and in the
same body position.
Practice the movements a few times so that students will have no
difficulty performing it individually as well as part of a group.
Perform the created movements three times without stopping.
Have each group share its 7/8 movement pattern.
Next, have the members of group # 1 position themselves randomly in
the open space. Do the same for each of the other eight groups (An
example of the way the students might be positioned may be found on p.
11). Explain that everyone will be moving at the same time and that the
7 count sequence will be done three times. Count out loud for sequence
of seven to establish the beat.
Have all of the students practice the movements to the 7 beat rhythm.
Have the students perform their 7 count movement sequence repeating it
eight times.

90
4/4 time is a time signature commonly used in music and dance in the
United States. How did moving in 7/8 time affect your movements? In
what ways were your movements different, the same? Use adjectives to
describe some of your movements. For example: smooth arms, light
steps, etc.
Extension: Video tape the students executing the movements in their own separate
groups and then in the one large group. What differences are evident?
(It should appear that the students are doing completely different
movements. The interesting aspect of observing the group as a whole is
to observe how the movements relate to one another).
Adaptation for
Special Needs: When students are divided into groups, place the nonambulatory students
in the group with only arm movements, or the group doing nonlocomotor
movements.
Movements
1. Some type of locomotor movement or a combination of locomotor movements,
traveling any direction (including turns).
2. Movements of the entire upper body, staying in one place.
3. Any nonlocomotor movement pattern (at least two different types of movements).
4. Movements using only the legs and staying in one place (any level may be chosen
to move in).
5. Movements using only the arms and staying in one place (any level may be
chosen to move in).
6. Locomtor movements and a sound for 1,2, or 3 of those counts; remember the
accent.
7. Any pattern of movements that is stationary, i.e., changing levels, arm/leg
movements.
8. Any change of level(s) other movements may be included.
9. Movements of the arms and locomotor movements
Background for the Dance of Ancient Greece
(All of the following material is paraphrased or quoted from the book, The Dance in
Ancient Greece by Lillian Lawler. Chapter I An Introduction to the Greek Dance, pp.
11-27)

91
No people ever appreciated the dance more than did the ancient Greeks (p 11). The
importance of it is witnessed by the many times it is mentioned in the literature, with
reference given to dancing and dances. Dance held an important place in their religion,
their education, and their lives. Pictures in the book show both men and women dancing.
Dance took on a slightly different meaning than it is as we understand it today. The term
orchestra meant rhythmical movements of many sorts: movements with the feet, the
hands, the eyes, as well as the whole body. Many movement areas were considered
under the large umbrella of dance. Some of these were: a march or procession, a childs
rhythmic game, a ball game, an exhibition of juggling, tumbling or tight rope walking;
also, the rhythmical movements of animals, fish, birds, trees, and flowers. The Greeks
did not think of dance by itself. They always associated it with music and poetry or
verse. Their word mouslike included music, poetry, and dance. It was all considered
the same art.
We know something about the dance in ancient Greece, but we will never be able to
know exactly what the dances were. Some things tell us something about them. The
objects found by archaeologists often have dances or things associated with dance on
them. What has to be remembered is that what is found on the objects are
representations of the ideal of beauty and not necessarily as it really is. Not much is
known about the actual steps. What is usually written is written in descriptive terms such
as the itch, knocking at the door, etc. (p 22). It is very hard to say that some of the
folk dances done by the Greeks today have their beginnings in ancient Greece because
there is no recording of that. Since exact translations are not possible, it is hard to make
inferences from different words used with dance. ... for we shall never, in all
probability, be able to reproduce any ancient dance in its entirety. (p 27).
Some of the words associated with dance and their approximate meanings are as follows:
Schema denoting form, shape, appearance, figure, manner. A way of doing something
(P 25)
Phora carriage; may be the feet, hands, or whole body. It may be a combination of
our word step and movement. It would include such movements as walking, running,
leaping, twisting, or bending (p 26).
Deixis to show or portray; to portray mythical characters (p 26).
Cheironomia gesture (p 27).

APPENDIX D
DARTS LESSON
Title: El Pajaro Cu (the Cu Bird)
Objectives:
Social studies:
To recognize similarities between him/herself and others
Language arts:
to develop understanding of word meanings
to develop ability to interpret creatively
to develop the ability to listen for a purpose
to develop understanding of characters
to develop understanding of conflict and resolution
to develop ability to make predictions.
Drama:
to develop improvisational and pantomime skills
to present ideas in a dramatic form
e to develop self-confidence and a positive image
Grade Level: 2-3, ESOL
Materials: Book El Pajaro Cu by Marjorie E. Herrman. National Textbook Company
Lincolnwood, Ill. 1983. The book contains both the Spanish and English
version of the tale.
Background: Every culture has its own folktales that are special because they belong to
the people. Some are written down while others are merely told.
Sometimes folktales are so old that no one can remember who first told
them. The story of the Cu bird belongs to the Mexican-American people
of Texas and was first told a long time ago in northern Mexico.
Procedure: 1. Invite students to brainstorm the various kinds of birds. Write them on
the board. Encourage students to make up a distinctive sound and
movement for each of the birds, (count to three then say the name of
each of the birds while students make theificalls) Discuss the unique
sounds of each bird and ask:
What might the birds be saying?
How would their call be different if they were in danger?
92

Objective:
Materials:
Procedure:
Objectives:
Materials:
Procedure:
93
What other ways might the birds communicate?
2. Introduce the story to the class by reading up to page 13
3. Introduce the visual art component of the lesson.
The students will create their own Cu bird by assembling and gluing
articles on a flat surface.(collage)
A large bird cut from tagboard. Size should be aprox.2x3 feet.These are
prepared by the teacher(s) before the lesson. Each group of three students
will be given one cutout model of the Cu bird.
Scissors, glue, markers, college materials (feathers, glitter, magazines to
cut up,colored construction paper.
1. Demonstrate how to use colored construction paper to fold and cut
into three-dimensional forms.(fringe, pleat, curl, twist etc.)
2. Using the model bird demonstrate how some of these forms might aid
them in creating feathers for the Cu bird.
3. Divide the class into groups of three. Distribute scissors, glue and
collage materials to each group Give each group its own tagboard Cu
bird model
4. Allow groups enough time to create the plumage on their own Cu bird
models.
5. After cleaning up, display each groups finished product for
discussion.
6. Continue to read the story to the end of the book. Discuss the
definition of the words vain, elegant, dishonor, and traitor citing
examples that reinforce the meaning.
7. Introduce the music/dance component.
MUSIC Students will create a song with original lyrics.
DANCE Student will learn dance steps to accompany their song
Piano or taped music of song melody, chart of dance steps, blank chart
paper
1. Review list of names of birds (on board)
2. Teach by rote the sample stanza of the song:
Oh the (cardinal), oh the (cardinal)
Oh the (cardinal) is a mighty fine bird.
(With his feathers so red and his beak so fat)

94
Oh the (cardinal) is a mighty fine bird.
3. Have the students together with the teacher compose more stanzas of
the song using different bird names and characteristics. Record on
chart paper.
4. Teach the dance steps that accompany the song:
Part A (performed with the first two lines)
Knee bends on the beat
Part B (performed with third line)
Step, step, step, kick(to the right)
Step, step, step, kick(to the left)
Part C (performed with last line)
Step, turn step,(to the right) knee bend
Step, turn, step,(to the left) knee bend
5. Perform the completed song and dance together.
Elaboration: As a group pick three or four words from the story to learn in Spanish.
Read Leo Lionis Tico and the Golden Wings. Compare and contrast the
two books.

REFERENCES
Aaron, J. (1994). Integrating music with core subjects. Music Educators Journal, 80(6),
33-36.
Abies, H. F., Floffer, C. R., and Klotman, R. H. (1994). Foundations of music in
education (2nd ed.). New York: Schirmer Books.
Allison, J. (1978). Jeffco ABC. Music Educators Journal, 64(5), 63-5.
Ambler, N. M., and Strong, B. R. (1981). Art in the classroom: What one elementary
teacher can do. Arts Education and Americans. New York: Longman.
Appell, L. (1979). Arts in Education for handicapped Children. Final Report.
Armstrong, T. (1994). Multiple intelligences in the classroom. Alexandria, VA: The
association for supervision and curriculum development.
Baker, M. (1990) Integrating instruction and implications for the arts (music). Canadian
Music Educator, 32(1), 11-18
Baker, T. L. (1978). Open city project. Music Educators Journal, 64(5), 66-71.
Ball, M. S., and Smith, G. W. (1992). Analyzing visual data. Newbury Park, CA: Sage
Publishing Co.
Barrett, J. R., McCoy, C. W., and Veblen, K. K. (1997). Sound ways of knowing: Music
in the interdisciplinary curriculum. New York: Schirmer/Wadsworth.
Barry, N. H. (1998). Arts integration in the elementary classroom: Conference
development and Evaluation. Update, 17,1,3-7.
Bealmer, W. (Ed.) (1982) The arts: A Basic component of general education.
Springfield, IL: Illinois State Board of Education.
Benson, C. L., and Doane, M. (1982). Project BASIC: Building arts systems into the
curriculum. Art Education, 35(2), 41-43.
Berliner, D. (1985). How memory works: Implications for teachers. Instructor, 94, 14-
15.
95

96
Birge, E. B. (1928). History of public school music in the United States. Washington,
DC: Music Educators National Conference (MENC).
Blau, J. (1989). The shape of culture. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Bloom, A. (1787). The closing of the American mind. New York: Simon and Schuster.
Bloom, B., Englehart, M., Furst, E., Hill, W., and Krathwohl, D. (1956). Taxonomy of
educational objectives: The classification of educational goals. Handbook 1,
cognitive domain. New York: Longmans Green
Bolin, M. J. (1978). Building an ARC in New York City. Music Educators Journal,
65(2), 42-49.
Boyle, J. D., and Thompson, K. (1976). Changing inservice teachers' self-perception of
their ability to be effective teachers of the arts. Journal of Research in Music
Education, 23(4), 187-196.
Bresler, L. (1995). The subserviant, co-equal, affective, and social integration styles and
their implications for the arts. Arts Education Policy review 96(5), 31-37.
Bresler, L., and Stake, R. (1992). Qualitative research methodology in music education.
In R. Colwell (Ed.), Handbook of research on music teaching and learning (pp.).
New York: Schirmer Books.
Brome, J., and Kukuk, E.(1977). Final report. Arts education grant. Office of Education.
Section 409, Title IV, Public Law 93-380.
Broudy, H. S. (1978). How basic is aesthetic education or is art the fourth r? Bulletin of
the Council for Research in Music Education, 57, 1-10.
Carlisle, B. (1990). The making of a grass blade. Battle Creek, MI: W. K. Kellogg
Foundation.
Carter, C. B., and Adams, J. A. (Jan. 1978). ABC program. Music Educators Journal,
64(5), 56-9.
Chapman, R (1998). The arts improve student performance. Educational Digest, 63(8),
58-60.
Choate, R. A. (1968). Documentary report of the Tanglewood Symposium Washington
DC Music Educators National Conference. In L. Choksy, R. M. Abramson, A.E.
Gillespie, and D. Woods (Eds.), Teaching music in the twentieth century. Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Collett, M. J. (1991). Read between the lines: Music as a basis for learning. Music
Educators Journal, 78(3), 42-5.

97
Cornett, C. E. (1999). The arts as meaning makers. Columbus, OH: Merrill Prentice-
Hall.
Costa-Giomi, E., Price, H. E., Raucher, F. H., Schmidt, J., Shackford, M., Sims, W., and
Wilcox, E. (1999). Straight talk about music and research. Teaching Music, 7(3)
29-34.
Council of Arts Accrediting Associations. (1944, March, 1). Briefing paper.
Dean, J., and Gross, I. (1992). Teaching basic skills through art and music. Phi Delta
Kappan, 73(4), 613-618.
Edson, C. H. (1990). Our past and present: Historical inquiry in education. In R. Sherman
and B. Odman (Eds.), Qualitative research in education: Focus and methods.
London: Falmer Press.
Eisner, E. (1978). The impoverished mind. Educational Leadership, 35(8), 591-95.
Eisner, E. W. (1992). The misunderstood role of the arts in human development. Phi
Delta Kappan, 73(8), 591-595.
Efland, A. (1990). A history of art education: Intellectual and social currents in teaching
the visual arts. New York: Teachers College Press.
Ellsworth, J. B. (2000) Surviving change: A survey of educational change models.
Syracuse, N.Y: ERIC Clearinghouse on Information and Technology (ED number
pending, IR030063).
Ely, M., Vinz, R., Downing, M., and Anzul, M. (1997). On writing qualitative research:
Living by words. London: Falmer Press.
Fink, Dean. (2000). Good schools real schools. New York: Teachers College Press.
Fleming, J. (1953). The determination of musical experiences designed to develop the
musical competencies required of elementary schools in Maryland. Journal of
Research in Music Education, 7(1), 59-66.
Flinders, D. J. (1993). From theory and concepts to educational connoisseurship. In D. J.
Flinders and G. E. Mills (Eds.), Theory and concepts in qualitative research:
Perspectives from the field. New York: Teachers College Press.
Fowler, C. (1979). On education. High Fidelity and Music of America, 29(12), 8-9.
Fowler, C. (1988). Toward a democratic art: A reconstructivist view of music education.
In T. Gates (Ed.), Music Education in the United States: Contemporary Issues.
Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press.

98
Fowler, C. (1990). Recognizing the role of artistic intelligences. Music Educators
Journal, 7(1), 24-7.
Fowler, C. (1996). Strong arts, strong schools. New York: Oxford University Press.
Fowler, C., McMullan, B. J., and McLaughlin, C. (1991). Understanding how the arts
contribute to excellent Education. Prepared for the National Endowment for the
Arts. Contract DCA 90-50.
Frank, K. A., Topper, A., and Zhao, Y. (August 2000). Diffusion of innovations, social
capital, and sense of community. Presented at the annual meeting of the American
Sociological Association, Washington, DC.
Gardner, H. (1993a). Frames of mind: The theory of multiple intelligences. New York:
Basic Books.
Gardner, H. (1993b). Multiple intelligences: The theory in practice. New York: Basic
Books.
Geoghegan, W. (1994). Replacing the arts in education. Phi Delta Kappan, 75(6), 456-
458.
Goldberg, M. (1997). Arts and learning: An integrated approach to teaching and
learning in multicultural and multilingual settings. New York: Longman.
Goodlad, J. I. (1980). Beyond the rhetoric of promise. In J. Hausman & J. Wright (Eds.),
Arts and the schools. New York: McGraw Hill.
Grandin, T, Peterson, M., and Shaw, G. L. (1998). Spatial-temporal versus language-
analytic reasoning: The role of music training. Arts Education Policy Review,
99(6), 11-14.
Greenberg, P. (1979). Coming to whose senses? Arts Education, 32(6), 8-10.
Guba, E. G., and Lincoln, Y. S. (1983). Effective evaluation. San Francisco: Jossey-
Bass.
Hallinger, P., and Murphy, J. (1986). The social context of effective schools. American
Journal of Education, 94(3), 328
Hanna, J. L.(1992). Arts, academics, and productive citizens. Phi Delta Kappan, 73,
601-607.
Healy, J. M. (1990). Endangered minds: Why our children don't think. New York: Simon
and Schuster.

99
Heller, G. N. (1985). On the meaning and value of historical research in music education.
Journal of Research in Music Education, 55(4), 4-6.
Heller, G. N., and Wilson B. D (1992). Historical research. In R. Colwell (Ed.),
Handbook of research on music teaching and learning. New York: Schirmer
Books.
Hoffer, C. R. (1986). Standards in music education. What are they? Why are they
important? Music Educators Journal, 72(May), 50-51
Hoffer, C.R. (1993). Introduction to music education. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth
Publishing Company.
Kaagan, S. (1998). Arts education: Schooling with imagination, Principal 77(4), 16-19.
Karel, L. C. (1966). Teacher education in the related arts. Music Educators Journal,
55(2), 38-43.
Kiester, G. J. (1985). Total education: Arts balance the analytical with the aesthetic.
Music Educators Journal, 75(2). 24-8.
King, A.R., and Brownell, J. A. (1966). The curriculum and the discipline of knowledge:
A theory of curriculum practice. New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Klimpton, J. (1985). Public education and the arts: Linked by necessity. Reston, VA:
Music Educators National Conference (MENC).
Kukuk, E. (1977). Evaluation report. ESEA Title III Project ARTS. Montgomery County
Public Schools. Montgomery County, MD.
Larson, S. (1995). Integrated music and improvisation: Teaching musicianship and
theory through menus, maps, and models. College Music Symposium, 55,76-90.
Lee, R. T. (1985). Expanding the role of the arts in education. Music Educators Journal,
72(2), 28-31
Leng, X., and Shaw, G. L. (1991). Toward a neural theory of higher brain function using
music as a window Concepts in Neuroscience, 2,229.
Lichtenstein, G., McLaughlin, M., and Knudsen, J. (1991). Teacher empowerment and
professional knowledge. Stanford, CA: Stanford University, Center for
Educational Policy Research.
Lindsay, P. J. (1978). Points of view: the arts in general educatioa Music Educators
Journal, 64(9), 45.

100
Madsen, C. K., and Madsen, C. H., Jr. (1970). Experimental research in music. Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Miller, S. I., and Fredericks, M. L. (1994). Qualitative Research Methods. New York:
Peter Lang.
Murphy, J., and Jones, L. (1976). Making connections during the middle learning years
(1990).. Washington, DC: Research in Arts Education, U.S. Department of
Health, Education, and Welfare.
National Commission on Excellence in Education. (1983, April). A nation at risk: The
imperative for educational reform. A report to the Nation and the Secretary of
Education, United States department of Education, Washington, DC.
National Standards for Arts Education. (1994). Music Educators National Conference,
Reston, Va.
Oddleifson, E. (1991) The case for the arts. Context, 47, 37-46.
Office of Community and Secondary Education. (1981). An approaach to learning
through the arts: Final report [Brochure]. Washington, DC: Elementary and
Secondary Education Act Title IV-C.
Office of Education. (1977). Project ARTS Final Report: Arts education program grant.
Section 409 Title IV Public Law 93-380 ESEA Title III Montgomery County
Public Schools.
Persichette, K. (1999). A change theory for schools: Some basic principles. A
presentation for the 1999 SITE International Conference, San Antonio, TX.
Phelps, R. P., Ferrara, L., and Goolsby, T. (1993). A guide to research in music
education. Landham, MD: Scarecrow Press.
Raucher, F. H., Shaw, G. L., Levine, L. J., Wright, E. L., Dennis, W.R., and Newcomb,
R. L. (1997). Music training causes long-term enhancement of preschool
childrens reasoning. Neurological Research, 19, 2-8.
Reimer, B. (1989). A philosophy of music education. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-
Hall.
Remer, J. (1996). Beyond enrichment: Building effective arts partnerships with schools
and your community. New York: American Council for the Arts.
Renzulli, J., Smith, L., and Reis, S. (1982). Curriculum compacting: An essential strategy
for working with gifted students. Elementary School Journal, 82, 185-94.

101
Reynolds, C. (1979). Helping classroom staff teach general music. Music Educators
Journal, (55(8), 47-49.
Reynolds, J. (1966). Music outlines for elementary teachers. Music Educators Journal,
53(4), 44-46.
Richardson, A. S. (1998). A summary of the presentation on arts education assessment:
Gardner's model. Paper presented at the Montgomery County Board of Education
Retreat, MD.
Rogers, E. M. (1995). Diffusion of innovations (4th ed.). New York: The Free Press.
Rockefeller, D. Jr. (1977). Arts, education, and Americans. Panel of the American
council for the arts in education. Coming to our senses: The significance of the
arts for American education. New York: McGraw Hill.
Rogers, F. W. (1977). Arts education has arrived; Now what? Arts Education, 30(7), 14-
15.
Ruccius, E. (1994). Developing interdisciplinary arts programs. Update, 12(2), 28-31.
Shepherd, B. (1999). Forward to Cornett (Ed.). The arts as meaning makers. Columbus,
OH: Merrill Prentice-Hall.
Sherman, R. R., and Webb, R. B. (1990). Qualitative research in education: Focus and
methods. London: Falmer Press.
Sween, J. C. (1984). Montgomery County: Two centuries of change. Beverly Hills, CA:
Windsor Publications.
Sween, J. C., and Offutt, W. (1999). Montgomery County: Centuries of change. Sun
Valley, CA: American Historical Press.
Tellstromn, T. A. (1771). Music in American education. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and
Winston, Inc.
Trescott, J. (1996). A is for arts education. The Washington Post, October 12.
Trupia, C. J. (1978). Project search. Music Educators Journal 64(5), 71-2.
Turner, R. W. (1984). Whats basic? Ask this superintendent. Music Educators Journal,
70(6) 35-36.
Veblen, K. K., and Elliott, D. J. (2000, Fall). Integration: For or against? General Music
Today, 14,4

102
Vigneault, M., May, G., and Johnson, R. (1978). Points of view: The arts in general
education Music Educators Journal, 64(9), 47.
Wenner, G. C. (1976). Arts in the mainstream of education. Music Educators Journal,
62(8), 28-36.
Wenner, G. C. (1978). Arts in general education: A multifaceted concept. Music
Educators Journal, 64(5), 28.
Williams, H. M. (1995). Dont ignore the arts. USA Today, 124 (Sept).
Wykell, A. (1996, Winter, Spring). Integration, infusion, interdisciplinary. ACE/FAAE,
Arts for a Complete Education/Florida Alliance for Arts Education, 5(10), 4.

BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH
Elizabeth Adams was bom in New Jersey. She attended Western Maryland
College, where she received her Bachelor of Arts in Music Education. She taught grades
4, 5, and 6 in Fairfax County, Virginia, and in Carroll and Montgomery Counties in
Maryland. She received her Master of Education degree from Western Maryland College,
with a major in Administration. She then taught Elementary Music for 2 years before
joining the Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS program in 1976 as an ARTS team member
in music. In addition she was an adjunct professor at Trinity College in Washington, DC.
Ms. Adams retired from public school teaching in 1993 when she and her
husband, Dr. David Young, came to Gainesville, Florida. Dr. Young became a Graduate
Research Professor in the Theatre Department at the University of Florida, and Ms.
Adams began her studies at the University.
In addition to teaching, Ms. Adams has designed and conducted workshops for
the following: National Committee Arts for the Handicapped, Washington, DC; New
Orleans Parish Schools, Louisiana; University of Houston, Texas; Norfolk Public
Schools, Virginia; Oklahoma City Schools; Wolftrap Foundation, Wolftrap Farms,
Virginia; and Duval County Public Schools, Florida.
Her publications include the music component of four guides to communications
in the arts, published by the John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts, and
coauthorship of an opera box, published by the Metropolitan Opera Company, New
York.
103

I certify that I have read this study and that in my opinion it conforms to
acceptable standards of scholarly presentation and is fully adequate, in scope and quality,
as a dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
Charles R. Hoffer, Chair
Professor of Music
I certify that I have read this study and that in my opinion it conforms to
acceptable standards of scholarly presentation and is fully adequate, in scope and quality,
as a dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
David Z. Kushner
Professor of Music
I certify that I have read this study and that in my opinion it conforms to
acceptable standards of scholarly presentation and is fully adequate, in scope and quality,
as a dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
Camille M. Smith
Associate Professor of Music
I certify that I have read this study and that in my opinion it conforms to
acceptable standards of scholarly presentation and is fully adequate, in scope and quality,
as a dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
Timothy S. Brophy
Assistant Professor of Music
I certify that I have read this study and that in my opinion it conforms to
acceptable standards of scholarly presentation and is fully adequate, in scope and quality,
as a dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
Linda L. Lamme
Professor of Teaching and Learning

This dissertation was submitted to the Graduate Faculty of the College of Fine
Arts and to the Graduate School and was accepted as partial fulfillment of the
requirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
December 2002 odjosjeM'
Dean, College of Fine Arts
Dean, Graduate School



84
Adaptation for
special needs:
Lesson 2
Title:
Objectives:
what their pathway will be. For example: a curving line, a square,
a circle?
Encourage the students to exaggerate their movements, to change levels,
directions, and speed.
Have the students make a simple mask using the following directions:
Place a paper plate over the face to determine the location of eyes.
Mark lightly with a pencil where the eyes are to be cut. Cut holes for
eyes that are large enough to permit clear vision.
Draw the animal face on the paper plate using large or exaggerated
features. Color with markers or crayons.
Punch holes in sides of the mask and attach yam. Try on mask and
make any necessary adjustments in eyehole openings.
Ask the students to practice performing their movement sequences while
wearing their masks.
Have a sharing time for the individual and group animal dances using
the masks and rhythm instruments.
Allow time for discussing and evaluating the student performances. As
part of the discussion, ask the students to identify movements, which
depicted the corresponding animal movements.
More gifted students may enjoy reading a translation of The Birds by
Aristophanes and speculating where animal movements might have been
used by the characters in the play.
Ancient Greek Olympics (dance/movement)
To identify cultural characteristics evidenced in the life of the ancient
Greeks (Social Studies Objective C606.02)
To identify characteristics of ancient Mediterranean civilizations that are
reflected in Western civilizations. (Social Studies Objective C607.00)
To use movement to learn about the origins of the Greek Olympic
games.


51
Next the ARTS teams visited participating teachers in their schools approximately
twice monthly to do demonstration teaching, conferencing, and coplanning with teachers.
Each teacher received up to four semesters of follow-up service, concentrating one
semester on each art form. A teacher attaining the objectives for level 3 moved to level 4.
Finally the ARTS teams were available as consultants to teachers on an on-call
basis (Evaluation Report 1977) In order to explain the program to prospective teachers, a
photographer from Montgomery County School System helped the teams put together a
slide tape show. This explained all of the levels of service and allowed the viewers to see
pictures of the teams in action. Figure 4 illustrates a visual art teacher giving follow-up
service in the classroom.
Figure 4. Art Teacher in the Classroom
At the end of the 1979 school year, the school system sold the Larchmont school
building, and the program was forced to move again. This time it was to Connecticut Park
School in Silver Spring. The building was a school that had been closed due to lack


53
programs for science and arts teachers to get together to design interrelated lessons
including both subjects. This was to develop into an important adjunct program for
Interrelated ARTS, the Connecticut Park Center School.
The center was originally at North Chevy Chase School. The town owned the
property but the lease said it belonged to the school system as long as it was used
as a school, so Interrelated ARTS was moved in to hold it (during renovation).
The math and science specialists were put there as well. Then teachers (math and
science and ARTS team members) started to work together to make connections.
As computers improved in quality there was more to do with visual arts. ARTS
Team members did preparation lessons with teachers and kids in the schools
before they came to the center. For science and math, teachers would come in
after school. (Bill Mac Donald, Science specialist)
Connecticut Park Center School
When the year of occupying North Chevy Chase was over, both Interrelated
ARTS and the science program moved back to Connecticut Park, and the Connecticut
Park Center School became an important part of the Interrelated ARTS program. This
program offered a unique opportunity for students to acquire specific skills in content
areas and to participate in interdisciplinary studies usually not offered in their home
schools.
The classes offered were described in a catalog that was sent to all of the
elementary schools in the county, and classes were brought by school buses to the center.
Some of the offerings could accommodate two or more classes, while for others it was
more feasible to have one class at a time. Prior to their students coming to the center,
teachers attended after-school workshops given by the ARTS and science teacher who
would be teaching their classes. This allowed the classroom teacher to prepare the class
for the experience as well as to provide follow up.
An example of one of the most popular offerings was archeology. An entire
classroom was set up as a simulated archeological dig. This was achieved by building a


68
Project ARTS at the same time the demands have increased for the program. At the end
of the three years of funding through grants, a core group of administrators met regularly
with the Division of Aesthetic Education to plan the development of a comprehensive
arts program for Montgomery County Public Schools.


72
To maintain funding an arts program must continue to meet the needs of the
system that is supporting it. In the case of Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS this was
accomplished by changing direction as the need to do so appeared. In addition the
program maintained a high degree of visibility by inviting school board members,
parents, and administrators to observe and participate in lessons and workshops.
Recommendations for Further Study
One recommendation is that research be done to indicate whether communication
among community, parents, and teachers would affect arts programs. Interrelated ARTS
began with a community group called Concerned Citizens for the Arts. Many programs
reviewed in this study suggested that the inclusion of involved community members was
important to the success of the program. It would also be useful to examine parental
support of standards that include the arts.
In the past two decades here has been extensive research on the effects of music
on the human brain. Relating some of these studies such as those mentioned in Chapter 2,
to arts programs in schools would surely yield support for including such programs in
public schools
An additional recommendation is that control group research to correlate student
academic growth with arts experiences be undertaken. This may be accomplished
through the use of pre-and post-test scores within schools that plan an arts-in-general-
education program This study is focused on the reasons for a particular programs
longevity. Unfortunately no information that concerned student academic gains for
Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS was available. For arts-in-general-education programs
to gain acceptance, studies of student gains correlated with test scores among programs
with and without arts experiences could be helpful.


96
Birge, E. B. (1928). History of public school music in the United States. Washington,
DC: Music Educators National Conference (MENC).
Blau, J. (1989). The shape of culture. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Bloom, A. (1787). The closing of the American mind. New York: Simon and Schuster.
Bloom, B., Englehart, M., Furst, E., Hill, W., and Krathwohl, D. (1956). Taxonomy of
educational objectives: The classification of educational goals. Handbook 1,
cognitive domain. New York: Longmans Green
Bolin, M. J. (1978). Building an ARC in New York City. Music Educators Journal,
65(2), 42-49.
Boyle, J. D., and Thompson, K. (1976). Changing inservice teachers' self-perception of
their ability to be effective teachers of the arts. Journal of Research in Music
Education, 23(4), 187-196.
Bresler, L. (1995). The subserviant, co-equal, affective, and social integration styles and
their implications for the arts. Arts Education Policy review 96(5), 31-37.
Bresler, L., and Stake, R. (1992). Qualitative research methodology in music education.
In R. Colwell (Ed.), Handbook of research on music teaching and learning (pp.).
New York: Schirmer Books.
Brome, J., and Kukuk, E.(1977). Final report. Arts education grant. Office of Education.
Section 409, Title IV, Public Law 93-380.
Broudy, H. S. (1978). How basic is aesthetic education or is art the fourth r? Bulletin of
the Council for Research in Music Education, 57, 1-10.
Carlisle, B. (1990). The making of a grass blade. Battle Creek, MI: W. K. Kellogg
Foundation.
Carter, C. B., and Adams, J. A. (Jan. 1978). ABC program. Music Educators Journal,
64(5), 56-9.
Chapman, R (1998). The arts improve student performance. Educational Digest, 63(8),
58-60.
Choate, R. A. (1968). Documentary report of the Tanglewood Symposium Washington
DC Music Educators National Conference. In L. Choksy, R. M. Abramson, A.E.
Gillespie, and D. Woods (Eds.), Teaching music in the twentieth century. Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Collett, M. J. (1991). Read between the lines: Music as a basis for learning. Music
Educators Journal, 78(3), 42-5.


36
Formal Reports
Two formal reports were submitted to the Montgomery County School Board
following the completion of the federally funded program. (Kukuk 1977; Brome and
Kukuk 1977) These included both an Evaluation and a Final Report. These documents,
invaluable in providing a record of how and why the program began and was operated,
were prepared in 1977 by the coordinator, curriculum writer, and all of the ARTS team
members. The Evaluation report contains results of a telephone survey, structured
interviews, principals evaluations, and administrative workshop evaluations. The Final
Report contains descriptions and evaluations of project ARTS as well as copies of
brochures, agendas for workshops and several groups of lessons that were prepared by
ARTS team members. These volumes, however useful in recording the beginnings of the
program, were the only comprehensive written data available. To obtain the history of the
remaining years it was necessary to rely on the memory of the researcher and those who
were interviewed. Fortunately, many of the lesson plans had been kept both by the
researcher and other ARTS team members.
In addition to the documents mentioned above, there are four books of lesson
plans written by team members. Additional documents were those prepared by ARTS
team members for Making Connections During the Middle Learning Years, (Maryland
Alliance for Arts Education 1990), lessons, materials from curriculum support packages,
and written records from the DARTS program described in Chapter 4.
Organizing evidence in a historical investigation is primarily concerned with the
passage of time. Flistorians must explain events as they unfold. Sequence is fundamental
to history (Heller 1985). In order to clarify the sequence of events, Table 1 is presented to
assist in understanding simultaneous events that occurred in the life of Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS.


BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH
Elizabeth Adams was bom in New Jersey. She attended Western Maryland
College, where she received her Bachelor of Arts in Music Education. She taught grades
4, 5, and 6 in Fairfax County, Virginia, and in Carroll and Montgomery Counties in
Maryland. She received her Master of Education degree from Western Maryland College,
with a major in Administration. She then taught Elementary Music for 2 years before
joining the Project ARTS/Interrelated ARTS program in 1976 as an ARTS team member
in music. In addition she was an adjunct professor at Trinity College in Washington, DC.
Ms. Adams retired from public school teaching in 1993 when she and her
husband, Dr. David Young, came to Gainesville, Florida. Dr. Young became a Graduate
Research Professor in the Theatre Department at the University of Florida, and Ms.
Adams began her studies at the University.
In addition to teaching, Ms. Adams has designed and conducted workshops for
the following: National Committee Arts for the Handicapped, Washington, DC; New
Orleans Parish Schools, Louisiana; University of Houston, Texas; Norfolk Public
Schools, Virginia; Oklahoma City Schools; Wolftrap Foundation, Wolftrap Farms,
Virginia; and Duval County Public Schools, Florida.
Her publications include the music component of four guides to communications
in the arts, published by the John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts, and
coauthorship of an opera box, published by the Metropolitan Opera Company, New
York.
103


62
At Chevy Chase the opportunity presented itself to set up a center school. Math,
science, and CRI (computer related instruction) had been looking for an
opportunity to do this. ... We needed to be exemplary and integrate arts and
science. (Bill MacDonald, science specialist)
If you look back closely you can see how things that were politically important
became implemented, for instance handicapped kids when special education was
being stressed, and gifted and talented kids, and of course middle school.
(Waveline Starns, Coordinator for Gifted and Talented Programs)
When Ann (Richardson) realized that we were in danger of being cut because of
computers, she was very smart to go to another grade and that what we had to
offer could be expanded for secondary education. (Betty Weincek, dance
specialist)
Work with Classroom Teachers
Another major correlate to longevity appears to have been the programs attention
to the classroom teacher. It would seem that classroom teachers who want to integrate (or
interrelate) appropriately need the resources and support of arts specialists. They also
need extensive training (Wykell 1996). Figure 5 illustrates a classroom teacher receiving
instructions in painting from an ARTS team member.
Figure 5. Teaching Visual Art


REFERENCES
Aaron, J. (1994). Integrating music with core subjects. Music Educators Journal, 80(6),
33-36.
Abies, H. F., Floffer, C. R., and Klotman, R. H. (1994). Foundations of music in
education (2nd ed.). New York: Schirmer Books.
Allison, J. (1978). Jeffco ABC. Music Educators Journal, 64(5), 63-5.
Ambler, N. M., and Strong, B. R. (1981). Art in the classroom: What one elementary
teacher can do. Arts Education and Americans. New York: Longman.
Appell, L. (1979). Arts in Education for handicapped Children. Final Report.
Armstrong, T. (1994). Multiple intelligences in the classroom. Alexandria, VA: The
association for supervision and curriculum development.
Baker, M. (1990) Integrating instruction and implications for the arts (music). Canadian
Music Educator, 32(1), 11-18
Baker, T. L. (1978). Open city project. Music Educators Journal, 64(5), 66-71.
Ball, M. S., and Smith, G. W. (1992). Analyzing visual data. Newbury Park, CA: Sage
Publishing Co.
Barrett, J. R., McCoy, C. W., and Veblen, K. K. (1997). Sound ways of knowing: Music
in the interdisciplinary curriculum. New York: Schirmer/Wadsworth.
Barry, N. H. (1998). Arts integration in the elementary classroom: Conference
development and Evaluation. Update, 17,1,3-7.
Bealmer, W. (Ed.) (1982) The arts: A Basic component of general education.
Springfield, IL: Illinois State Board of Education.
Benson, C. L., and Doane, M. (1982). Project BASIC: Building arts systems into the
curriculum. Art Education, 35(2), 41-43.
Berliner, D. (1985). How memory works: Implications for teachers. Instructor, 94, 14-
15.
95


2
The overall question this research proposes to answer, then, is what are the
attributes of a successful interrelated arts program ? More specifically, because this
program lasted for more than 20 years, what major factors led to the longevity of this
program? Another important question is, How did this program achieve the quality that
led to its longevity? A final question is, How was this program able to maintain the
funding necessary for it to operate for such a long period of time? This study addressed
these primary research questions.
Rationale
Although there seems to be an increase in the body of literature concerning the
value of interrelating arts and academic skills, little attention has been paid to the manner
in which this interrelation may be best accomplished. Support and training in the arts for
classroom teachers is, at best, a random commodity in most school systems. Curricula
come and go at an alarming rate, and arts-in-general-education programs are no
exception. Information on factors that contributed to the longevity of Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS may assist other curriculum designers in planning arts-in-
general-education programs. Theories as to the and longevity of the program are
examined in light of data collected from documents, interviews, and personal
recollections.
Schools are often burdened with increasingly greater expectations; yet at the same
time they are criticized for producing graduates who are not able to read, write, or
calculate on a sufficiently high level to hold jobs or become productive community
citizens. Periodically, school districts try to fix the problem of lower test scores with a
back to basics movement. This movement is usually defined as reducing frills
(including art and music). Remer (1996) claims that for the arts to be considered a basic


30
- How may a classroom teacher best acquire a basic understanding and knowledge
of using arts in the classroom?
What follow up services need to be provided to increase teacher knowledge and
confidence? (Cornett 1999).
The history of an exemplary program that lasted for over 20 years, Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS, will point to answers for the questions posited above and make
it possible for other programs in the arts to emulate this program in order to become a
more integral part of the school curriculum. By pursuing the path of arts integration,
schools will not only be better equipped to meet the challenges of the future, but provide
pleasing experiences for all participants along the way (Kaagan 1998).


89
Background:
Procedure:
Teachers should read the background from the book, The Dance in
Ancient Greece (see pp. 12-13) and paraphrase or select those sections
which seem applicable to the specific classes level of ability.
Students should be acquainted with locomotor and non-locomotor
movements (seep. 14).
Explain that one of the time signatures used in Greek music is 7/8. Also
explain that the movements which will be done are not supposed to
represent Greek folk dances. The lesson involves putting movements to a
designated rhythm in 7/8 time.
Using the rhythm chart (in the package), have the class as a group clap
out all of the nine rhythms.
Review locomotor and nonlocomotor movements with the class by listing
them on the board as follows:
Locomotor walk, run, hop, jump, leap, skip, gallop, slide
Nonlocomotor bend, stretch, push, pull, bounce, shake, twist, swing
Divide the class into nine equal groups and give each group a card with
its specific rhythm and movement guidelines.
Provide the following directions for the groups:
Clap out the rhythm that is on your card
Create movements that correspond to your groups card (except
for the group with a sound, no sounds should be made).
Begin and end the 7 count sequence in the same place and in the
same body position.
Practice the movements a few times so that students will have no
difficulty performing it individually as well as part of a group.
Perform the created movements three times without stopping.
Have each group share its 7/8 movement pattern.
Next, have the members of group # 1 position themselves randomly in
the open space. Do the same for each of the other eight groups (An
example of the way the students might be positioned may be found on p.
11). Explain that everyone will be moving at the same time and that the
7 count sequence will be done three times. Count out loud for sequence
of seven to establish the beat.
Have all of the students practice the movements to the 7 beat rhythm.
Have the students perform their 7 count movement sequence repeating it
eight times.


APPENDIX D
DARTS LESSON
Title: El Pajaro Cu (the Cu Bird)
Objectives:
Social studies:
To recognize similarities between him/herself and others
Language arts:
to develop understanding of word meanings
to develop ability to interpret creatively
to develop the ability to listen for a purpose
to develop understanding of characters
to develop understanding of conflict and resolution
to develop ability to make predictions.
Drama:
to develop improvisational and pantomime skills
to present ideas in a dramatic form
e to develop self-confidence and a positive image
Grade Level: 2-3, ESOL
Materials: Book El Pajaro Cu by Marjorie E. Herrman. National Textbook Company
Lincolnwood, Ill. 1983. The book contains both the Spanish and English
version of the tale.
Background: Every culture has its own folktales that are special because they belong to
the people. Some are written down while others are merely told.
Sometimes folktales are so old that no one can remember who first told
them. The story of the Cu bird belongs to the Mexican-American people
of Texas and was first told a long time ago in northern Mexico.
Procedure: 1. Invite students to brainstorm the various kinds of birds. Write them on
the board. Encourage students to make up a distinctive sound and
movement for each of the birds, (count to three then say the name of
each of the birds while students make theificalls) Discuss the unique
sounds of each bird and ask:
What might the birds be saying?
How would their call be different if they were in danger?
92


25
JEFFCO had a substantial in-service training component and was aimed at
enhancing instruction in basic skill through the arts in grades kindergarten
through 12. No evaluations on the outcomes of the program were located.
The program in the District of Columbia was also active in providing in-service
training. This program used an evaluation model that was developed by the
Division of Quality Assurance of the school system and that showed statistically
significant growth in student test scores.
LEAP is one program that not only is still in existence but it has expanded to
include 450 schools in the northeast U.S. and brings experts in not only arts but
also all curriculum areas to work with classroom teachers. There are 64
subheadings in the arts that are currently listed in the LEAP web page.
(LEAPNY.org)
PROPEL was concerned with expanding the teaching of music specialists to
include interdisciplinary learning in other curriculum areas. Subjective evaluation
was accomplished through student reflection as each student described the extent
of his/her participation in a project.
It is clear that most of these programs were successful on a short term basis, but
none, with the exception of LEAP, is still in existence. The life span of most was from
three to five years. Some were designed for early childhood, some for secondary schools,
and some for elementary schools. Some were funded through organizations such as the
John D. Rockefeller 3rd foundation, (JEFFCO and ABC) and some through the local
school districts (Open City and the DC Program). All included in-service training for
classroom teachers. In-service training seemed to be the only vehicle for continuation of
using the arts in general education.
Effectiveness of Arts in General Education
Since the presence of arts in school curricula affects both those who receive
instruction, and those who provide it, program effectiveness may be viewed from both
those points of view. Several studies have documented these effects.


11
1966, an estimated $100 million (mostly under ESEA titles) dealt in some way with arts
education. Money from the Arts and Humanities Program backed many programs to
introduce theater and dance to school curricula and did much to strengthen all the arts in
general education (Murphy and Jones 1976).
Even so, little concern was given to the concept of classroom teachers providing
arts programs or relating arts to academic curriculum before the 1970s. Some schools
employed music specialists, but they were usually responsible for so many students that
ongoing programs were difficult to maintain. Reynolds (1966), for example, described
teaching a 30-minute lesson each week to 40 classes. She also complained of no
carryover or reinforcement, of all classes using the same text, and of classroom teachers
remaining in their rooms rather than participating in the lessons.
New Directions
There was a great expansion of support for the arts in the 1970s. This expansion
was indicated by greatly augmented levels of both private and public spending in the arts
(Blau 1989). In the mid 1970s there was some impact on teacher training programs that
could be attributed to increasing awareness of the value of integrating arts and
academics.
By that time, arts educators recognized a need for a balanced curriculum in
elementary education that developed all the sensory and cognitive capacities of children
and that used all of the modes of expression possible to human beings (Eisner 1978).
Broudy (1978) told educators that the case for arts education depends on what art can do
to clarify and enrich experience that other subjects in the curriculum cannot. He
indicated that arts are basic, that the aesthetic response is indispensable to all experience,
and that instruction in the aesthetic response is basic and necessary (Broudy 1978).


20
many school pupils are actually receiving the kind of consistent and sequential exposure
to the arts that can produce real results.
By 1996, the Kennedy Center had launched a national drive to push the benefits
of the arts in the schools. According to the Chairman of the center Roger L. Stevens, the
purpose of the initiative is to integrate the arts and arts education into the lives of every
American student (Trescott 1996).
Program Development and Evaluation
Throughout all of this time, a variety of arts education programs were in existence
at various locations in the United States, but with little commonality in the basic
structure. Each curricular design was geared to the interests and needs of an individual
school or school district. In a survey of 27 programs, Lee (1985) found that arts
education programs occurred both within and outside the school setting. They usually
received outside financial assistance, lasted one to five years, and became more internal
only when their funding was included as part of the school budget.
Program Descriptions
Goodlad (1977) surveyed extant programs in arts instruction in the United States
and made observations in 200 classrooms, 67 schools, and 13 major population centers. It
was noted that arts instruction was included in kindergarten but fell off rapidly after that.
Classroom teachers (who were thought to have a limited interest in the arts and to be
inadequately trained to teach them) taught 90% of elementary school arts (Goodlad
1977).
Several representative examples of arts in education programs that began in the
1970s are identified here as more or less typical. Some were rigorously evaluated. When
that is the case, empirical evidence is cited. Funding sources are reported where relevant.


50
time teaching the course had been considered part of the job, and the teachers received
no extra remuneration for conducting it.
By 1978 the program had outgrown the space provided for it at Ashburton
Elementary School, and so two weeks before the opening of school in 1978, the program
moved to Larchmont School in Bethesda, Maryland. This was an elementary school that
had closed due to lack of enrollment. Ample space was therefore available for workshops
and for each team member to have a separate office. It also had an empty library with
plenty of room for the rapidly expanding resource center. Another advantage was that
Larchmont was only a few blocks from the Washington Beltway and Interstate Route
270. Team members were thus able to reach the schools more efficiently.
Levels of Service
The program was increasingly popular, with many more principals calling to
request having their schools included. In order to more clearly define the services offered
to teachers, levels of service were established
Through a 1 -hour orientation session, the staff demonstrated the integrated arts
approach and described the project services available. Teachers who were interested in
receiving regular services of the ARTS team entered Level 2.
A three-credit semester in-service course gave teachers a basic understanding
of the four art forms, and through active participation, increased the teachers confidence
in the arts. If at least five teachers from one school completed the course, the ARTS
teams provided regular in-school follow-up services. Teachers who took the course
learned strategies in teaching through the arts.


38
The study reviews the history of arts education in public schools in the United
States, specifically arts-in-general-education programs. Interview data, formal reports,
reflective observations, and photographs are used to describe the history of Project
ARTS/Interrelated ARTS and to determine the reasons for the longevity of this program.
In qualitative inquiry the researcher is an important instrument in providing insights to
experience as it is lived or felt. In beginning this study it was imperative to determine
whether sufficient data that either agreed with or differed from the biases and
assumptions of the researcher could be obtained. The process of gathering the data for a
valid historical review included many aspects. Because qualitative research is context
specific the researcher found it necessary to include a brief history of Montgomery
County, Maryland including the growth of the public school system in the county. Two
volumes were found in the Montgomery County Historical House located in Rockville,
Maryland that were invaluable in providing this information. To remain true to the
principles inherent in qualitative research, it is necessary to present data in a coherent and
systematic fashion, and to do so in a somewhat consecutive order. A narrative form is
used to accomplish this purpose.
Interviews and documents/reports are described in detail in the
Instruments/Procedure section. These were carefully examined in order to most
effectively describe the unfolding of the program. Questions 1 and 2 addressed the
subjects involvement in the program as teachers, administrators or specialists in subject
areas Questions 3 and 4 helped to place the interviewees in the various aspects of the
program as it changed. Question 5 addressed the research question (i.e., Why did this
program exist for so many years). Themes which related to longevity (changes in focus
and work with teachers), quality, and feasibility(budget and visibility) emerged and are
presented in Chapters 4 and 5.


21
The Arts in Basic Curriculum (ABC) in Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools
in North Carolina involved five voluntary pilot schools with the understanding that the
faculty of each school would develop its own arts program. Subjective observations by
the reporters include the following: The impact of the program was that: the climate of
the school changed, a humanistic concept of education took root, and principals, teachers,
and administrators worked more as a team. In addition, teachers became more involved
in the planning process, the arts took a rightful and meaningful place in the total
curriculum, and children exhibited the joy of leaning (Carter and Adams 1978).
The Open City Project in East Harlem was a project in which students in an early
childhood center participated in cultural and in non-arts theme events that were teacher-
evaluated. Additional evaluations included information tests, attitudinal scales for parents
and teachers, content analysis of curriculum materials, and video tapes of student
behavior, as well as pre- and post-test administration of the Stanford Early School
Achievement Test. Children in the project showed considerable growth in the first seven
months of the program, with rates that were significantly higher than those of the control
group. Children who participated in the Open City Program raised their total reading
scores to the national average (Baker 1978).
Project SEARCH in New York State was a program aimed toward reorienting
teachers attitudes towards the arts. The state department of education encouraged
school districts in rural, suburban and urban communities to develop comprehensive arts
programs. Five school districts were chosen, and more than 20,000 teachers from both
parochial and public schools were involved in the project. Data from a comprehensive
evaluation clearly demonstrated a significant difference in attitudes toward learning
between students in the arts in education classrooms and students in control classrooms.